JP6961940B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is successful, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there is one YU technique to easily draw is performed after the award game execution is performed for a predetermined time period.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention adjusts the launching means capable of launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area and the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the launching means according to the operation of the player. A first game area in which a possible adjusting means and a first ball-entry means into which a game ball can enter are provided, and a game ball launched by the launching means at a first firing intensity can flow down. A game ball that is provided with a region and a second ball-entry means into which a game ball can enter, and is launched by the launching means at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. A second region in which the ball can flow down, a first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminant when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and a predetermined first discriminating condition is satisfied, and the second discriminating means. A second discriminating means capable of executing a second discriminant when a game ball enters the ball entering means and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied, and the first discriminating means by the first discriminating means. The display of the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the result of the discrimination on the display means and the second identification information for showing the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. When the second dynamic display means capable of being dynamically displayed by the means and the first identification information indicating a specific first determination result as a result of the first determination are stopped and displayed, or the second When the second identification information indicating the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed as the result of the discrimination, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player, the first game state, and the first game state. A plurality of game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first game state and a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means are set. The game state setting means can set the second game state after the privilege game is completed, and the end condition setting means can be used as a plurality of end conditions. , The first end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is executed more than the first determination, and the second end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed more than the second determination. The condition and the condition can be set at least, the first end condition can be satisfied when the second determination is executed the first time, and the second end condition is such that the first determination is the first. number and is capable least satisfied when executed different second number, the gaming machine, launch of the game ball toward the playfield be advantageous Oite, the player in the second game condition It has a notification means capable of notifying the launch information for making the player, and one game time is from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the end of the dynamic display. when, as a game period of the game times the second game state the second identification information, wherein the first end condition is not satisfied in the are dynamically displayed, the in the second during the game state first can be set shorter game period than the game time of the game times the second identification information of the termination condition is that obtained satisfied the first count th is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a launching means capable of launching a game ball toward a gaming area and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the launching means according to the operation of the player. , The game area provided with the first ball-entry means through which the game ball can enter, the first area in which the game ball launched by the launching means at the first firing intensity can flow down, and the game ball. Is a game area provided with a second ball-entry means capable of entering a ball, and a game ball launched by the launching means at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can flow down. When a game ball enters the two regions and the first ball entry means and a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means that can execute the first determination and the second ball entry means are used for the game. The second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminant when the ball enters and the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied, and the result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means are shown. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for the display means and the second identification information for showing the result of the second determination by the second determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. When the second dynamic display means that can be made to be displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result as the result of the first determination are stopped and displayed, or specified as the result of the second determination. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the above is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game for giving the privilege to the player, the first game state, and the first game state thereof. A game state setting means that can set a second game state that makes it easier to execute the second determination, and an end condition setting that can set a plurality of end conditions of the second game state that are set by the game state setting means. The game state setting means can set the second game state after the privilege game is completed, and the end condition setting means has the first determination as a plurality of the end conditions. At least a first termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is executed more than the second determination and a second termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed more than the second determination. The first end condition can be set, and the first end condition can be satisfied when the second determination is executed the first time. In the second end condition, the first determination is different from the first number of times. at least capable satisfied when it is 2 times executed, the gaming machine, the second Oite during the game state, firing information for launching the game ball toward the playfield be advantageous to the player When the game number is set to 1 from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the end of the dynamic display. as a game period of the game times the second identification information, wherein the second in game state first end condition is not satisfied is dynamically displayed, the first end condition in the second during a game state is established the second identification information obtained Ru said first count th can be set shorter game period than the game time of the game times be dynamically displayed.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an operation diagram which saw the operation unit from the back side. (A) is a schematic view of the closed state of the operating unit viewed from above, and (b) is a schematic view of the open state of the operating unit viewed from above. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode at the time of entering the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the small hit A is won during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the small hit B is won during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content of the situation display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed strike among the small hit A in-game screens displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the case where a ball wins a prize after a) is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed strike among the small hit B in-game screens displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the case where a ball wins a prize after a) is displayed. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller according to the first embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 2D is a time saving in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the addition table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the opening scenario table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the final state display selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit A in the first embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit B in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process for small hits executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the instruction command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the jackpot, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the time saving state to be displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the left-handed game is started. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of starting the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the form. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode about the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the time saving game in the time saving state in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller according to the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving 2 table in a form. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the hold display selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the game state setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the flowchart executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game content discriminating process to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the various counter update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the time saving state, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state which is displayed by. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example which shows the time saving number of times in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the ROM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the opening scenario 3 table set in the ROM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving remaining period determination table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving remaining period discriminating process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deterministic variation discrimination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when the time saving A is set as the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the case where the time saving B is set as the time saving state. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the time reduction number of times correction effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for ordinary use in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving A fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving B fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number correction process for display which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect modification example of each embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the effect modification example of each embodiment. (B) is a figure explaining the flow of the production in the production modification example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an electric motor provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view which shows that the accessory is in a closed state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when the jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device which can be displayed in. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the time saving game in the time saving state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in an audio lamp control device according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the signal input processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the 6th Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart schematically showing an opening pattern of an electric accessory according to a sixth embodiment. It is a transition diagram which showed the transition destination of the game state in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection table for special figure 1 set in the ROM in the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the special figure 2 selection table set in the ROM in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 81, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 to 7 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

Specifically, a ball launched with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a ball launched with a firing intensity of 40% to 50% always has a variable display. A sphere configured to pass through the area on the left side of the device unit 80 and fired at a firing intensity of 50% to 60% mostly passes through the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, with some being variable display. It passes through the area on the right side of the device unit 80. Further, most of the balls launched with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% pass through the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball is configured to pass through the region on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Has been done.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball opening 64, a second ball opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37a operates. The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, or stop symbols. Is a symbol corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends) or a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which a normal state is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends) or an error symbol. The presence is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds and the time saving state is given after the jackpot ends. There are 5R time-saving jackpots (5R time-saving big hits) that are given a time-saving state, and 5R normal jackpots (5R time-saving no big hits) that are not given a time-saving state after the jackpot ends when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R.

In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit, the privilege given to the player is less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to let) Small hits are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

Here, the "15R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "5R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. Further, the "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state after the jackpot of 5 rounds.

That is, in this pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, it is possible to grant the player the most benefits, "15R time saving jackpot", and the next most benefits. It is configured to provide one of the "5R time-saving jackpot" and the "5R normal jackpot", which has the fewest benefits given to the player among the jackpot games. As a result, even if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, the game is performed while expecting that the big hit game in which the most benefits are given is provided among the big hit games in which the benefits that can be given are different. Can be made.

In this embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the content of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, and the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game. The size is defined, but the size is not limited to this, and the size of the privilege given to the player may be defined by using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits are given without defining the size of the privilege. It is sufficient to just make the contents of the jackpot game different so that it is done.

In addition, the "time saving state" is an added value (privilege) given to the player after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot probability is the same as in the normal state, but a game in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. It is in a state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640 is longer than in the normal state. In addition, in order to set a game state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-mentioned setting contents may be used, or the above-mentioned contents may be used. Alternatively, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number (100 times) as a condition for ending the "time saving state". (1st end condition), or when the number of small hits won in the special symbol lottery reaches the 2nd predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (2nd end condition). When it is established, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any of the multiple end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving state is changed to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set multiple timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play the game while being excited about how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hit A to small hit C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery, and a second small hit type is prepared for each small hit type. The number of times the end condition is satisfied is set differently. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time saving state will end only by the number of small hits won during the time saving state, so that the player is always tense and the time is shortened. You can play a game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (special discharge flow path 650e2 which is a specific area). The V switch 650e3 provided in the above is configured to be a big hit (so-called per type 2) by detecting a sphere (see FIG. 6). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game (V winning expectation) differs depending on the type of small hit that is won. Then, the number of times (the number of small hits) that the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied is reduced for the small hit type in which the small hit game with high V winning expectation is executed. It is configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to associate the expectation of V prizes for winning two types of hits when a small hit is won during a time-saving game with the anxiety that the time-saving state may end. The player can enthusiastically play the game.

In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) as described above. However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol becomes the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). , The end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches the fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times). Further, only some of the above-mentioned many end conditions may be used, or each may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball winning (starting winning) to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are triggered by the passage of a sphere. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the two symbols in a variable manner is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed (see FIG. 10). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third symbol is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (variable display). (Variable display), and the third symbol is special on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.

That is, the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed (the lottery of the special symbol is executed) based on the determination condition (the winning of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is satisfied, and a predetermined value is determined. After the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, the display mode (combination of symbols) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of the special symbol) of the discrimination means. , The identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, may be displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a part of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a hit / miss determination such as a big hit or a miss). The display mode may correspond to the result only), or the display mode may correspond to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and miss) as the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third symbol. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, big hit or small hit) may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is a dynamic display (variable display) in which the lights are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (protruding) for a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entry port 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time saving state than in the gaming state in the normal state. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the operating state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize at the second entry port 640 during the time saving state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is won as compared with the case where the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won in the normal state. The period of operation (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is projected to facilitate the ball from entering the second entry port 640) is configured to be long. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize at the second entry port 640 during the time saving state.

It should be noted that the configuration for making it easy for the ball to win the second entry port 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be used. Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second entry port 640 in the time saving state, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set regardless of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Further, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variation display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time of the game, the variation display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (of the second symbol). It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a). With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state can be displayed. It can be operated according to the operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be defined other than the above. For example, the fluctuation start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a may be defined. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operating pattern advantageous to the player as the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state). The operation pattern) may be set.

As shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the game A part (almost) of the balls flowing down the right side of the board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is missed. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the function of holding that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided, but the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held. In the case of having a function to perform, for example, a place where the player can visually recognize the second symbol holding display means for indicating the number of reserved balls, which is held up to four times in total (for example, the third symbol display device 81). It is good to provide it in a part).

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when it has a function of holding that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the number of holds is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, in the game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game), the first ball entry port 64 is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter the game (so-called right-handed game) in which the ball flows down. Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64. NS.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

Further, each of the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry slot 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

In addition, in the present embodiment, switches (first entry switch, second entry switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a lottery opportunity for a special symbol (big hit lottery opportunity) are provided in the entry opening. The structure is such that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained and a prize ball can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is set. When the switch (detecting means) for detecting the passing ball detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured so that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbol can be entered, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out. It is advisable to provide an entrance. With such a configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired and the number of times the prize ball is acquired can be made different, so that various playability can be provided.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a can be changed into a protruding state (allowable state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a shunting state (regulated state) with the game board 13 shunted. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a shunting state (regulated state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, that is, the second symbol. If the two symbols are won in the lottery, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second entry port 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second entry port 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is defined as the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into the right side (right-handed area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the right-handed area or the left-handed area. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball into the left-handed area in the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is fired into the right-handed area is referred to as a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a lottery trigger for whether or not to operate the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, and the electric accessory 640a is operated. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right-handed area, and is configured so that the right-handed game is performed when the time saving state is set as the game state.

A nail is planted below the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball launched by the left-handed game does not enter the second entry port 640, and the second ball enters during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. With this configuration, in the left-handed game, in order to change the first special symbol, a game is performed in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game performance depending on the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a V winning device 650 whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the lower left direction (lower left direction in the front view of FIG. 2) is provided in the right-handed region. Each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state, the ball passes through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the protruding state, the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). Then, the ball that has reached the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second entry port 640, and if the electric accessory 640a is changed to the shunting state by the time it reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a, it is electrically driven. The ball is configured to enter the general winning opening 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a, the second ball entry port 640, and the general winning opening 63. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing the cover member 655, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 655 by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the pachinko machine 10 or the third symbol display device 81 during the game. It can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by timing the operation of the electric accessory 640a.

Further, in a state where the game is not performed (a state in which the power of the game machine is turned off), the incident light to the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized, and the pachinko machine can be used. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. When the cover member 655 is used to change the internal visibility, the light emitting means is shared by making the light emitting means for decoration available as described above. However, the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a light emitting means for making the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see may be provided exclusively.

Further, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made difficult to see for a predetermined period including the period during which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (that is,). The light emitting means is controlled so that a character (for example, "open") informing that the electric accessory 640a operates is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655 when the winning is won by the lottery of the ordinary symbol. The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the detailed operation timing thereof.

Here, the configuration of the right-handed region of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the region where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on which a sphere can flow down, and is in the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 3). It is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be inclined downward toward. Then, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down into the region a (see FIG. 3) corresponding to the range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is located in the evacuated state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located at the protruding position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. When the electric accessory 640a is changed to the evacuated state when the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the electric accessory 640a is provided below the electric accessory 640a. The ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning opening 63. Finally, when the ball reaches the region c (the region corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second entry port 640.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is configured to operate continuously for different periods in the gaming state, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. When the electric accessory 640a operates in this state, the electric accessory 640a is in a shunting state by the time the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the protruding state reaches the area b (see FIG. 3). In the state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the region c (see FIG. 3). It is configured to be located in.

Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds in the shortened working hours state and 0.2 seconds in the normal state. Then, in the electric accessory 640a, the flow period for the ball to flow down in the region (range from region a to region c) shown in FIG. 3 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. It is configured (0.8 seconds in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, the ball is in a state of flowing down. Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

Further, in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) when the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. , The ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second entry port 640, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Further, in the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and is electrically operated at the timing when it reaches the region b. The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the operation of the electric accessory 640a). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning opening 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the right-handed game is played in the time-saving state, the ball entry port (second ball entry port 640) differs depending on the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the arrival timing of the ball to the electric accessory 640a. Alternatively, by configuring the ball to be guided to the general winning opening 63), the player can be made to continuously perform the right-handed game during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed due to the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 (trigger). However, since it does not have a means for holding and storing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (meaning for holding and storing the right to execute the lottery of Special Figure 2), the change of the special symbol is executed. Even if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the ball is being played, only the privilege of paying out prize balls (5 pieces) according to the entry is given to the player.

As described above, the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second entry opening 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the player to enter the ball into the second entry opening 640 than to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63. (That is, the lottery of special figure 2 and 5 prize balls) can be given to the player, and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) cannot be executed (during special symbol change). If there is, it is configured so that it is possible to give a privilege (that is, 10 prize balls) that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the general prize opening 63 than the second entry opening 640.

As a result, the entry port (the entry opening where many benefits can be obtained) that the player desires to enter can be changed according to the game situation (whether or not the special symbol is changed), so that the time is shortened. It is possible to entertain the player with a right-handed game in the state. Further, in order to allow the ball to enter both the second entry opening 640 and the general winning opening 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. A long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second entry port 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates, but other than that, for example, during a time saving state. The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the above is slightly longer than the period (for example, 0.9 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640 (0.8 seconds). Seconds) may be configured. With this configuration, after passing the ball through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since so-called stop hitting) can be suppressed, it is possible to continuously perform the right-handed hitting game in a time-saving state and improve the operation of the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the V winning device is won. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is configured to operate so as to be variable to an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is also described above for a part of the winning "big hit" of the special symbol (the big hit of the big hit type is the big hit D). It is configured to operate in the same way as when the "small hit" is won. Thereby, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 in the closed state is sphered. The ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (lower left side in the front view of FIG. 3). , Outflow toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small hit game), the ball wins in the V winning device 650.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 seconds × 12 times (see FIG. 25), and the opening / closing door is opened at the timing when the V winning device 650 is opened. The ball flowing down on the 650f1 wins the V winning device 650. The balls that have won the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A). There is. With this configuration, no matter from which position of the opening / closing door 650f1 the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650, the ball can be smoothly inserted. It can be made to flow down.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but the opening / closing door 650f1 flows down during the opening period of the opening / closing door 650f1. Other periods may be set as long as the ball in the ball can win the V winning device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened is 12 times in one small hit game, but other times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the small hit game, the period from opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 once to the next opening (inter-opening interval period) is 5 during the small hit game. After the 10th and 10th opening operations, 5 seconds is set, and at other timings, 0.5 seconds is set. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win a ball during the period when the small hit game is being performed. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guidance display that emphasizes and urges the player to play the right-handed game.

Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is such that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Further, the same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the tenth opening operation during the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small hit game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, in a specific game (small hit game) in which the opening operation is executed a plurality of times, a part of the interval period between opening is set longer than the others, and it is determined that the proper game is not performed. By making it possible to display a game guidance display for promoting appropriate game contents, it is possible to make a player who is playing an erroneous game play a game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, a special opening interval period longer than the others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hit game. By providing the player with a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display during one small hit game in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform an appropriate game. When the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, it is preferable to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that the player who is normally playing the game cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the small hit game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that it can be balled, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winnings (10 pieces), which is a condition for ending the small hit game during the 10th opening operation, is reached. It will be reached and the small hit game will be completed.

That is, the interval period between openings executed after the 10th opening operation during the small hit game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing to display the game guidance display using this timing, an unnecessarily long special opening interval period can be set for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It will not be executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

In addition, when setting the interval period between the first special opening as in the present embodiment at the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) to reach even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. The timing when the first special opening interval period starts (the fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the first special opening interval period starts (the fifth opening operation). It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entering the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball. If it is determined, a notification effect for notifying the fact is displayed during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. It is good to configure it to be displayed. As a result, the special open interval period set during the small hit game can be effectively used according to the content of the game.

Further, in the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game ends without letting the V winning device 650 win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hit game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with an opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form a V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that projects to the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 5 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5 (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed on the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5A.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, it is possible to continuously perform a right-handed game during a time-saving game, a big hit game, and a small hit game, so that the time and effort to change the game method according to the game state is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state of the opening / closing door 650f1, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. Can be made to. Therefore, the time required for the small hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guidance piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. NS. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Will be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the jackpot game. Further, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow in which the ball cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is for communicating with any of the paths (normal discharge flow path 650e1), and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. The flow path is switched to (see FIG. 6B).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal game play, so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. It is configured in. Then, when a small hit is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents specified in the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is specially discharged. It is configured so that the flow path 650e2 can flow down. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, that is, the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6A), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In this way, the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of. With this configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected that the opening / closing door 650f1 has been opened even though the small hit has not been won, and then the flow route of the ball is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball is surely released. It is possible to suppress the situation where the special discharge flow path 650e2 flows down.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. The end timing of the small hit game (when the end condition of the small hit game (when the V winning device 650 has a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established). If all the game balls that have entered the V-winning device 650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after the event has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V-winning device 650 and the outside is determined. It is preferable to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the winning ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not the ball passes through the V switch 650e3, so that whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is finished is sorted. Can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening (specific area) for granting the jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to be on differs according to the small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) set when the small hit is won. Is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game differs depending on the content of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win the small hit but also play the game while expecting the small hit game with a high expectation of V prize to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment, the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is a V winning device along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the 650 through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 to the left upper surface 650y2 and flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. The flow period is set to 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win a prize when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view of a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, it moves so as to evacuate to the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning can be made. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the shelter position.

Further, in the V winning device 650, no matter from which position the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball flow after winning is smooth. 1 regulation member 651 and 2nd regulation member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2), and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are the 1st regulating member 651 and the first. 2 It is configured so that it is aligned in a row via the regulation member 652 and then flows down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected at the detection port 650a1. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the ball detection switch 650c1, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652) for aligning the spheres before the spheres pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one sphere is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball clogging in the V winning device 650, which hinders the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation is performed in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (result of the lottery of the special symbol) of the discrimination means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the opening interval period (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small hit game is surely made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

Further, even if only the balls flowing down on the variable member are made to win the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, a predetermined number (10 pieces) can be won during the small hit game. Since the number of opening operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be larger than the number of winning conditions (10) in the small hit game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a long opening period, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive number of balls are won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 8, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a first frame button 22, a second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, it is referred to as a frame button 22). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the effect content at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character for production (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10A, the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 imitates the numbers "0" to "9". It is composed of each type of main symbol. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do so. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). As shown in FIG. 10B, a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A). That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10, when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable, the voice guidance using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used. It is configured to execute the light emission guidance that was used. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2 is output, such as a voice indicating "right-handed".

Further, as the light emitting guide using the lamp display device 227, for example, in the case of guiding "right-handed", a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as the light emitting means are lit in order from the left side to the right side. Light emission control. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp to which region of the game board 13 the ball should be fired by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that the direction in which the ball is launched to the player (game direction) has been switched not only by the display content of the third symbol display device 81 but also by voice guidance and light emission guidance. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game direction has been changed.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm1 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is urged to be pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a in which the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is formed from a special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b on which 3 symbols are displayed (see FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, even when the display effect is executed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which special symbol the third symbol corresponds to is changing. .. The pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a and the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b are formed, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one variation is used in the small display area Dm1. A display area may be provided so that only the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner among the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the lower right of the front view in the main display area Dm. Although the details will be described later, this small display area Dm3 is a situation (state) for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state (time saving state). ) Display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11A) is a display area. As a result, the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 allows the player to play the game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 10B, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so that the sub-display area Ds Is displayed with a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically. Further, the player may be visually notified of the size of the number of reserved balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information related to the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for 1 second (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the lottery based on the reserved ball is performed. The corresponding variable display is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time. In this way, after the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stopped display state is continued for a predetermined period of time, and then the next special symbol change is started. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a new special symbol change has been started. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned symbol determination period is always provided after the lapse of the symbol variation time, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10B, the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display areas Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the ball is inserted into the first entry port 64. Of these, it is formed as a hold display area for displaying a hold symbol, which is the number of balls (hold balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed. In the first display area Ds1, the first reserved symbol Dsb, the second, in the order in which the winning information acquired when the ball wins in the first ball opening 64 is stored (in the order of the oldest reserved timing). The reserved symbol Dsc, the third reserved symbol Dsd, and the fourth reserved symbol Dse are displayed. Then, the pending symbol corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed is displayed as the executing symbol Dsa at the center position of the sub-display area Ds.

The reserved symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 is the reserved symbol corresponding to the next fluctuation (front of FIG. 10B) when the variable display being executed ends and the next fluctuation is started. The first reserved symbol Dsb) displayed on the far right in the visual sense is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the right and displayed. Then, the erased first reserved symbol Dsb is displayed as the executing symbol Dsa. As a result, it is possible to notify the player which of the reserved symbols corresponds to the variable display being executed. Therefore, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol can be displayed. When an effect that raises the expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called look-ahead effect) is executed, the player can easily determine that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction in which each reserved symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to second reserved symbol Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special symbol change is started. Since the running symbol Dsa is displayed (to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 10B), the reserved symbols (first reserved symbol Dsb to second reserved symbol Dse) and the running symbol Dsa are played. Since the player can grasp in a series of sequences, the player can easily grasp which reserved symbol corresponds to the variable display being executed.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball opening 64 can be held up to 4 times, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second entry port 640 may be set to be held up to a predetermined number, or the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 640. It may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for, or conversely, may be smaller. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, and an effect description for supplementing the content of the effect (display effect) executed in the main display area Dm is displayed (FIG. 11 (FIG. 11). b) See). In this way, a plurality of information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the variation display information of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol currently being executed. Display effect information for indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result corresponding to is a specific lottery result (big hit winning), effect explanation information supplementing the content of the display effect information, and hold symbol information indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol. By displaying the running symbol information or the like indicating the running symbol in a predetermined section (area), various information displayed at the same time can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first special symbol) is triggered by the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In addition, in the third symbol, the variation display is performed in common with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol, which is more likely to give a lottery result more favorable to the player than the first special symbol, is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is configured so that the two special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

However, in the first embodiment, the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol are substantially specially digested in order. The change of the symbol is executed. For example, when the change of the new special symbol is started, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable state, that is, the first. If the timing of starting a new variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol and the timing of the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting winning) match, the variation of the second special symbol will occur. It is configured to be executed with priority.

As a result, the opportunity to receive a lottery that is advantageous to the player (the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) is lost by executing the lottery that is more disadvantageous (the lottery of the first special symbol). Can be reliably prevented.

As the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect suggesting the presence or absence of various contents that can be established based on the lottery of the special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is a part of the case where the jackpot winning suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot was won by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the jackpot was not won by the special symbol lottery (winning out). The game state is advantageous to the player due to the small hit winning suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the player has won the small hit that gives the player less benefits than the big hit (for example, payout of the prize ball) and the lottery result of the special symbol. When the game state transition suggestion effect for suggesting the transition to the time reduction state or the time reduction state is set as the game state, the time reduction state ends according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the variation display of the special symbol. A time-saving state end suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the award is to be performed.

In addition, the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol (big hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect, etc.) is the third symbol that is stopped and displayed after the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Depending on the combination, the effect using the period until the lottery result is notified (dynamic display period) is executed. For example, the stop display indicating that the third symbol has won the jackpot during the dynamic display period. Of the modes (for example, the combination of "777"), only a part of the combinations are stopped and displayed in the reach display mode (for example, only two of the three third symbols are stopped and displayed at "77". The display mode) in which the remaining third symbol is changed) is displayed, and then the story characteristic is displayed in the main display area Dm with the third symbol showing the reach display mode displayed in the small display area Dm1. The effect of having it is executed, and when the story is completed correctly, the effect of stopping and displaying the third symbol at "777" is executed.

In the above-mentioned example, the reach display mode is a state in which a part of the combination of the third symbols is stopped and displayed in a manner that matches the combination indicating that the lottery result is a hit (big hit). The display mode may be a reach display mode, for example, a part of the third symbol may be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the reach state, or a combination of some of the third symbols may be displayed. May be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the reach state, instead of the combination indicating that the jackpot has been won. By configuring so that the player can grasp that the reach state is established by confirming a part of the stop display mode of the third symbol in this way, the player wins a big hit. Expectations for what has been done can be gradually increased, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous effect to be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol. In this continuous effect, when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the prize information is obtained. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation). Is an effect to suggest to the player by using the period during which is executed.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, the player can be directed for a longer period of time. Can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the lottery result (for example, deviation) of the special symbol can be continuously produced without highlighting each variation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced. can.

Further, in the first embodiment, in addition to the effect of suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state is changed according to the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol. It is configured to also execute a suggestive effect (time saving state end suggestion effect). This time-saving state end suggestion effect is an effect that is continuously executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time-saving state, and is the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the special symbol change is executed) or the special symbol. This is an effect to suggest that the time saving state may end according to the number of times that the lottery result of the above is a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit win).

Here, the content of the above-mentioned time-saving state end suggestion effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640, and the second entry is made according to the operating state (variable state) of the electric accessory 640a. A state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball mouth 640 (first state) and a state in which the ball is easy to enter (second state) are set. Further, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and when a small hit is won, a small hit game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. NS. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge flow path 650e2 as a specific area through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 can pass, and the V switch indicates that the ball has passed (flowed down) through the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured so that a jackpot (per 2 types) is set when the 650e3 detects it. Then, the time saving state set as the gaming state is advantageous for the player in which the electric accessory 640a can easily move (variable) to the second state (a state in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640). Since the game is in the game state, a right-handed game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 is performed during the time saving state.

As described above, the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when the ending condition (time saving ending condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol change based on the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol lottery is performed. This is configured so that the time saving state ends (the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state) when any of the conditions when the small hit is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) is satisfied.

By making it possible to set a plurality of time saving end conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state advantageous to the player continues. On the other hand, it suggests (notifies) the player whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving information (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time saving state) updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition. ), There is a problem that the shortened working hours, which is advantageous to the player, suddenly ends, giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, and the time saving information updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time saving state). ) Is suggested (notified) to the player as a time saving state end suggestion effect, so that the player can play the game while predicting the period in which the time saving state is continuously set. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is suddenly ended and the player feels dissatisfied.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions include a time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player (a time-saving end condition that is established by winning the jackpot) and other disadvantageous time-saving end conditions. In the time saving state end suggestion effect executed during the time saving state, the presence or absence of the time saving end condition is simply satisfied, and the time saving information updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, the number of small hits won during the time saving state). Instead of executing the effect based on the information indicating It is configured to run.

With this configuration, not only is the player predicting whether or not the timing for ending the time saving state is approaching, but also predicting whether or not the time saving ending condition that is advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make people interested in the effect to be executed (effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a plurality of types of small hit games are executed, and according to the small hit game to be executed ( (Depending on the set small hit type), the expectation that two types of hits are set during the small hit game is different. Then, among the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions, as the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a predetermined number of small hits in the special symbol lottery, the number of times (time-saving end condition) is set for each small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit. Is configured to set the number of winnings).

With this configuration, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by the small hit winning of the special symbol, the time saving end condition established this time is advantageous to the player (the small hit type that is easy to hit two types is set. Whether it is a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by the fact that it is done) or a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player (a time-saving end condition that is established because a small hit type that is difficult to hit two types is set) Can be suggested (notified) to the player. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied by winning the small hit, the player can pay attention to the effect executed by the time saving state end suggestion effect.

In addition, the number of times set for each small hit type (the number of times the time saving end condition is satisfied for each small hit type) is set differently according to the expected degree per two types of each small hit type. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the small hit type with high expectation per type (for example, small hit A) finishes in a shorter time with a smaller number of winnings than the small hit type with low expectation per type (for example, small hit C). It is configured so that the conditions are satisfied.

By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends based on the small hit winning of the special symbol in the time saving state end suggestion effect, or until just before the time saving state ends. When the effect indicating that the time saving information has been updated is executed, it is possible to make the player predict that the small hits won this time are the small hits with high expectations for each of the two types. That is, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the effect content of the time saving state end suggestion effect and the period during which the time saving state continues, and the effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition advantageous for the player, the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the big hit is won as described above and the small hit type that is easy to hit two kinds of the small hit games are set. Although the time saving end condition that is satisfied in the case is set, it is not limited to this, and among a plurality of time saving end conditions, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the player is more likely than when the other time saving end condition is satisfied. It suffices if it is advantageous to. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, a special state is set in which the special symbol lottery executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine having a function, the time saving end condition that is advantageous to the player may be a time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, a special symbol high-probability state in which it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot or a special symbol low-probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot is set, and a normal symbol is won. By setting either the easy normal symbol high probability state or the normal symbol low probability state that is harder to win than that, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal) is set as a plurality of game states. Symbol low probability state), probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), latent state (special symbol high probability state) , Ordinary symbol low probability state) and four game states are provided, and the degree of advantage of the player in each game state is configured so that at least the latent state is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state.

Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, only when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state By shifting to, the latent probability state is set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set, and after the jackpot ends, the jackpot is set in the state where the probability change state is set, rather than the game state other than the latent state is set. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the prize, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the game state in which the latent state is set is more advantageous to the player. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned example, the condition for setting the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times while the probability change state is set. By setting only when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is set as the time saving end condition that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the configuration of the above-mentioned example, a configuration in which the latent probability state is set in a small part (for example, 1%) when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set may be added.

As a result, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player can be set regardless of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is won or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. However, in this case, the time-saving end condition in which the latent probability state is easily set is the time-saving end condition that is more advantageous to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state end suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol and a time saving state is set after the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the time saving state is set, the characters “pounding rush rush” indicating that the time saving state is set in the main display area Dm are displayed. This "pounding rush" is an effect executed in response to the period in which the time saving state is set, and is a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current gaming state is the time saving state.

Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, the characters "right-handed" are displayed to guide the game to be executed during the time-saving state, and it is notified that the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. .. In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 during the pounding rush, and the character 801 (see FIG. 12 (a)) imitating a boy is displayed in the treasure box 802 (FIG. 12 (a)) in the central part of the main display area Dm. The effect of searching for (see) is executed. The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a status (state) display mode Dm3a for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends is displayed. In this situation (state) display mode Dm3a, whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol change has won a big hit, and the time saving state is set based on the currently executed special symbol change. It can be changed to various display modes (see FIG. 15) depending on the determination result of whether or not to end or whether or not the information for the condition for ending the time saving state is updated based on the currently executed special symbol variation. It is configured to be done.

In FIG. 11A, a display mode “display mode 1” (see FIG. 15) indicating that the currently executed special symbol variation has not won a big hit or a small hit is displayed. The display screen shown in FIG. 11A is a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, and the change of the first special symbol already held and stored at the time of winning the big hit is executed. Therefore, of the small display area Dm2, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a, and the pending symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the running symbol Dsa. Display mode "Circle" is displayed.

Here, the display screen when there is a reserved symbol that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol (held symbol) that has already been reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). .. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents in the case where the time saving state is set after the jackpot and there is a reserved symbol that has won the jackpot. In FIG. 11B, the winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes the winning information for winning a big hit, and the small display area Dm3 is a display mode indicating that a special symbol is hit (design hit). "Display mode 3" (see FIG. 15) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "Expect" indicating the contents of the situation display mode Dm3b are displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 11B, since the jackpot is won immediately after the time saving state is set (after the special drawing 1 fluctuation is executed three times after the time saving state is set), the above-mentioned time saving state is obtained. It is set to win the jackpot while maintaining the display screen shown in FIG. 11B without executing the pounding rush executed during. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pounding rush from being executed for a short period of time.

In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (effect start screen during the time saving state) in a mode different from the normal (see FIG. 11A), which is "Pounding rush rush?", Is displayed. The display screen shown in FIG. 11B may be configured to be displayed even when the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, for example. As a result, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush !!" shown in FIG. 11A is displayed after the jackpot game is completed, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the time saving state has been set. , The player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush?" Shown in FIG. 11B is displayed after the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the jackpot is won in the hold. It is possible to notify the player that it is one of the above, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition to the above-described configuration, there is a discriminating means for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning the jackpot in the reserved symbols existing after the jackpot game is completed, and there is winning information for winning the jackpot by the discriminating means. If it is determined that, the same display mode (for example, the character of "big chance") may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) set after the end of the big hit game. .. Further, the jackpot information determined by the above-mentioned discrimination means is analyzed, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (look-ahead jackpot information) is determined, and the jackpot is determined based on the discrimination result. It may be configured to set the display mode after the end of the game.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information ends, the characters "Pounding rush rush !!" (that is, the time saving state) are displayed as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. If it is determined that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game is "Pounding rush rush?" "(That is, a display mode that does not notify that the time has been shortened) may be displayed.

With this configuration, if the winning information that wins the jackpot is included in the reserved symbol that exists after the end of this jackpot game, it is not the game state set after the end of this jackpot game, but the reserved symbol. Based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot included in (next jackpot), the display mode displayed after the end of the current jackpot game can be set. Therefore, for example, after the end of this jackpot game, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set, and during that time saving state, the jackpot included in the reserved symbol is won, and after the jackpot game ends, the player becomes a player more than the time saving state. When an unfavorable normal state is set, a display mode that does not notify the player that the time saving state has been set is displayed, so that the time saving state that is advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

Here, the display mode of the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the type of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, nine types of situation display modes can be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the lottery result of the changing special symbol (big hit winning, small hit winning). ) Or, the status display mode is set according to the content (number of small hit wins, number of special symbol changes) that is updated when the special symbol changes with respect to the time saving end condition that the time saving state ends when it is established. It is displayed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, by grasping the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, it is possible to make the player predict how the time saving state will progress due to the special symbol change during execution, which is easy to understand. A game can be provided.

To specifically explain the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, "display mode 1 (first display mode)" is displayed as a "white circle" (see FIG. 11 (a)). ) Display mode. In this "display mode 1", the contents related to the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations and the number of small hit winnings) without winning the big hit are up to a predetermined stage. This is a display mode that is set when it has not been updated. When this "display mode 1" is displayed, it can be confirmed that the time-saving game (time-saving state) does not end due to this special symbol change, and the player can expect the next and subsequent special symbol changes with peace of mind. ..

Next, "display mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "black circles". This "display mode 2" is a display mode that is set when it indicates that a small hit has been won and the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state have not been updated to a predetermined stage. .. Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a big hit (per two types) is set in the wake of the small hit game, and the content of the small hit game to be executed (the small hit of the winning small hit). It is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during a small hit game) in which two types of hits are set differs depending on the type).

This "display mode 2" notifies the player that the small hit has been won, but does not notify the small hit type of the winning small hit, so that the player has won the small hit this time. The game is played while expecting that the small hit type of is a small hit type (for example, small hit A) in which it is easy to set two types of hits. Also, by winning the small hit, you will play the game while feeling the possibility that the end condition of the time saving state will be updated (updated within the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage), so be tense. You can play a game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of small hit types are classified into a small hit type (small hit A) in which two types of hits are easily set and a small hit type in which two types of hits are more difficult to set than the small hit A. (Small hit B, small hit C) is set, and as the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state that can be established based on the small hit winning, the number of winnings is set as small as the small hit type, which is easy to set the two types of hits. It is configured to be done. That is, for each of the plurality of small hit types, the time saving end condition is set differently according to the degree of advantage to the player, and the lottery result that is advantageous to the player has the time saving end condition. It is configured so that it can be easily established.

Therefore, for example, when the "display mode 2" is displayed immediately after the time saving state is set, it is predicted that one of all the small hit types has been won, and the time saving state is set and the predetermined period has elapsed. If "Display mode 2" is displayed later (after winning multiple small hits during the time saving state), the small hits for which the number of winnings is set to be large as the time saving end condition, that is, the two types of hits It can be predicted that a small hit with a small hit type that is difficult to set has been won. In this way, since the lottery result of this special symbol can be predicted in detail based on the type of the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed period of the time saving state, it is fun to predict to the player. Can be provided.

"Display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode displayed by a "sun mark using a white circle" (see FIG. 11B). This "display mode 3" is a display mode indicating that the jackpot (per symbol) of the special symbol has been won. As a result, when the jackpot (big hit game) is set by a plurality of triggers as in the present embodiment, the trigger for which the jackpot (big hit game) is set can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

"Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 14A). In this "display mode 4", the condition that the small hit B or the small hit C (that is, the small hit with low expectation per two types) is won as the small hit type, and the time saving state ends, and the time saving state are set. This is a display mode set when the ending condition is updated to a predetermined stage.

"Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of last chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 13A). This "display mode 5" is a display mode that is set when a small hit is won and a condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. By displaying this "display mode 5", the player is notified that the time saving condition has been completed.

By configuring in this way, the time saving state will end unless two types of hits are obtained in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit that was won this time, at the stage before the small hit game is executed. Since it is possible to notify the player at (a stage before the special symbol indicating that the small hit has been won is stopped and displayed), the small hit game is performed more enthusiastically than usual. Can be made.

"Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters in a large pinch in a white circle" (see FIG. 14B). This "display mode 6" is a display mode set when the small hit C, which has the lowest expectation for each of the two types of small hits, is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. The "display mode 6" is for suggesting to the player that the time saving state ends by winning the small hit (small hit C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that the special symbol change this time is a time saving change again during the time saving state, the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is suddenly ended, and the player is affected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a confusing situation.

The "display mode 7 (seventh display mode)" is a display mode displayed in "characters of intense heat in a white circle". This "display mode 7" is a display mode set when the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two small hit types, is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, "1 time" is set for the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two types, as a time saving end condition (condition for ending the number of winnings) that can be satisfied when a small hit is won. Therefore, as the explanation of "display mode 7", it is explained that the setting is made when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types are not limited to this. Of these, it may be used as a display mode to indicate only that the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two types, has been won.

"Display mode 8 (8th display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "a character ending in a white circle". This "display mode 8" is set when the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is satisfied without winning the big hit and the small hit. This is a display mode. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In the first embodiment, when the winning count end condition and the variation count end condition are satisfied by the same special symbol variation (lottery) as the condition for ending the time saving state, the variation count end condition is satisfied. It is configured to discriminate. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the variation number end condition is satisfied, when the small hit A is won, the "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit has been won after making the player think that the time saving state has ended, so that the player can play a game that is unexpected. Can be provided.

"Display mode 9 (9th display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of? In a white circle". This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set without being related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the update information of the time saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the progress status of the time saving state. In this way, by making it possible to set a display mode in which the player cannot be notified of the game state or the game situation, each time the special symbol change is executed for the player, the special symbol change is related to this time. There is no need to provide information (updated information).

In the first embodiment, by displaying the "display mode 9", it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand (make it difficult to grasp) the game content in the time saving state. In addition, a determination means for determining whether or not to display the display modes 1 to 9 in the small display area Dm3 may be provided, and the display content may be determined based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the content of the pounding rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content of the pounding rush executed during the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state, and the small hit A is set as the small hit type. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content displayed while the 2nd special symbol which won a small hit is changing.

As shown in FIG. 12A, in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b, and the second special symbol (2nd special symbol as the running symbol Dsa) ( A "triangular mark" indicating Special Figure 2) is displayed. In this state, after all the first special symbols (special figure 1) that are reserved and stored in the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 (a) are digested (without the reserved memory of the newly executed special symbol). , This is a state showing the case where the change of the second special symbol is started due to (trigger) that the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entry port 640.

The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) is satisfied when the small hit A is set once, and therefore, due to this special symbol change. , "Display mode 5" is displayed as the status (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the small hit is won in the second display area Ds2. The word "Treasure chest found" is displayed to suggest.

Then, when the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the small hit, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows FIG. 12 (b). The display contents shown in are displayed. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the second special symbol during the variable display in FIG. 12A is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1, the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination "341" for showing the lottery result (small hit) of the second special symbol. Then, the treasure box 802 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "(the contents of the treasure box) are ..." for guiding the development of the future production are displayed in the second display area Ds2.

This treasure box 802 is used to show the game result of the small hit game to be executed immediately after, and the effect of successfully or failing to open the treasure box 802 is executed according to the result of the small hit game. NS. The content of the effect executed according to the result of the small hit game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13A, the content of the effect when two types of hits are obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when two types of hits are won (V prizes are won) in the small hit game in which the small hit A executed during the time saving state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 13A, when a V prize is won during the small hit game (when the ball winning the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball) , The effect of successfully opening the treasure chest 802 is executed, and the V display 803 indicating that the jackpot game is set is displayed. Then, the characters "big hit" indicating that the big hit (per two types) have been acquired are displayed in the second display area Ds2.

On the other hand, if the two types of hits cannot be obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. FIG. 13B schematically shows the display contents when the small hit A executed during the time saving state did not win the two types of hits (V did not win) in the small hit game in which the small hit A was set. It is a schematic diagram. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied by winning once for the small hit in which the small hit A is set, the small hit game of the small hit A is performed. If the V prize cannot be won, the time saving state ends and the normal state is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13B, when the small hit game of the small hit A fails to win the V prize, the failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 exploded is displayed, and the time saving state is displayed in the second display area Ds2. The text "Sorry, rush end" is displayed to indicate that is ending. After this screen is displayed, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 as game guidance according to the normal state, and the screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, the effect when the small hit B for which the small hit B is set is won during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small hit B for which the small hit B is set is won for the first time in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in the present embodiment, "three wins for a small hit in which a small hit B is set" can be set as one of the time reduction end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is configured in. Here, when the small hit for which the small hit B is set is won for the first time during the time saving state, the display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. 14A, and the main display area is displayed. The treasure chest 804 is displayed in Dm.

This treasure box 804 has a different display mode from the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12 (b), and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for each of the two types of small hits won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that the treasure chest (treasure box 802) in a luxurious display mode is more easily displayed when the small hit (small hit A), which has a high expectation for each of the two types, is won. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per type 2 depending on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. can.

In the small hit game (small hit game corresponding to the small hit B) executed after the display screen of FIG. 14 (a) is displayed, if a V prize is won, the same effect display screen as in FIG. 13 (a) is displayed. It is displayed (the only difference is that the display mode of the opened treasure box is changed to the treasure box 804), while if the V prize is not won, the effect display screen indicating that the contents of the opened treasure box 804 is empty is displayed. After that, the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed, and the effect of the boy 801 searching for the treasure box again is executed.

Next, the effect when the small hit C in which the small hit C is set is won during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small hit C in which the small hit C is set is won five times in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in the present embodiment, "5 wins for a small hit in which a small hit C is set" can be set as one of the time reduction end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is configured in. Here, when the small hit C in which the small hit C is set is won five times during the time saving state, the display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. 14 (b), and the main display is displayed. The treasure chest 805 is displayed in the area Dm.

This treasure box 805 has a different display mode from the above-mentioned treasure box 802,804b, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation per two types in the small hit won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that the treasure chest (treasure box 805) having a poor display mode is more likely to be displayed when the small hit (small hit C) with the lowest expectation per type 2 is won. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per type 2 depending on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. can.

That is, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed, it is highly possible that the time saving end condition is satisfied by winning the small hit (small hit C) with the lowest expectation for each type 2. Therefore, the player will play the small hit game to be executed after this while praying for a V prize.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol executed during the time saving state can be set, and a plurality of set time saving end conditions can be set. It is possible to execute an effect (display of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to grasp the situation of the time saving state based on whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the update status until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state suddenly ends and the player is confused.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16A is a display screen displayed when the right for two types has not been acquired when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hit game in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type is executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen displayed in. Further, FIG. 17A is displayed when the right for each of the two types has not been acquired when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hit game in which the small hit B or C is set as the small hit type is executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed when the right of is acquired.

In the first embodiment, the small hit game is configured to open the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small hit game, and at the 5th or 10th opening timing, the small hit game is executed. The V switch 650e3 is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays a highlight guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set the display instruction command to make it.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball while the highlighting guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player is achieved. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hit game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is reliably configured to win the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. The ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 despite the configuration as described above, the third symbol is displayed when the small hit game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the display for guiding the right-handed hit to the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10B) of the display device 81. Alternatively, it is possible that the game is stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the right-handed game by changing the display for guiding the right-handed person displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, as a timing for displaying the highlighting guide display mode (see FIG. 16A), when the right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guide display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game is performed. The timing is set so that the launched ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guidance display mode Dy1 cannot let the ball flow down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small hit game.

Further, in the first embodiment, the small hit game (small hit A) having a high expectation per two types is executed because the expected degree of the two types is different depending on the winning small hit type. The content of the effect display that is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing, depending on whether the game is a small hit game (small hits B or C) with a low expectation for two types. It's different.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the first ball entry port 64, which is composed of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and is provided in this area. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the ball entering the second entry port 640 and a configuration for holding and storing the ball passing through the through gate 67, these configurations are not provided. However, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area or a normal symbol holding ball storage area may be provided.

Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Further, the first hit random number table 202a is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of random numbers that are small hits is set differently (see FIG. 20). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big hits or small hits) to the player is increased between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 20 (b) shows the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 20 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the first hit random number table 202a, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It's a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (that is, that is). It is stipulated as a judgment value of (out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as the jackpot determination values, and "5 to 998" is the small hit determination value. "990-999" is specified as a determination value other than that (that is, out of order). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is determined, and when the value is any of "0-4", it is determined as a big hit, and it is determined by any of "5-989". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, in a state in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

Here, unless the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbols at the time of lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. It is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the total number of random numbers is 1000, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 5, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different playability between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49". If it is, the jackpot type is "big hit B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving times is 1). Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player, "big hit A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving is 1). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "big hit A", the "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player because the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

"Big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "big hit C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and 90 A 5 round jackpot game is selected at a rate of%. In addition, a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the reduced working hours state is selected at a rate of 50%.

Next, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (c). FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D". That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big hit D" for the player is always selected as the big hit type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (d), the content of time saving for each type of jackpot will be described.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or five or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal state and a time saving state, and the range of random value values set for each stop type that is out of order is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state or a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

For example, in a time-saving state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because big hits are likely to occur. It is selected, and "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to the game state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for the normal state and for the time saving state, but other than that. A dedicated table may be provided according to the gaming state. For example, as a gaming state, it becomes easier to win a special symbol hit (big hit) (it becomes easier to win than a normal state), and a high probability state (high special symbol). In a gaming machine having a probability change state (probability state, probability change state), a stop type selection table for the probability change state may be provided.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball is in the first entry port 64 in a state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game). Alternatively, it is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is set.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small hit type selection table 202f is defined so that three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is "0", the small hit type is "small hit A (big hit A when passing V)", and any of "1 to 10". If it is, the small hit type is "small hit B (big hit B when passing V)", and if it is any of "11 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit C (passing V)". Time jackpot A) ”.

Here, each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) is executed after the small hit game is completed when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the big hit A (15R time saving big hit) is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time saving state is executed. As a result, one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set. Further, in the case of the small hit B, the big hit B (5R time saving big hit) 5R time saving one big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. It is configured to be executed, and then one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state. ing. In the case of the small hit C, the big hit A (15R time saving big hit) is set as in the case of the small hit A, and after the small hit C is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. Is executed, but after the big hit game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small hit type, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game is completed and the game state set after the big hit game can be different. Specifically, the small hit A is the most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit game is completed. It is set as a small hit, and the small hit B is set to be more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned small hit A because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R), but a time saving state is set after the big hit game. NS. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is once (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be ended. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is used in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state and in the state where the time saving state is set. A variation pattern table 202d2 for shortening the working hours is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "off", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation of 7 seconds is specified in association with the range of "140 to 149", and a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "140 to 149", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "150 to 179". Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is specified in association with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and various normal reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds correspond. It is specified by attaching a super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "30 to 189", and various special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds in the range of "190 to 198". Has been done.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. If a long deviation of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. Long off is stipulated.

In this way, any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured not to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and therefore the normal state. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol in, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second special symbol is illegally drawn in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is illegally executed, as a result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol executed illegally, the result of the lottery (variation) that is out of order is forcibly executed. It may be configured to be created and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is 7 seconds) when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order. Approximately 70%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 15%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 10%), and 20 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 5%). .. Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it will be easier to select in the order of 80 seconds (selection ratio is about 80%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is about 15%), 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%). It is stipulated in.

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) are related, and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special It is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected can be suggested by the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the symbol is out of order. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (big hit B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won in a short variation time, even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the symbol type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4, and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is specified in the range of "0 to 198", that is, a short deviation of 2 seconds is specified in the entire range, and when the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". A short hit with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the range, that is, the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is "out of", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. If the fluctuation time is 20 seconds off and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds in the entire range. Is stipulated. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the number of fluctuations is one or more, and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the fluctuation time is specified as 30 seconds in the entire range and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 160" and the fluctuation time is 10 seconds. Is specified, and a medium / small hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "161 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "big hit", a medium / small hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second random number table 202c, there is a low probability time of the normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. Two types may be provided, one for (the period during which the time is shortened). In this case, the number of hit random numbers included in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of hit random numbers different, the probability of winning can be changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state, and if the gaming state is the time saving state, the second symbol is displayed. In the device 83, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the reduced working hours state, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol for 30 seconds.

If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set as a stop symbol (second symbol). The "○" symbol is lit and displayed. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the second symbol is stopped display (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state and If the time is also shortened at the start of the fluctuation of the second symbol, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second entry port 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and the number of times of opening the second entrance 640 may be arbitrarily set.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second entrance 640, number of times of opening) are changed according to the set gaming state. When the game state at the start of the change of the normal symbol is the time saving state, the time of the change display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the case of the normal state, and further. If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period when the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is also set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts operating, otherwise. Compared with, the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It becomes a state. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol are determined. The fluctuation time of the second symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol). From the start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, a discriminating means for continuously discriminating that the time saving state is set is provided, and the discriminating result of the discriminating means is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second symbol. And the operation content of the electric accessory 640a may be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation and at the start of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol that started to fluctuate at the timing when the normal state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or , Based on a lottery of one second symbol, such as when the second symbol that started to fluctuate at the timing when the time reduction state is set stops and displays with the identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time reduction state is set. When the fluctuation of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a straddle a plurality of gaming states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Next, the contents of the main control device 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, a random number table 202c per second, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data. At least the variation pattern table 202d, the time saving assignment table 202e, the small hit type selection table 202f, and the open scenario table 202g are stored.

Among the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first hit random number table 202, the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202f are Since the detailed contents have already been explained, the explanation will be omitted.

The time saving table 202e is a data table that is referred to when a plurality of time saving ending conditions for ending the time saving state are set differently for each winning jackpot type, and the jackpot game ends (ending of the jackpot game). When the period ends), it is referred to (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), and a different number of time reductions (time reduction end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.

Here, the contents specified in the time saving table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (d). FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202e. In this embodiment, there are a jackpot type (big hit A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (big hit C) in which the time saving state is not set (normal state is set) after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 21D, a plurality of time saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In the present embodiment, the first time saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the second time saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. It has a third time-saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit B is won, and a fourth time-saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit C is won in the special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 21D, the time saving table 202e defines the values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions, and the values set as the first time saving end condition described above are. The value set in the time reduction medium counter 203k and set as the second time reduction end condition is set in the small hit A counter 203m, and the value set as the third time reduction end condition is set in the small hit B counter 203n and the fourth time reduction end. The value set as the condition is set in the small hit C counter 203p.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A and B, the time reduction end condition is "100" for the time reduction medium counter 203k (first time reduction end condition), "1" for the small hit A counter 203m, and small hit. It is specified that the value of "3" is set in the B counter 203n and the value of "5" is set in the small hit C counter 203p. In the case of the big hit D, the time saving medium counter 203k (first time saving ending condition) Is set to "100", the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the small hit B counter 203n is set to "10", and the small hit C counter 203p is set to "50".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the jackpot C of the time saving giving table 202e is set for the various counters described above. The value is not specified. In this way, by making the end condition of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each winning jackpot type, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, it is concrete. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the content of the time saving, it is possible to play the game in a state of increasing the motivation to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In this embodiment, in addition to the time saving end state set by using the time saving table 202e, the time saving state is terminated even when a special symbol jackpot is won. Based on this jackpot winning. Since the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not different depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202e, but it is satisfied based on the above-mentioned time saving ending condition (the jackpot winning of the special figure). The time saving end condition) may also be configured so as to specify a value in the time saving giving table 202e.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time saving end condition to fourth time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as the time saving end condition. For example, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), or a condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times). The predetermined number of times (for example, the total number of values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p) is the predetermined number of times (for example, 10). You may set the time saving end condition that is satisfied when it becomes).

Further, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is satisfied by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the lottery result. When the number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, or when the number of balls entered into a specific entry opening (for example, general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). The time saving end condition and the like that satisfy the above may be set in advance.

As described above, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time reduction state is configured to end when any of the time reduction end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonous game from being performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied. In addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set to a predetermined number. When (for example, two) are satisfied, the time saving end condition may be satisfied. In this case, a means for determining the number of establishments for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, a means for determining the number of establishments determined by the means for determining the number of establishments, and a means for determining whether the number of establishments has reached a predetermined number (for example, two). Is provided, and when it is determined by the condition arrival determination means that the number of establishments has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time saving end condition that is first satisfied is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating criterion for the condition arrival discriminating means is changed based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A means for varying the number of discrimination reference numbers may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time saving state that is easy to end and a time saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time saving end condition that is first satisfied, so that the player is enthusiastic even after the time saving state is set. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times) and the measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means are shown. When a result discriminating means for discriminating is provided and the result discriminating means determines that the present is within a predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the end of the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delay means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period may be provided. In addition, while it is determined by the result determination means that the current time is within the predetermined period, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and the values of various counters set corresponding to each time reduction end condition are updated (subtracted). ) May not be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely prevent the situation where the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set, and it is possible to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. Further, as described above, when the process of ending the time saving state based on the satisfaction of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is used, the plurality of time saving ending conditions are set to the priority time saving ending condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). A time-saving end condition that is satisfied when 100 times are reached) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and the priority time-saving end is set. When the condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated immediately, and when only a plurality of non-priority time saving ending conditions are satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated. By providing the priority time reduction end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the time reduction state.

The opening scenario table 202g is an opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when a big hit or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. It is a data table that stores open scenarios that are scenarios of various solenoids provided in each winning device), and is set to the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot or the winning small hit. The contents of the opening scenario are stipulated according to the type of small hit.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202g. In the open scenario table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 25, the periods during which the same scenario is set are collectively described, but in reality, the elapsed period from the time when each open scenario is set is described. A measurement counter is provided to measure, and among the currently set open scenarios, the operation of the contents specified according to the measurement value of the measurement counter is configured to be executed, but the detailed explanation is as follows. Omit.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202g. The open scenario table 202g is a winning device (variable winning device 65) capable of entering a ball in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of win was won. can.

In the opening scenario table 202g, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device). And the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games). The period during which the winning device set to is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). )) And the on / off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2, respectively. There is.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to the jackpot A, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds" and one round. As a game, the opening operation mode of opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. .. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, jackpot A is given the privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit to be done.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" and one round game. The opening operation mode for opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed for the player. It will be a big hit game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Because of the configuration, the jackpot B is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the winning type is "1 second" as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" is opened. Is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, in the first round, "0.1 seconds open is opened 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and 2 to In the 15th round, the opening operation mode of "continuously opening for 29 seconds" is "10 seconds" after the end of the first round as the interval period between rounds, "1 second" in other cases, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

That is, although the details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D, the period until the second round is executed (the content of the first round game (opening / closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first round). The content specified in (Period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small hit game, the small hit game ends). It can be difficult for the player to grasp (until the timing of the game). As a result, it is possible to provide a surprising winning game to a player who has won a small hit and recognized that the small hit game is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a small hit. (See FIG. 20 (c)). Therefore, during the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state and the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some hit game is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won, which hit (big hit or small hit) is won by the player in order to execute the winning game starting from the same opening operation. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be lower than the probability of winning the jackpot, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be lower. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot will not be provided with more disadvantageous benefits than when he wins the jackpot, so that the player can play a surprising game (big hit game corresponding to the jackpot D). Since it can be a game that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more excited.

It should be noted that, in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variation display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the display of the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that stop display timing. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the display mode and the display area are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the stop display timing of the special symbol. It is advisable to switch the symbol of No. 3 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for production corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when the winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (at any hit). At the timing of notifying the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display that draws the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, as in the present embodiment. It is preferable to make the display area of 37b smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is harder to see than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the big hit continues even during the hit game. You can expect to win.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. In addition to the small hit game (1 round game), the V switch 650e3 detects the ball during the small hit game to specify the hit type corresponding to the small hits A to C. The opening scenario of the jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also specified. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the winning small hit type small hit game content with the large hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small hit type A, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device "1 round" are opened as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds (interval between openings 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th openings", the end of the 5th and 10th openings After that, 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

Further, for the small hit types B and C, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device are opened once for "1 round" as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening (interval interval 1)", after the 5th and 10th opening 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

That is, the jackpot game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the jackpot game corresponding to the small hit A described above. Further, when the small hit type is small hit B, a time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player is set after the corresponding big hit game is completed, and in the case of small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game is completed. Since the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the small hit C.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 51) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a jackpot start flag 203c, a jackpot medium flag 203d, and a small hit type storage area 203e. Small hit start flag 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, V passing big hit type storage area 203h, V flag 203i, V passing flag 203j, time saving medium counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter It has 203p, a short fluctuation flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the entry into the ball is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data are stored in four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

Then, when the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the ball enters the second entry port 640 (starting) in a state in which a new special symbol change can be executed. (Winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 is acquired at that timing, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), when the ball passes through the normal start port 67 in a state in which a new normal symbol variation can be executed. At that timing, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the normal symbol holding ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S208 of FIG. 38, FIG. 43). See S705). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

In the voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed, the fluctuation held in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S1603 in FIG. 52). The jackpot start flag 203c is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the winning small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit has been won (S307: Yes in FIG. 39). ), The acquired small hit type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the number of open V winning devices 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small hit game (S1707: Yes in FIG. 53) and it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708; No. in FIG. 53). ) Refers to the stored small hit type (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small hit start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203f is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure when a power failure occurs. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h contains data for determining the jackpot type that is set when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. It is a storage area to be stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 40). S402). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. The 203i is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing big hit type storage area 203h is cleared. This V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. Is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1715: Yes in FIG. 53), it is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The V-passing flag 203j is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203i is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203i is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that first win the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is set to ON in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 48) (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203j is set to ON (S1201: Yes in FIG. 48). ), The processing of S1202 to S1208 among the V-passing processing (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hit game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

The time reduction medium counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time reduction end conditions set in the time reduction state is satisfied, and is the ending in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), the value (100) specified in the time saving table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52). ..

Then, the counter value is referred to in the time saving number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S601 in FIG. 42), and the counter value is larger than 0. When the determination is made (S601: Yes in FIG. 42), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604: Yes in FIG. 42), the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S605 in FIG. 42). In this embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction end condition based on the number of small hit wins). (Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S505 in FIG. 41). In this way, even when the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) that refers to the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is satisfied among the plurality of time saving ending conditions, the time saving medium counter 203k Since the value is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203k is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of winnings of small hits for which small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 1) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit A (S502: Yes in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and even if any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). (Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (second time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit A counter 203m is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit A counter 203m is continued even though the time saving state is completed. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of times the small hit is won, in which the small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time reduction end conditions set in the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 of FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 3) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit B (S510: Yes in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n after the subtraction is 0 (S512: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and even if any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). (Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (third time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit B counter 203n is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the small hit B counter Since the value of 203n is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit B counter 203n is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of winnings of small hits for which small hit C is set as the small hit type until one of the time reduction end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 of FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 5) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit C (S510: No in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p after the subtraction is 0 (S514: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S515 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and even if any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). (Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (fourth time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit C counter 203p is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203p is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203p is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and when it is set to ON, the normal symbol (second symbol) is set. It indicates that the short variation of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 45) is in the time saving state (time saving) (S909: Yes in FIG. 45). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S911 in FIG. 45), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S913 in FIG. 45). , This is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S915: Yes in FIG. 45) (S916 in FIG. 45).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916: Yes in FIG. 45), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S918 in FIG. 45). ), When it is determined that the working hours are being shortened (in the working hours) (S918: Yes in FIG. 45), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (FIG. 45 S919). The short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to off after being determined to be set to on in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 of FIG. 45) (S917 of FIG. 45).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 640a open operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state, it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening for a long time, which is a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric accessory 640a). It is possible to suppress the excessive provision of (opening) to the player.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 composed of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. do.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c, and other various data necessary for controlling the game. The program etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The counter for selecting the fluctuation pattern is each time it is updated (each time various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) that are executed at 1-millisecond intervals in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 are executed). It is a counter composed of a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value, the maximum value (for example, 299) is reached, and then the value returns to 0. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The counter value for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be updated by a process other than the various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above. For example, of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, the period during which the repetitive processing is executed when 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing was executed (for example, the processing of S2114 of FIG. 55 is executed). A process for updating the value of the counter may be added during the period from the time until the process of S2115 is executed). With this configuration, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55), 1 millisecond depends on the period spent for executing a part of the processing (processing of S2102 to S2112 in FIG. 55). The number of times the process of updating the value of the counter for selecting the fluctuation pattern is executed can be made indefinite (random). Therefore, the voice is set based on the content of the display effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the audio lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the law of control of the lamp control device 113.

The state display selection table 222b is a display mode of the state display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the game state (see the status (state) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11). It is a data table used when selecting. The state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a variation display other than a variation in which the time saving state ends (final variation in the time saving state) among the states in which the time saving state is set. ..

This state display selection table 222b shows the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation (the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery of the special symbol and the small hit in the special symbol lottery, and 2 during the small hit (during the small hit game). The degree of expectation that the seed hit is set) and the degree of update of the time saving state (whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or various elements set as the time saving end condition (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hits, etc.) ) Is configured to select a different state display mode based on the update status). Therefore, by grasping the content of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to grasp the situation of the time saving state currently set. be able to.

Here, the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the status display selection table 222b shows the lottery result of the special symbol (win / fail determination result) and the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether or not it is set to ON). , Various state display modes are defined in correspondence with the setting status of the quasi-end condition flag 223m (determination result of whether or not it is set to ON) and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

Here, the various flags and counters referred to in the state display selection table 222b will be briefly described. The time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are flags for indicating that the time saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period. It is set to ON when the time saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period. The state display mode can be changed according to the setting status of each flag, that is, according to the elapsed status of the time saving state.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to be turned on based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the ending conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it can be suggested to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by executing the change of the special symbol is approaching, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension and play the game in the time saving state. can. In addition, since various effects can be executed in a continuously set time-saving state, the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the state (situation) display mode Dm3a However, in order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state. Is different between the odd-numbered times and the even-numbered times (situation). The display mode Dm3a may be displayed, or a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol changes 10 times) after the time saving state is set. Only, the state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from other periods may be set.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on based on the number of times a small hit is won (the number of times a small hit is won and operation control is executed for the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is set to. That is, when a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) are won in a small hit after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small hit is approaching to the player, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension and play the game in the time saving state. In addition, since various effects can be executed in a continuously set time-saving state, the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

The state effect counter 223o is a loop counter whose value of "0 to 99" is periodically updated, and is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113. The value is updated by 1 each time the counter update process (S2111 in FIG. 55) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, the state display selection table 222b is an effect executed in response to the hit / fail determination result, the time saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. (Refer to FIG. 15 for the contents of the specific display mode).

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "3" is defined, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "3" is defined. The state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Is regulated.

Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "1" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and When the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state is displayed in the range of "70 to 79". The mode "1" is defined, and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

That is, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, the status display selected according to the progress status of the set time saving state (time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m setting status). The mode can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to display various state display modes during the time saving state, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, either the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set to off (the first half period of the time saving state) and either the time saving lower limit flag 223k or the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on. Since the display mode that is easily selected as the state display mode can be different depending on the period (the middle period of the time saving state), the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. By letting the player grasp the above, it is possible to predict the progress of the time saving state.

Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to off and the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state is displayed. Aspect "4" is configured to be set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this state display mode "4" is a state display mode for suggesting to the player that a small hit has been won, but in the present embodiment, the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. It is configured to be selected even when there is a certain case, that is, when the winning / failing determination is not a small hit (when the winning / failing determination result is more favorable to the player than the small hit winning). As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player, and it is possible to provide an early and timeless effect.

Next, the winning / failing determination result is the small hit A (the small hit in which the small hit game that is most likely to hit two types among the plurality of small hit types is executed), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 79" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Will be done. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "7" is defined. The state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Is regulated.

Next, when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit A, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The state display mode "5" is defined in the above, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 79", and "80 to 99". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of ".

Then, the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C (a small hit in which a small hit game that is difficult to hit two types among a plurality of small hit types is executed), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "4" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and "4" is defined. The state display mode "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". The state display mode "6" is defined in the range, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and "80". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "~ 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "2" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "50 to". The state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "69", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". NS.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different state display modes are displayed according to the small hit type set for the winning small hit (according to the expected degree per two types during the small hit game to be executed). By grasping the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, the player can predict the timing when the time saving state ends, and also the variable display (dynamic) of the special symbol currently being executed. It is possible to predict the result (display) result (lottery result of special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the small hit A is won, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79". In the case of, the content of the state display selection table 222b is defined so that the state display mode “6” is selected. As shown in FIG. 15, this state display mode "6" is a state display mode in which the characters "large pinch" for suggesting that the time saving state ends based on the small hit winning are displayed. By displaying this state display mode "6" even when the small hit A is exceptionally won, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the state display mode "6" is displayed. Since it is possible to increase the possibility of winning two types of hits in the small hit game that is executed after that, the state display mode is based on winning the small hit B or the small hit C, which is unlikely to be hit by two types. Even when "6" is displayed, the player can continue to have expectations for the two types of hits until the small hit game is completed.

When the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49" and the state display mode "1". Is specified, the state display mode "4" is specified in the range of "50 to 69", "3" is specified in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Is stipulated. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and "1" is defined. The state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". "6" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 79", and "80". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "~ 99".

In this way, the quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect, that is, when the special symbol change in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied based on the small hit winning or the big hit winning is executed. When set to, the state display mode that makes the player think that the small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied is selected. As a result, in the state where the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in the state where the small hit game is executed a predetermined number of times after the time saving state is set, the game is played while giving the player a sense of crisis. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, a state display mode that makes the player think that he / she has won a small hit than when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off ( The state display mode "2, 4 to 7") is easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that pseudo-suggests that a small hit has been won unnecessarily when the result of the winning / failing determination is incorrect. Specifically, in the state where the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, it is easy to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won. In the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off, it is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won. There is.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations executed during the period when the quasi-end condition flag 223 m is set in a series of flows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game executed during the time saving state and reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, the state display mode "9" is selected according to the value of the state effect counter 223o without being based on the hit / fail determination result or the setting status of various flags. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the progress status of the current time saving state. Further, the state display mode "3" is selected in a part of the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect. As a result, when the display mode of the state display mode "3" is displayed on the display screen on the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol being dynamically displayed is either a big hit or a miss. A production that suggests that is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order (other than big hit and small hit) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20C), and further, the value of the state production counter 223o. Is configured to display the state display mode "3" in the range of "70 to 79", that is, 1/10 of the value of the counter updated in the range of "0 to 99" ( When the second special symbol is drawn, the state display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 1/1000 of the lottery result "out").

Therefore, the state display mode "3" is displayed when most of the jackpots are won, but it may be displayed even when the player wins the prize, so that the player can see the result of the special symbol lottery until the end. It is possible to play a game with a feeling of excitement (until it is stopped and displayed). In this embodiment, a plurality of state display modes are provided so that the player can predict the progress status of the current time saving state (the remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol. Although it is configured to be selected, a status display mode that can reliably notify the progress status of the current time saving state (the remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol is selected. It may be configured so that it can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state display mode is set for each hit / fail determination result based on the progress status of the time saving state (setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state effect counter 223o. Although it is configured to be selected differently, it may be configured to select the state display mode using other conditions, for example, an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22). ), An operation discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has executed a predetermined operation is provided, and the state display mode is selected differently based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. You may. Further, in this case, when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been executed, the progress status of the current time reduction state (the remaining number until each time reduction end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that the state display mode clearly shown can be easily selected. As a result, the player actively operates the operating means, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, every time the effect setting process is executed (every time the variation display of the third symbol is set), the state display is displayed using the state display selection table 222b. The mode is configured to be selected, but for example, a storage means for storing the set state display mode while the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means are provided. It may be configured to determine the state display mode to be newly set (selected) based on the above. With this configuration, the state display mode is evenly displayed during the time saving state, and the randomly set state display mode (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) is biased to one side. In some cases, the state display mode set during the remaining time saving state can be intentionally biased to one side.

In addition, the number of times the time saving state is repeatedly set (the number of times the jackpot is won (two types are set) during the time saving state and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game) and the prize balls acquired during that period. The state display mode selected may be different depending on the number.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. The final state display selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting the state display mode displayed in the third display area Ds3 during the time saving state, like the state display selection table 222b described above. Unlike the state display selection table 222b described above, the final state display selection table 222c is different from the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b, and the variation of the special symbol at which the time saving state ends (when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the number of fluctuations satisfying the time saving end condition). It is referred to when setting the variation display (effect display) for the variation of the special symbol in, or the variation of the special symbol when the number of small hits of the special symbol reaches the number of winnings satisfying the time saving end condition. It is a thing.

The final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) described later that the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes in FIG. 63) (FIG. 63). S2907). The contents specified in the final state display selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). When the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is ". The state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Is regulated. When the hit / fail determination result is a small hit A, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range where the acquired state effect counter 223o value is in the range of "0 to 69", and the state display mode is defined in the range of "70 to 89". “5” is defined, and the state display mode “8” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and the range of "70 to 89". The state display mode "5" is defined in the above, and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". When the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the state display mode "8" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state display mode displayed during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the final variation display of the special symbol in which the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends). Since it is configured to refer to and select a different data table from the state display mode displayed in (when the time saving state is performed), it is suggested that the time saving state continues as if the time saving state ends. It is possible to surely prevent the state display mode from being displayed.

Further, as described above, the state display mode "8" is configured to be displayed in a part of the case where the jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won after making the player think that the time saving state has ended with the stop display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. ..

As described above, the state display mode "8" is always displayed when the player wins the prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and giving a feeling of dissatisfaction with the subsequent game result.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). As shown in FIG. 26B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effect counter 223e. Game state storage area 223f, time saving information update area 223g, provisional hit determination flag 223h, provisional time reduction information update area 223i, provisional time reduction end flag 223j, time reduction lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time reduction pre-end fluctuation flag 223n, state At least an effect counter 223o and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation. In the prize information storage area 223a, prize information based on the prize information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the prize information related process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed. The winning information commands that are stored in order from the first area and are transmitted from the main control device 110 are set when the pre-reading process of the main control device 110 (S707 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the main control device 110 is stored. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1501 of FIG. 51) executed in the main process of 110 (see FIG. 51).

Each of the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is one by one each time the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 62) is executed. The winning information stored in the second area is shifted to the first area (see S2806 in FIG. 62). As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In addition, since the prize information (pre-reading information of the special symbol) transmitted by the prize information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the change in the special symbol currently being executed), for example, the prize is won. Based on the receipt of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command (so-called look-ahead continuous) When executing the effect), the prize information corresponding to the prize information command can be retained until the above-mentioned look-ahead continuous effect is completed.

In this embodiment, up to four prize information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first entry port 64) can be stored and stored, so that the prize information storage area 223a is an execution area. In addition to the above, it is configured to have a first area to a fourth area. For example, prize information that can be acquired when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (winning information related to the second special symbol). ) Is also configured to hold and store up to four, in the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (hold information area) and four for the second special symbol. It may be configured to provide one area (holding information area).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The information included in the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of hold balls, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol hold ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. It suffices to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information obtained.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2802 in FIG. 62). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the display stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 of the above is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and the values of the counters are configured to be updated without synchronization. There is.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters having different updated values each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Further, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used for a lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223f when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), the game state storage area is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state that was set before the power was cut off is stored in 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state. Further, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.). ..

The time saving information update area 223g includes the end condition of the time saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times that the event (for example, the change of the special symbol, the small hit, the big hit) that is the target of the end condition is executed). It is a data area for storing. The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end condition and progress status of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. The time saving information update area 223g is determined to be the end timing of the ending effect by the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52) (FIG. In S1612 of 52), when the time saving setting information command set when the ending condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 of FIG. 52) is received, the ending condition for ending the current time saving state is set.

Then, in the time saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), the update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, and the small hit are won. When it is determined that the small hit information (S2604: Yes in FIG. 60, S2615: Yes in FIG. 60) has been received (S2604: Yes in FIG. 60), the current time saving status is updated corresponding to the received update information. ..

To specifically explain the data area in the time-saving information update area 223g, each item that can be the end condition of the time-saving information (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special) is described in the time-saving information update area 223g. The number of fluctuations of the symbol, the total number of fluctuations of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the number of winnings for each small hit type (small hits A to C) (the operation of the V winning device 600) Information is formed so that it can be temporarily stored according to the number of times it has started), the number of small hits won (the total number of wins for each small hit type), etc. The time reduction setting information (the number of times the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied) and the update information of each item during the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times actually executed) are stored respectively. It is configured to be.

In the present embodiment, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is used to determine an end condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other end conditions from a plurality of end conditions, and each end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions up to. Further, using the time reduction setting information and the update information stored in the time reduction information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time reduction setting information is calculated. The time saving progress may be configured to be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the update information (information indicating the number of times already executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)) is stored as the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. The remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving setting information and the update information are separately stored (stored), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the information stored as the time saving setting information is stored. May be configured to update directly. With this configuration, the capacity of the time saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional hit determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (the winning information held and stored) before the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed includes the winning information for winning the big hit. This indicates that the winning information that is held and stored by being set to ON includes the winning information that wins the jackpot. The provisional collision determination flag 223h is a prize information-related process (executed when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the prize information command acquired in the look-ahead process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110. In (see S2210 of FIG. 57), when it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 (S2305: Yes in FIG. 57), it is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57). ..

Then, when it is referred to in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2303: Yes in FIG. 57), various types of prize information commands received thereafter are received. It is configured to skip the discrimination process. It is also referred to in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2903 in FIG. 63). (S2903: Yes in FIG. 63), the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode is skipped.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 59) (S2504: Yes in FIG. 59). The provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information held and stored at the end of the jackpot includes the winning information for winning the jackpot, Whether or not the winning information that wins the jackpot is included in the winning information included in the newly received winning information command after that, and whether or not the currently set end condition of the gaming state is satisfied. It is configured not to perform discrimination. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state will end due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state will end based on the winning information acquired after that. , It is configured to skip the unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the process of determining the content of the winning information is executed depending on whether a new winning information command is received or the jackpot game is completed, but other timings are used. For example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 50), each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is displayed. When the return winning information command for indicating is set and all are configured to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned return winning information command, the above-mentioned winning is won. It may be configured to execute the process of determining the content of the information.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game is completed, a process of determining the content of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is limited to this. If there is no such thing and a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied, the content of the winning information may not be determined. In this case, as predetermined prohibition conditions, for example, an effect mode prohibition condition that is satisfied when the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of effect modes and one of the effect modes is set, or a special symbol A plurality of special symbols change based on the prohibition condition during hamari, which is established when the lottery results other than the jackpot (missing) are consecutive for a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and the jackpot lottery result (win / fail judgment result) included in the winning information. The prohibition condition during continuous production that is satisfied while the continuous production that is executed straddling is executed, and the predetermined period after the continuous production is completed (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed twice). It is advisable to establish a condition for prohibiting frequent occurrences, etc. that is established during the period until).

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period during which the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period during which the effect cannot be executed. Even if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the person, the expectation for the big hit can be maintained. In addition, when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be reduced, or when the prohibition condition is not satisfied, the content of the winning information is always displayed. Instead of discriminating, the content of the winning information may be determined more frequently. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied.

The temporary time saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing the time saving information (temporary time saving information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance with reference to the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i.

The temporary time saving information update area 223i is used for a time saving related command including time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52), similarly to the time saving information updating area 223g described above. When the end timing of the ending effect is determined (S1612 in FIG. 52) and the time saving setting information command set when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52) is received (S2602 in FIG. 60: Yes), the end condition (time reduction information) for ending the current time reduction state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60). Then, in the prize information-related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57), the update information corresponding to the received prize information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The provisional time reduction end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time reduction end condition is satisfied based on the provisional time reduction information stored in the provisional time reduction information update area 223i, and is used as the provisional time reduction information when it is set to ON. Based on this, it indicates that the time saving end condition is satisfied. The provisional time reduction end flag 223j satisfies the time reduction end condition in the updated information (temporary time reduction information) of the provisional time reduction information update area 223i in the prize information related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the information is present, it is set to ON (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, when it is referred to in the prize information related process (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304: Yes in FIG. 57), the prize information command received thereafter It is configured to skip various discrimination processes for.

As explained above, if the time saving end condition is satisfied by the winning information included in the received winning information command, the winning information included in the newly received winning information command after that will be a big hit. It is configured so that it is not determined whether or not the winning information to be won is included and whether or not the currently set end condition of the gaming state is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state will end due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state will end based on the winning information acquired after that. , It is configured to skip the unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is set to ON. , This is to show that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. The time saving lower limit flag 223k is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (of the first special symbol) among the ending conditions (time saving ending conditions) for ending the time saving state in the time saving update process (S2216 of FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113. The special symbol executed during the time saving state with respect to the end condition (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100) set corresponding to the total number of fluctuations of the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). Is set to ON when it is determined that the number of fluctuations of the above exceeds a predetermined number of times (70 times) (the number of remaining time reductions until the end of the time reduction state is less than 30 times) (S2608: Yes in FIG. 60). NS. Then, it is referred to when the state display mode is selected by using the state display selection table 222b in the effect setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2804 in FIG. 63) (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to be on according to the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and configuring the effect mode to be changed according to the setting status of the flag, the player can be provided with a flag. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect that suggests the end timing of the time saving state.

In the first embodiment, the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, in a state where the time saving state is set, a flag (counter) that can identify the state is provided every time the change of the special symbol is executed 10 times, and the effect mode is set according to the flag (counter). It may be configured to be variable.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition established based on the fact that a small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, and is turned on. By being set to, it is intended to indicate that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referred to in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (see FIG. 61). In the case of S2703: No in FIG. 61), when it is determined that the semi-end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). Then, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The variation flag 223n before the end of the reduced working hours is a flag for indicating that the variation before the end of the reduced working hours state (the condition for ending the reduced working hours is satisfied) is executed, and is set to ON to end the reduced working hours state. It indicates that the previous fluctuation is executed. Specifically, when the period (number of fluctuations) until the time-saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is the remaining one among the multiple end conditions of the time-saving state. Set to on. By executing the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) with the variation flag 223n before the end of the reduced working hours set to ON, it becomes possible to determine that the variation is the final variation in the reduced working hours state. It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the final fluctuation.

This pre-end of time variation flag 223n is set to on when it is determined in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60) that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S2610: Yes in FIG. 60) (S2611 in FIG. 60). ). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61). Further, when it is referred to in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2905 in FIG. 63). : Yes), the process using the final status display selection table 222c to set the display status display command indicating the status display mode (process for the final variation of the time saving state) is executed, and it is not set to on (off). When it is determined (S2905: No in FIG. 63), the process using the status display selection table 222b (process for fluctuation other than the final fluctuation in the time saving state) is executed. ..

In the present embodiment, the variation flag 223n before the end of the time reduction is set in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time reduction is completed (executed). , A configuration is provided in which the winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored, and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 44) is also executed for the winning information held and stored, and the result of the look-ahead processing is shown. It is configured to receive a winning command, and based on the received winning command, it is configured to determine in advance the winning information of the second special symbol to be won a small hit. Then, based on the result of the pre-determination, when the change before the special symbol change in which the small hit winning that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is executed is executed, the change before the time saving end change flag 223n is turned on. Configuration may be added. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the change in the special symbol immediately before the time saving ending condition is satisfied.

The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lottery used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown, the state effect counter 223o of the voice lamp control device 113. It is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. The detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above. The value of the state effect counter 223o is referred to when the state display mode is selected by using the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (hit / fail judgment result, setting status of various flags), the selection is made based on a randomly updated value (value of the state effect counter 223o). By configuring the display modes to be displayed in more detail, the display modes are diversified, and the current gaming state is determined by the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping (update status of the time saving state).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the big hit is completed. It is configured in. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal state (during the normal game). Since it is configured to be (difficult), the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who commits the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol will be drawn by cheating. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize information of the second special symbol (the prize information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not held and stored, for example, the time is shortened. The winning information of the second special symbol is reserved and stored in the state (in the state where the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is based on the reserved winning information. (Fluctuation) is never executed. Thereby, when the normal game is performed, it is possible to surely prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily inserted into the second entry port 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640. A right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball). (By passing through a specific area), the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate discomfort to the player who has won the big hit via the small hit game.

In this embodiment, the ball can pass through a specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Small hit games with different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are configured to be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol or first special symbol or first 2 The change number end condition (first time reduction end condition) that is established when the change number (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches the specified change number (100 times), and the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) As a result, when the number of winnings in the small hit (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit winning) reaches the specified number of operations, the operation number end condition (second time reduction end condition) is satisfied. , Is set.

Further, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type) before the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition or the second time saving ending condition is satisfied. (Winning) or, a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and during the small hit game according to the winning small hit (small hit game according to the small hit type), the ball is passed through a specific area to win the big hit. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second type before acquiring one type or two types. When any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way may end the time saving state when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the time saving state is set ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning the second kind. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. If the number is (4), the jackpot is won, and in the "first special symbol change (lottery) during the time saving state" that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot is won. Even so, it is possible to suppress the provision of a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the flow of the pachinko machine 10 during the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described. 29 (a) to 29 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (f), when the small hit game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays the small hit game effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses from the start of the small hit game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated within 17 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small hit game. By detecting the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. Be released.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball can be won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball can be detected by the V switch 650e3 only by normally executing the right-handed game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the second special symbol lottery is performed once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. Can be done. Further, since the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of the small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player If you win a small hit that is disadvantageous to you (for example, a small hit with a small hit type of small hit C), you can prevent the game aiming for the next special symbol lottery without winning the ball to the V winning device 650. can do.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 32 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (displays of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 32 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 32 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", FIG. 32 (c). The image shown in is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 33 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 33 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 33A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 31) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be more likely to be done, and it will be a hit of the normal symbol. There will be more opportunities. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be opened as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the reduced working hours of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entry. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, in the example of FIG. 35). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 64) (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 66 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 66B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 66 (b) see S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 66 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 36) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 66 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 66 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6602 of FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 53. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (999, 99, 99, 239, 99, respectively in this embodiment) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with winning the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). The details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpot includes a period in which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed to indicate the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). The period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during the jackpot game (round game period), the round game period ends, and then the lottery (variation) of a new special symbol is started. The grace period (ending period) up to is included.

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is being hit, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hit flag 203d is set to ON. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to on) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot hit flag 203d is not set on (set to off) (S201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202: No), the game ball goes to the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is not a big hit and the special symbol is not changing, the ball is entered into the second entrance 640. When the ball enters, that is, when the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery) start condition is satisfied, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value of is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204).

Next, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S210), and end this process. The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second entry port 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol for which the fluctuation (lottery) is started is secured at the present time. Since there is no state, this process for executing the special symbol change is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, the reserved balls of the first special symbol for starting the fluctuation (lottery) are secured. For example, a hold ball number command (Special Figure 1) that subtracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203b (S207) and indicates the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203b changed by the calculation. Hold ball count command) is set (S208). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S211). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the present is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S211 if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S212). The stop display is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. 39. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop symbol continuously for a predetermined period of time in this way, unlike the case where the changing symbol is displayed for a moment, the first stop display is surely displayed to the player. The content of the design can be recognized.

Although 0.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment as a predetermined period (fixed period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, other configurations may be used, for example, the first symbol may be used. If a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erasing state is performed to indicate that the state is fluctuating, it is longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when the blinking display is performed. The period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, the player can easily determine whether the first symbol is changing or stopped (determined).

After the processing of S212 is completed, when the variation display of the special symbol being executed is started in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39) is performed. It is determined whether the lottery result of the symbol (the result of this determination) is a big hit of the special symbol (S213). If it is determined that the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S213: Yes), the specific winning opening (variable winning device) 65 is based on the jackpot type (the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won). The opening scenario of (S214) is set, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot medium flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time saving / medium counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described in the process of S217, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the change of the special symbol is completed (the final display of the first symbol is completed), and then the jackpot is completed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the game starts. The timing for ending the time saving state based on winning the jackpot of the special symbol may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) In addition to after the confirmation display of, for example, the time saving state may be ended at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol won by the jackpot, or the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display is started). You may end the state. Further, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period after the jackpot game is started (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). However, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the special symbol jackpot is won) is set from among the plurality of timings described above. Only one may be configured to be set in advance, or the time saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

With this configuration, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the special symbol changes, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes is the specified number of times (for example). It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state has been set (100 times) or whether the time saving state has ended by winning a big hit during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect display (variation display) of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time reduction end condition is satisfied for each of multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time reduction state ends when the jackpot is won) to be different, the special symbol can be created based on the end timing of the time reduction state. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (discrimination result). In addition, when the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends as a part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of a plurality of jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol is obtained. A timing that can notify the player that it is a big hit, that is, a time saving end timing dedicated to the big hit that the time saving state ends only when the time saving ending condition that is satisfied by winning the big hit may be provided.

With this configuration, by grasping the timing when the time saving state ends, it is possible to know quickly that the jackpot has been won, and it is possible to prolong the period of immersion in the sense of superiority. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect, the above-mentioned time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot should be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from the execution of the special symbol fluctuation to the end of the special symbol fluctuation. Good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), the time reduction number update process for updating the time reduction number is executed (S219), and then the current lottery result is executed. Is a small hit or not (S220). A detailed description of the above-mentioned time saving number update process (S219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. The process of updating the information for the variable number end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery number) is executed.

In the process of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S220: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S221), the above-mentioned process of S218 is executed, and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S220: No), the small hit start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

As described above, in the special symbol variation processing (S104 of FIG. 38) of the present embodiment, priority is given to whether or not the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (first), and the second It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the special symbol is satisfied (process of S203 in FIG. 38). This is variable (variable) when the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, does not have a hold storage means for holding and storing the winning information, and the time saving state is set as the game state. (Easy), and when the normal state is set, the second special symbol, which is immutable (difficult to change), is configured to be a special symbol that is harder to change (lottery) than the first special symbol. This is because it has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by any chance, the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneously (timer interrupt processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 37). If the processing period (including an error of 2 milliseconds) is satisfied, the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol will be started with priority over the second special symbol, which is difficult to execute. This will cause discomfort to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is easier to win the lottery result which is advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (easy to win a small hit). The lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 37)). If the processing period (including an error of 2 milliseconds) is established, the fluctuation of the first special symbol will be started with priority over the second special symbol, which is difficult to execute (lottery). There was a problem of giving discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the process of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the added value is high for the player (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol). Because it is configured to prioritize (first) the lottery (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this embodiment), which is higher than the above, and it is difficult to actually execute the lottery (variation). , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a process for updating the time reduction number, a small hit is won after executing a process related to the variation number end condition (time reduction number update process (S219)) that is satisfied according to the change number of the special symbol. It is configured to execute the process related to the winning count end condition (small hit start setting process (S221)) that is satisfied according to the above. With this configuration, when a lottery result is obtained that satisfies the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition in one special symbol variation (lottery), the variation number end condition comes first. , And the time saving state ends based on the condition for ending the number of fluctuations.

In this way, by configuring so as to determine whether or not each time saving end condition is satisfied in a predetermined order for a plurality of set time saving end conditions, a special symbol variation in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are the same ( Even if it can be reached in the lottery), the reduced working hours can be terminated regularly.

It should be noted that, for example, when the above-mentioned configuration is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated after the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is satisfied, and when the winning count end condition is satisfied, the value is small. By using the pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time saving state after the hit game is completed, the end timing of the time saving state can be changed according to the time saving ending condition to be established.

Specifically, for example, when the small hit B is won and the winning number end condition is independently satisfied, the time saving state ends after the small hit game corresponding to the small hit B is completed. On the other hand, if the small hit B is won in the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that satisfies the variable number end condition, the variable number end condition is satisfied with priority, and the small hit game corresponding to the small hit B starts. The time saving state ends before the special symbol (first symbol) indicating the lottery result (small hit B) of the special symbol is confirmed.

In the above example, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, even if the time saving state ends based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol won in the small hit B, the time saving end is established. Since the timing for ending the time saving state (whether or not there is a time saving during the small hit game) can be changed and set according to the conditions, the length of the period advantageous to the player can be established according to the time saving ending condition. Can be different. Thereby, it is possible to set the time saving end condition which is advantageous for the player and the time saving ending condition which is disadvantageous. Therefore, in addition to the game in which the player is expected not to satisfy the time saving end condition, it is possible to provide a new game property in which it is expected that the time saving establishment condition is satisfied as much as possible.

It should be noted that, for a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, even during a small hit game, when the electric accessory 640a is opened (long open), the ball can be entered (easily). A second entry port 640 is provided above the specific winning opening (V winning device 650) opened in the small hit game so that the ball can be entered into the entry port 640), and the second ball is provided during the small hit game. 2 It is preferable to configure the ball to enter the ball into the ball entry port 640.

Further, the type of small hit in which the small hit game is executed for which the period of the small hit game (the period in which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and the period in which the V winning device 650 is closed) is long (for example, 60 seconds) is specified. It is configured to be configurable and is provided to the player when the V winning device 650 is won, rather than the number of prize balls (for example, 5) provided to the player when the ball is entered into the second entrance. By configuring the number of prize balls (for example, 3) to be smaller, the game result (the number of balls acquired by the game) can be greatly different depending on whether or not there is a time saving state during the small hit game. .. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by providing a technique for differentiating the end timing of the shortened time as described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more entertaining game.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is the execution of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol", "small hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a , 37b and the process for determining the effect pattern (variation time) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, the lottery result is based on the first random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol). (S302). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22 (b)). The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640, the value of the first random number counter C1. And the random number values stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22C) are compared to determine whether the jackpot or the small hit is a big hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection table 202b corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to D) of the four types of special symbols (see FIGS. 23 (b) or 23 (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same discrimination value determined to be a jackpot, but the discrimination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that an illegal game aiming at the same random number value is performed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being executed in a biased manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers determined to be jackpots is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not limited to this. The number of random numbers determined to be jackpots may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol type) and the jackpot type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

In the process of S314, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S314). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S315). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later, in which the voice lamp control device is used. It is transmitted toward 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S315 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and the small hit (small hit) of three types of special symbols is compared. Of A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 22).

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S309). After that, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

Next, the small hit type acquired in the processing of S308 is stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (S311), and then the above-mentioned processes of S314 and S315 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38). .. In this embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, so it is necessary to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, when it is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol, in the processing of S308 and S309, the small hit type is acquired by referring to the special symbol type, and the small hit is obtained. It may be configured to set the display mode.

In the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Is set.

When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the type of the special symbol is set (S312). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24). Next, the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S221). This small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). Based on the above, the start of the small hit game is set, and the process for updating the time saving information according to the winning small hit (update process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is in a specific area (V). By passing through the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big hit game is executed (set) after the small hit game is completed.

That is, in the gaming state in which the small hit game is executed, the ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (the winning ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, different small hit games are executed according to the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won. , The possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game is different depending on each small hit type.

With this configuration, the possibility (expectation) that the big hit game (per 2 types) is executed (set) can be changed depending on the small hit game to be executed, so that the player can get a small hit. It is possible to improve the interest of the game because it is possible to make people interested not only in whether or not they win the game but also in the type of small hit that they win.

When the small hit start setting process (S221) is executed, first, the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S401). After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V-passing big hit type (the big hit game set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that it is a big hit A (15 rounds with short time, big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with short time, big hit). If the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit A (5-round time saving big hit) (see FIG. 22). That is, in the present embodiment, the contents of the jackpot game (per 2 types) set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, and the jackpot (per 1 type) by lottery of special symbols. ) Is executed, the same jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game is executed. The jackpot type (big hit A or B) is configured to be set according to the type of small hit executed.

In this way, when two types of hits are won, the jackpot type is set and the process of starting the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, so that one type is won and two types are won. It is possible to share the processing related to the big hit game with the case where the hit is acquired, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110.

The configuration of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a jackpot game that can be executed may be set only when one type is won or only when two types are won, or one type may be configured. It may be configured to execute different big hit game processing for hit and two kinds of hit.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S402, the start of the small hit is set (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set on (S404). After that, the time saving update process for small hits is executed (S405), and this process is terminated. This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the winning number of times end condition, which is the end condition of the time saving state that can be established when the small hit is won, and the time saving information is updated. When the winning count end condition is satisfied, the process for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state is executed, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small hit time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit time saving update process (S405). This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Yes, this is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small hit time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the reduced working hours. In the process of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not larger than 0 (0) (S501: No), it means that the player has won a small hit in a gaming state other than the time saving state. This process is skipped in order to update the time saving information, and this process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that the small hit is not won except in the state where the time saving state is set (so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is not executed), S501 When it is determined in the process of that that the time saving state is not set, an error command for executing error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, the time saving state is set (S501: Yes), then the small hit won this time. It is determined whether or not the small hit type of is "small hit A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, in the process of S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read out and the determination is executed.

In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the small hit type this time is "small hit A" (S502: Yes), the value of the small hit A counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S503), and the small hit A after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether the value of the counter 203m is 0 (S504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S504: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit A) is obtained in this small hit winning. ) Is satisfied, so the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k, which was measuring the period until the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, is set to 0 (S505), and various winning count end conditions are measured. Each value of the hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p is set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes S505 to S507, when one of the plurality of set time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied is measured. Since each counter value can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving information can be updated after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). It is possible to reliably prevent the processing (processing for updating the values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the time saving medium counter 203k) from being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary processing, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time reduction information corresponding to each of the plurality of time reduction end conditions are set to 0 (). Since it is only configured to be set to (a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), it is necessary to determine which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state after the time saving state was completed. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied may be provided so that the type and the number of times that the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied in the past can be determined can be determined.

With this configuration, for example, the time saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and is established by the player based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Further, the update status of the time reduction information corresponding to the other time reduction end conditions when the time reduction end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, the small hit A counter 203 m and the small hit B when the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k becomes 0). The counter 203n and the small hit C counter 203p) are storably configured, and the most difficult time-saving end condition, that is, the largest of the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when one time-saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to determine the time saving end condition having the time saving information of the value.

After finishing the process of S507, next, the remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each subtracted small hit counter is set (S508), the state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S509), and the main process is performed. To finish. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving number command, and sets a state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (the period until the time saving state ends). In addition, the current gaming state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S504, when it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so S505 for ending the time saving state. ~ The process of S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

The description will be continued by returning to the process of S502 described above. In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A" ("small hit B" or "small hit C") (S502: No), the next In addition, it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is "small hit B" (S510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S510: Yes), the small hit B counter 203n The value of is subtracted by 1 (S511), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

If it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 in the processing of S512 (S512: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit B) is satisfied in this small hit winning. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S505 described above, and the process for terminating the time saving state is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is not 0 (1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so that the time saving state is not completed. The process of S505 to S507 for terminating the above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

In the processing of S510, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit B", that is, "small hit C" (S510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 223p. Is subtracted by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

If it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 223p is 0 in the processing of S514 (S514: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit C) is satisfied in this small hit winning. Therefore, S515 to S517, which execute the same processing as S505 to S507 described above, are executed, and the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, in the processing of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p is not 0 (1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so the time saving state is not completed. The process of S515 to S517 for terminating the state is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol won in the small hit has elapsed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small hit winning is subtracted, and the time saving is completed based on the small hit winning. It is configured to determine whether or not the condition (condition for ending the number of winnings) is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the time saving state according to the winning number end condition before the small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state regardless of whether the time saving ending condition of the variation number ending condition or the winning number ending condition is satisfied.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the change number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the change number of the special symbol is satisfied, the definite display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing of ending, and when the winning number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of winnings in the small hit in the special symbol lottery is satisfied, the special symbol is satisfied. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start setting timing of the small hit game after the confirmation display of (first symbol).

That is, regardless of which of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is configured to end immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to know which time-saving end condition is satisfied and the time-saving state set this time ends. In order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. For example, by setting to end the time saving state at the time of setting the small hit start (immediately before the small hit game is started) as in the present embodiment, the time saving state is set immediately after the small hit game is started. It can be difficult to determine whether or not it has finished.

In addition, in this embodiment, when any of the end conditions of the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the timing is substantially the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to discriminate). It is configured to end the time saving state by (concept including time difference), but other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, a special symbol (first symbol) is determined. The time saving state may be terminated immediately after the display, and if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated after the small hit game executed after the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is completed. .. With this configuration, the time can be shortened during the period during which the small hit game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small hit game, the player cannot determine whether or not the time saving state has ended due to the small hit winning this time, and until the small hit game ends (whether or not two types of hits have been won). Until the game result is notified), it can be difficult to tell whether or not the time saving state has ended. Further, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of acquiring two types of hits during the small hit game, the player is notified whether or not the time saving state is completed after the small hit game is completed. Isn't this small hit game based on the small hit winning that ends the time saving state by configuring in? Since the game is performed while predicting that, it is possible to always enthusiastically aim for two types of small hit games that are executed during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time saving number update process (S219) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S219). This time reduction number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), updates the time reduction number of times, and sets the game state to the normal state. This is the process for setting to.

In the time reduction number update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, whether the current time reduction is in progress (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress (S601: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. do.

In the process of S603, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k changed (subtracted by 1) by the calculation is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later, the voice lamp control device. It is transmitted toward 113.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S605), the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p. Is set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation number ending condition) that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42). Whether or not the time saving end condition (winning number ending condition) that is satisfied based on the number of times the small hit of the special symbol is won is satisfied is determined by the time saving update process for small hits (see FIG. 41). .. Then, in any of the processing, when any of the multiple end conditions set is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time reduction information corresponding to the other time reduction end conditions are set. All are configured to be set to a value (0) indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the processing contents for ending the time saving state can be unified.

In this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time reduction information corresponding to each time reduction end condition, a value indicating each time reduction end condition is set in various counters at the timing when the time reduction state is set, and each time reduction end condition is set. When the time saving information corresponding to the condition is determined, the values of various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition to this, when the time saving state is set, the values of various counters are set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the counter value is added by 1, and the value of the counter after the addition is the time saving end condition. It may be configured to end the time saving state when it is determined that the value indicates. That is, the means for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving information (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hits, etc.) corresponding to various time saving end conditions are updated in the state where the time saving state is set. Any configuration may be provided in which an update means is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the time saving end conditions, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of each small hit type reaches a predetermined number is used as the winning number end condition. , The total number of times each small hit type is set, that is, the winning number end condition corresponding to the total number of small hits won during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set may be set. You may set the winning count end condition that is satisfied when the total number of times that the number of times that the hit B is set and the number of times that the small hit C is set reaches a predetermined number of times.

In this case, the number of winnings (the number of times the small hit B ends (for example, 3 times)) and the number of times the winning number ending condition corresponding only to the small hit C is satisfied (the number of times the winning number ends the condition for the small hit B only (for example, 3 times)) Of course, the total number of small hits C ends (for example, 5 times) is less than the sum of the small hit B end times and the small hit C end times, and the small hit B end times and small hits. It is preferable to set less than a large value (5 times in the case of this example) among the number of times of C end per hit. As a result, for the small hit type set when a small hit is won during the time saving state, the end timing of the time saving state cannot be predicted unless the time saving situation is grasped in a complex manner. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning, winning) in the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been won, that is, when a ball is detected by a ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first entry ball opening 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters. Is a process for acquiring and executing the hold process for that value.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64 (starting winning, winning) (S701). .. Here, whether or not the state in which the ball is detected is continued over three timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed by the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64. Is configured to determine the winning (winning) of the ball to the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64. In this way, it is determined that the ball has won (winned) only when it is determined that the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period (the period during which the timer interrupt process is executed three times (4 milliseconds)). For example, even if a small amount of electricity generated by the flow of a sphere becomes noise and the sensor (ball entry detection switch) is momentarily turned on (a state in which the passage of a sphere is detected), that It is possible to classify an event generated by noise (momentary on) and an event generated by the passage of a sphere (on that continues for a predetermined period) and execute the process.

When the control for determining that the ball has entered is used when the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period, the period for determining that the ball has been detected is less than the predetermined period (as described above). In addition to (instantaneous detection by noise), it is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred even when the upper limit period longer than a predetermined period is exceeded, and not to determine that the ball has won a prize (winning ball). As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning (winning) of the ball from malfunctioning even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an illegal operation.

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won (winned) the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 Add the value (N1) of the reserved ball counter 203b by 1 (S704), and indicate the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b changed by the calculation (special figure 1 reserved ball command). Is set (S705).

The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 51) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) described above, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S707, the look-ahead process is executed (S707). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry) 64 (S701: No), or when it is determined that there is no winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry) 64 (ball winning). Even if it is determined that there is (S701: Yes), if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (4) (S703: No), S707. Move to the look-ahead processing.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the winning information (right to execute the lottery) of the first special symbol is configured to be hold-stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol is stored. Although it is configured so that it cannot be held and stored, a configuration may be used in which both the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (entry opening) 640).

Further, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a configuration in which the winning information can be reserved and stored, the upper limit number of the winning information for each special symbol that can be reserved and stored is unified (for example, 4). Alternatively, different values may be set as the upper limit number (for example, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). Further, it is configured to set the upper limit number of reserved balls that can be reserved for the total value of the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a look-ahead process (S707), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S707).

In this look-ahead process (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry opening) 64 (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first winning opening (entry opening) 64 (S801: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variable pattern table 202d. Based on (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or time saving variation pattern table 202d2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S802).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S802 is set (S803), and this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57) described later, sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, and sets the display mode. Performs a process to (tentatively) update the progress of the time saving state in advance. Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 are displayed at the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S901: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S902) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S902: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, a state in which a new normal symbol change (lottery) can be started (executed), the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol hold ball execution area. (S903).

In the process of S903, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter is not stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area, that is, when it is determined that the winning information of the normal symbol to be newly executed does not exist. (S903: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S903: Yes), the value of the stored second hit random number counter C4 is acquired (S904). ..

Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S904 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S905). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal design is off.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S905 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S906), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S906: Yes), it is a hit. (S907), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S907, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S906, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S906: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S908, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S909.

When the processing of S907 or S908 is completed, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S909), and when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S909). S909: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S910), then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S911), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (normal state) (S909: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (). S912), this process is terminated.

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 202q set to be turned on in the process of S911 is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the game state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is the time saving state. Therefore, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and is referred to when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set. As a result, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a can be changed according to which gaming state the normal symbol variation (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always memorize the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period set in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) and the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is performed are set. By comparing, the game state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed may be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S913). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S910 or the process of S911 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S913 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S913: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S913, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S913: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S907, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S908, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part is lit in the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing. It is configured to be (confirmed display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S914, the change in the second symbol display device 83 when the second symbol display update process (S1508 of FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next. When the display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S907 or S908.

After finishing the processing of S914, next, when the variation display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 45, S106) (this time). The lottery result) is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol (S915). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S915: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to ON (S916).

In the process of S916, when it is determined that the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is changed. When it is determined that the state is normal (S916: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S916, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If this is the case (S916: Yes), the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to off (S917), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S918).

In the process of S918, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S918: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S918: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1. It is set to times (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the shortened working hours (S918: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (electric accessory 640a opening operation). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory 640a). (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set are set. Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation is set, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (30 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. There is nothing. Similarly, in the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 640a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 640a).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being opened for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set is determined, and the game state is set at each timing. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the above configuration, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set are in the normal state (S921 in FIG. 45). (Opening operation set in S919) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S919 in FIG. 45) may be set in other states. With this configuration, the player is provided with a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player even for the normal symbol fluctuation that is executed in the period before and after the time saving state that is the advantageous game state for the player is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends when the jackpot game is executed, the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit game is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time. It will be a specific period during which it will be easier to enter the ball.

Using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a and a second entrance ball opening 640 are arranged in the information of the V winning device 650, and a small hit game is in progress. It is preferable to configure the ball to enter the two winning openings (V winning device 650a, second winning opening 640), whereby the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the small hit game can be increased. , It becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. In the process of S920, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (S920), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S920, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1506) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S921 or the process of S919 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 46 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (S101). Since the content of this detection is the same as the process of S701 of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), and it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing the normal symbol (S1002). 2 When it is determined that the display mode of the symbol display device 83 is changing the normal symbol (S1002: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not during the normal symbol change (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently being hit (S1002: No). S1003). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol is hit (S1003: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S1003: No), it is the timing when a new normal symbol change (execution) can be drawn, so it was updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (S101) described above. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S1004). After that, this process ends.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V inlet passing process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not on (S1101: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is on (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1103), and this process is terminated. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1105), and this process is completed.

Next, the V-pass processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203j is on (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203j is not on (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that V has not passed (S1202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1202, if it is determined that V passage is present (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is in the valid period (S1203). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S1203: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is acquired. The V flag 203i indicating the above is set to on (S1205). Then, the V passage command is set (S1206).

Next, the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). After that, the time saving / medium counter 203k is set to 0 (S1208), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this process is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not in the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball is illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1301) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting accompanying the power-on is executed (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1402). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process shifts to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if it is not stored (S1405: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1415 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1406), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1415 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1515 in FIG. 51, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1415). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1416, S1417) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1407: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1408). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1410, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is read (S1411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S1413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1501). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 39) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing (S1501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command (S1602), the round number command (S1607), and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 (S1502) is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then the jackpot effect is executed when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. Or, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1504). .. In the jackpot control process (S1504), the winning openings (specific winning openings 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning openings 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state are opened, and the corresponding winning openings ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of the V winning device 650). A small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1505). In the small hit control process (S1505), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S919 or the processing of S921 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when a variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. 1 Start with the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) is completed, the first symbol display update process (S1507) is performed. The variation display executed by the symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is terminated, and the stop symbol is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). (1st symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the 1st symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1508). In the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 changes. Start displaying. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 The stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S907 or the processing of S908 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45) after ending the executed variation display. Stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1510: Yes), the process is shifted to S1501 and each process after S1501 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1510: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1502 (S1512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1501 to S1508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1509, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 49 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1513 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1513), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1514). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1515), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1401) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1501 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the corresponding winning opening This is a process for opening or closing (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. The jackpot start flag 203c is set to on when the jackpot start is set by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S216). In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is (when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on) (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag is set. 203c is set to off (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), then the jackpot is currently in progress. (S1604). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the period in which the above-mentioned jackpot middle flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to on) (S1604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot. The determination process (S1605 to S1612) for determining whether it is the timing to execute the above is executed.

In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the present is the start timing of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. When it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) is based on the open scenario table 202g. The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1607). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery count) during the execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during the jackpot game). When it is executed (during the period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set), the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side is cumulatively displayed. .. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chan period) for determining that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command and the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. And, when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (rounds) in the previously executed jackpot game is added to the number of round games (rounds) of the new jackpot game. The number of rounds accumulating means for adding the number) and the number of display rounds command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds accumulated by the cumulative number of rounds are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game It has a round cumulative number display control means and a display. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition of the winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or variable. When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed to end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1608: No), then, It is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed after 15 rounds (the final round game preset in this jackpot game) is completed, and the waiting time which is the ball ejection time (in this embodiment, the waiting time). When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. The start timing of the ending effect and the end timing described later are also configured to be determined based on the opening scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) set when the jackpot is won.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1610 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), it is determined in the process of S1612 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612). If it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type being executed is jackpot A to jackpot D (S1613). In the process of S1613, the jackpot type stored in the storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read out.

Next, the corresponding time saving end condition is set using the time saving giving table 202e based on the read jackpot type (S1614). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time reduction with jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time reduction with jackpot), 100 is set for the time saving medium counter 203k, 1 is set for the small hit A counter 203m, and the small hit B counter is used. 3 is set for 203n, and 5 is set for the small hit C counter p. When the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving big hit), 100 is set for the time-saving medium counter 203k, 2 is set for the small hit A counter 203m, 10 is set for the small hit B counter 203n, and 50 is set for the small hit C counter p. Are set respectively.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot), the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time saving medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit It is configured so that a value (time saving end condition) is not set for each of the C counter p. After completing the processing of S1614 described above, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S1614 is set (S1615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time reduction setting information command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the time reduction information indicating the time reduction end condition of the current time reduction state in the time reduction information update area 223g and the provisional time reduction information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). .. Based on the time saving information set here and the updated information of the time saving state updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, the remaining number of times (remaining condition) of the time saving state is determined, and based on the remaining number of times. Various production modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After finishing the processing of S1615, next, the state command corresponding to the game state set after the big hit is set (S1616), the end of the big hit is set (S1617), and the big hit middle flag 203d is set to off (S1618). ), End this process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the time saving state can be set differently according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol is established as the end condition (time reduction end condition) in the time saving state as compared with the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that difficult time saving end conditions are set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when winning one type instead of two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In the present embodiment, the same time saving end condition is set in the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) set when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to set a time saving end condition that is more difficult to be established when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Further, a part of the plurality of time saving end conditions may be set so that the jackpot A is more likely to be satisfied, and the other is more likely to be satisfied by the jackpot B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, in the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the variation number ending condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (end based on the value of the time saving counter 203k). Conditions) and the winning count end condition (end condition based on the value of each small hit counter) regarding the number of winnings won as a result of the special symbol lottery are set.

In addition, as the winning count end condition, the end condition corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of small hit winning is set. With this configuration, for the player, the small hit game corresponding to which small hit type is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number (100 times), and how much more. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends.

In the present embodiment, only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations, but it differs depending on the jackpot type. The fluctuation number end condition may be set. Further, as a condition for ending the number of fluctuations, a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and this is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. Established when the first special symbol fluctuation end condition and the second special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol are provided and the measurement result of the second special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. The second special symbol change end condition may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition based on the measurement result of the counters (small hit A counter 203 m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p) corresponding to each small hit type is set as the winning count end condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the total value of the number of times a small hit is won may be set, or a plurality of (3 or more) small hit types may be set. Among them, a means for measuring the total number of times the small hit game in which a predetermined number (two) of small hit types are set is executed is provided, and an end condition is set based on the measurement result of the means. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition is set for all the small hit types that can be set at the time of winning the small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times is set at the time of winning the small hit. Even if this is done, the small hit type Z may be set so as to be a small hit type in which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. As a result, even if the player knows that the small hit has been won during the time saving state, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is approaching the end due to this small hit.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit type Z is provided, it is preferable to execute the small hit game having the same contents as the small hit game in which the winning number end condition is set. With this configuration, even if the game content of the small hit game executed during the time saving state is identified, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is approaching the end by this small hit game. ..

In this way, by determining that the small hit has been won, or by determining the game content of the small hit game that is executed based on the winning of the small hit, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10. By discriminating the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether or not it is approaching the end), thereby suggesting (notifying) the progress of the time saving state (whether or not it is approaching the end). It is possible to make the player have a strong interest. The control content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small hit control process (S1505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1505). This small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed and the response can be made. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203f is set to ON by the processing of S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701: Yes), the opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to off (S1703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1704). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. The determination of S1704 is determined by analyzing whether the small hit medium flag 303g is set to ON. In the process of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the small hit (S1704: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1704: Yes), the process of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1705: Yes). S1706), it is determined whether this time is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1707).

If it is determined in the process of S1707 that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1707 that this time is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1707: Yes), then it is determined in the processing of S1708 whether the V flag 203i is set to ON. (S1708), when it is determined that the command is not on (off) (S1708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read (S1709), and then the read small hit is read. An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S1710).

The instruction commands set in the process of S1710 include, for example, a small hit (for example, small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game, and a ball is specified during the small hit game. An instruction command for different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set depending on the small hits (for example, small hits B and C) that are difficult to pass through the area.

Specifically, when the small hit A, which is easy to hit two types during the small hit game, is set as the small hit type, the display mode for forcibly forcing the player to execute the right-handed game (Fig.). 16 (a)) is set, and then, when the sphere passes through a specific area, a display mode (see FIG. 16 (b)) indicating that the two types have been successfully won is displayed. ing. In this way, by making the content when the instruction command is set different according to the degree of expectation for passing the ball through the specific area in the small hit game to be executed, the player can be provided with a natural effect. can do.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S1711: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1713). If it is determined in the process of S1713 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: Yes), the ending command is set (S1714), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1713 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: No), it is determined in the process of S1715 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715). If it is determined in the process of S1715 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1716), and it is determined that it is set to ON. (S1716: Yes) sets an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i (S1717), sets the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot medium flag 203d on (S1718), and sets the V flag 203i. It is set to off (S1719), the V passage flag 203j is set to off (S1720), the small hit medium flag 203g is set to off (S171721), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. 55) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S2115: Yes in FIG. 55), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2062 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the process proceeds to S2068.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2118, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2066). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the lamp display device 227. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2118 is executed, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2069), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2071) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2068 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S2068 is performed via the processing of S2064 to S2066. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), S2069, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2070, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2071), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2069 is that when the processing of S2068 is reached via the processing of S2064 to S2068, the processing of S2064 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113 and the variation display setting process of S2114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect are pressed, and the frame button This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. The various counter update processes are processes for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

In the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all the counters are updated by 1 each time the various counter update processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the update method of each counter is unified, the update of each counter is performed. Since the condition is synchronized and there is a problem that it is not possible to give randomness to the set effect mode, the updated values of the counters are configured not to be synchronized.

After finishing the various counter update processes (S2111), the effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update process (S2112) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect (already set variable display) currently being executed during the effect execution.

After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Then, when the variation display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). The process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the symbol is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). Further, in the process of S2208, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S2208 is completed, the processing of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information-related processing is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2210). This prize information-related process (S2210) determines whether or not to execute the provisional hit effect based on the prize information (variable type) included in the prize information command received this time and the current game situation. Is executed.

When the winning information-related process (S2210) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the game state read in the process of S2301 is in the time reduction (S2302), and if it is determined that the time is in the reduction (S2302: Yes), then the provisional collision determination flag 223h is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S2303). If it is determined in the processing of S2303 that the provisional collision detection flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2304, and is the provisional time reduction end flag 223j turned on? Is determined (S2304). If it is determined in the processing of S2304 that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is not on (off) (S2304: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2305, which corresponds to the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time. Determine if there is information (S2305).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned processing of S2303, when it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is on (S2303: Yes), or in the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is on (S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute the temporary hit effect, and shifts to the process of S2311 described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information-related processing (S2211), the provisional hit effect can be executed only when the read game state is in the short time. Therefore, since the temporary hit effect can be executed only when the time is shortened, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the temporary hit determination flag 223h is on, that is, when the temporary hit effect has already been executed, a new temporary hit effect is not set, so that the temporary hit effect being executed is displayed. It can be provided to the player until the end.

Next, the process (S2305 to S2311) for setting the temporary hit effect will be described. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time (S2305). When it is determined that the received winning information is a hit (S2305: Yes), the provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the provisional time saving information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information (S2305: No), the processing of S2306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether the information updated in the process of S2307 is a time saving end condition (S2308). When it is determined that the working hours end condition is satisfied (S2308: Yes), the provisional working hours end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is not the time saving (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2310 described later. Next, a display winning information command corresponding to the information in the temporary time saving information update area 223i is set (S2311), and the received winning information command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the time saving (S2302: No), the display winning information command corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), and the above-mentioned S2311 is set. Process is executed and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S2209, when the winning information command is not received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). When a hit-related command is received (S22111: Yes), the hit-related process (S2212) is executed, the above-mentioned process of S2217 is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the hit-related processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S2212). The hit-related process (S2212) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. The processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In the hit-related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the command determination process (S2113) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), the provisional hit determination flag 223h is set to off (S2403), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2404). When the number of rounds command is received (S2404: Yes), the number of display rounds command is set based on the number of rounds (S2405), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the main control unit 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, the voice lamp control device is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp controller 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When the jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S2407), and the jackpot end processing (S2408) is executed. The details of the jackpot end processing (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

On the other hand, in the process of S2406, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2409). When the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2411). When the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S2413). When the V entrance passage command is received (S2413: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2414), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S2415). When a V-passing command is received (S2415: Yes), a display V-effect command for indicating an effect based on the entry of the V-winning device 650 into the V-switch 650e3 is set (S2416), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S2415, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2417). When the instruction command is received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2417, if it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game is configured to open the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing. Is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays a highlight guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set the display instruction command to make it.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball while the highlighting guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player is achieved. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hit game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is reliably configured to win the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. The ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. Despite this configuration, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the third symbol is displayed when the small hit game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the display for guiding the right-handed hit to the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10A) of the display device 81. Alternatively, it is possible that the game is stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the right-handed game by changing the display for guiding the right-handed person displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, as a timing for displaying the highlighting guide display mode (see FIG. 16A), when the right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guide display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game is performed. The timing is set so that the launched ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guidance display mode cannot let the ball flow down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small hit game.

Here, the jackpot end processing (S2408), which is one of the hit-related processing (S2212), will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2408).

In the jackpot end processing (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S2501 is in the time saving state (S2502). When it is determined that the read information is in the reduced working hours state (S2502: Yes), all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, in the process of S2502, when it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2502: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S2504). When it is determined that there is hit information (S2504: Yes), a continuous display command is set (S2505). Next, the provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), the display status display command is set (S2507), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2504, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S2504: No), a display winning information command corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving related command has been received (S2215). When it is determined that the time saving-related command has been received (S2215: Yes), the time saving update process (S2216) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. On the other hand, in the process of S2215, when it is determined that the command related to the time saving is not received (S2215: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113), will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the process of S2601, it is determined whether the analyzed time reduction related information is the time reduction setting information (S2602). When it is determined that the time reduction related information is the time reduction setting information (S2602: Yes), the time reduction information is set in the time reduction information update area 223g and the provisional time reduction information update area 223i (S2603), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the time reduction related information is not the time reduction setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time reduction related information is fluctuation information (S2604). When it is determined that the time saving related information is fluctuation information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the time saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2607). When it is determined that the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 (S2608). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 times (S2608: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2608 that the number of remaining time reductions is more than 30 (S2608: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2607 that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), the processes of S2608 to S2609 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2610 described later.

Next, it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is one (S2610). When it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is one (S2610: Yes), the variation flag 223n before the end of working hours is set to ON (S2611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not one (S2610: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2613), and the time reduction pre-end variation flag 223n is set to off (S2614). Next, the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 0 (S2612: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not the fluctuation information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is the small hit information (S2616). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the small hit information (S2616: Yes), the small hit related update process (S2617) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not the small hit information (S2616: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the small hit-related update process (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit-related update process (S2617).

In the small hit-related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223 g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the semi-end condition flag 223m is ON (S2703). When it is determined that the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the quasi-end condition is satisfied (S2704). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, when it is determined that the semi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703: Yes), or in the processing of S2704, when it is determined that the semi-end condition is not satisfied (S2704: Yes). No), it is determined whether the end condition is satisfied (S2706). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to off (S2707), and then the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2708). Next, the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is set to off (S2709), the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2710), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, if it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2807. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2802), and then the fluctuation is performed in the processing of S2203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 56). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, an effect setting process for setting an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2804), and then a display variation for notifying the display control device 114. It is generated based on the variation pattern type in which the pattern command is acquired and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S2805 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the process shifts to the processing of S2807.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) is a variation pattern set in the current variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when the prize information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) and the provisional hit effect are set. This is a process for setting a temporary hit effect.

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2901). Next, in the process of S2901, it is determined whether the read information is in the time saving state (S2902). When it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is in the time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the provisional collision determination flag 223h is on (S2903). If it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is on (S2903: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, when it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2903: No), the information of the time saving information update area 223g is read out (S2904). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is ON (S2905). When it is determined that the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is off (S2905: No), the ROM 222 is based on the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m setting, the hit / fail judgment result, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b provided in (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the variation flag 223n before the end of working hours is on (S2905: Yes), the final result provided in the ROM 222 is based on the result of the hit / fail determination and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The state display mode is selected using the state display selection table (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after executing the process of S2806 described above, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). .. When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is acquired (S2809). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the extracted stop type (S2810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S2807: No), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S4001 in FIG. 64) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S4102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S4102 and S4102, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 79 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 79 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the power-on images, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S4005, the interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 66B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75.

In the display setting process (S4303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous advance notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, various types of images are transmitted to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), which are determined in the task process (S4304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance eye). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed to display the S4304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 68A. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S4502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 81. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variable type command (S4406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4407), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S4601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. .. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S4702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and there is an error command. If (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4802), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S4802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S4412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. The hit-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related command processing (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is a hit start command for display (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to the process of S4903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 71 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of a jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S4902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the processing of S4901 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4903. When the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to the process of S4905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the operation on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command in the process of S4903 (S4903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4905. When the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the process of S4905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to the process of S4907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 70) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S4905 (S4905: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4907. When the processing of S4905 or S4906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S4907). If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to the process of S4909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5303) based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5305). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4909. When the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S4909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S4909 (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to the process of S4911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command process (S4910) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). This small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that a small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4909 that there is no small hit end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4911. When the processing of S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). If it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command in the process of S4911 (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to the process of S4913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). This V-entrance pass command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V-entrance pass command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and the V-winning device 650 has a V-winning position. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch (V switch) 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4913. When the processing of S4911 or S4912 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). If it is determined that there is a V effect command in the process of S4913 (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the process proceeds to the process of S4915.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be granted. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5605), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V effect command in the process of S4913 (S4913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4915. When the processing of S4913 or S4914 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). If it is determined that there is an instruction command in the process of S4915 (S4915: Yes), the instruction command process is executed (S4916), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the instruction command processing (S4916) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). This instruction command process (S4916) is a process executed when it is determined that the instruction command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and it is highly probable that the jackpot game will be given. This is a process for displaying the suggested effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the instruction command processing (S4916), first, the instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the instruction effect display data table (S5653). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5655), and this process ends.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there are various production-related commands corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands. If there are various production-related commands (S4414: Yes), the production-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to the processing of S4401.

Here, the details of the effect-related command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect-related command processing. This effect-related command process executes processing corresponding to various effect-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the effect-related command processing (S4415), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When it is determined that there are no various effect-related commands in the process of S4414 (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the processing of S4401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), The processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 68 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, in the processing of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6002), S6003 to S6004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6005.

In S6005, the pointer update process is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6203), and if it is a demo display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6203: No). S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 76 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the display data table (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed, in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the details of the transfer setting process (S4305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6301 (S6301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6402). In the process of S6402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6403. Further, as a result of the processing of S6401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the display setting process (S4303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502), and if it is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6507. Further, as a result of the processing of S6505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6510), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The discrimination in the processing of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer setting process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 36 (S6601). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S6602 (S6603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 66B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when a big hit is won (a symbol hit or a two-kind hit is obtained) as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The time saving end condition (special prize end condition) set in (when), the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) set when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times, and the special symbol lottery for a small hit Since it is configured so that the time saving end condition (time saving end condition) set when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number can be set, the period (time saving) in which the time saving state is continuously set is set. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily predict the timing at which the state ends).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned winning count end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won a plurality of times, the player is asked to win the small hit each time during the time saving state. Isn't the time saving state ending? Can make you think. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit types can be set when a small hit is won, and as a plurality of small hit types, a small hit type for setting a winning count end condition and a winning count end condition There is a small hit type that does not set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends based on the small hit game executed during the time saving state.

As described above, when the small hit type for setting the winning count end condition and the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is not set are set, the small hit game to be executed (opening operation of the V winning device 650) is performed. For the same content (the same concept including an error that the player cannot identify), set the small hit type that sets the winning count end condition and the small hit type that does not set the winning count end condition. It is good to configure it to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing when the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of small hit types for setting the winning count end condition can be set, and the number of times set as the winning count end condition is different for each small hit type. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends by determining the content of the small hit game executed during the time saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, a small hit is won by a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) that is easy to be executed when a time saving state is set, and the winning small hit is supported. When the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 opened by the small hit game). , The big hit (per 2 types) is set after the small hit game is completed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned setting for each of the two types means that, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the big hit game based on the big hit type (big hit game content) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit. It is configured to execute on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the game, but is not limited to this, and is being executed on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small hit game (small hit type) may be read (lottery), and the jackpot game corresponding to the read (selected as a result of the lottery) jackpot type may be executed. , A jackpot is set on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected based on the result of a predetermined lottery may be executed. ..

In the first embodiment in which two types of hits can be set in this way, small hit games with different expectations for setting two types of hits are set according to the winning small hit types, and each small hit type is set. It is configured so that the time saving end condition (the winning count end condition) is set. Further, the smaller hit game (small hit type) in which two types of hits are easily set, the smaller the number of times the winning count end condition is satisfied (winning number).

With this configuration, if you win a small hit during the time saving state, you can play the small hit game while assuming both the possibility of winning per 2 types and the possibility that the time saving state will end. Since it will be executed, it is possible to improve the playability in a time-saving state. Further, the more the small hit game in which it is easy to obtain two types of hits is won, the easier it is for the time saving state to end, so that the game during the small hit game can be enthusiastically performed.

In the first embodiment, among the small hit types, the winning number end condition is once for the small hit A, which can win two types of hits if the right-handed game is continuously performed. (There are some exceptions). With this configuration, a large penalty can be given only to the player who does not continuously play the right-handed game (the player who does not play the appropriate game), and the time is shortened for the player. You can continue to play right-handed games inside.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, the timing at which the time saving state ends is different depending on the type of the satisfied time saving ending condition, and the time saving state is changed during the period in which the small hit game is executed. It is configured so that it can be set when it is continuing and when the time saving state is finished. As a result, the game result can be different depending on which time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player is made to pay close attention not only to whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, but also to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied. be able to.

Specifically, when a small hit is won in a special symbol variation in which the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops (the timing at which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed). During the small hit game that is executed after the time saving state ends, it will be in the normal state, but if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state will be at the timing when the small hit game is executed. Is terminated.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small hit game, is launched on the upstream side (right-handed game) of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. It is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path through which the ball flows down), and is configured so that the ball does not easily flow down to the through gate 67 or the electric accessory 640a side during the small hit game. As a result, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the established time saving ending condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, so that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the normal symbol is won and the time saving state is set at the time when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, the time saving state is set during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Is configured so that the opening operation during the time saving state is continuously executed even if is completed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the established time saving ending condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and thus it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

It should be noted that, unlike the first embodiment described above, it is not difficult to understand that the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the satisfied time saving end condition, but the time saving state changes according to the satisfied time saving end condition. In the case of giving playability peculiar to greatly different ending timings, for example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the variation of the special symbol starts, and the winning is won. When the number-of-times end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the small hit game is completed. With this configuration, the period for which the time saving state is set can be significantly different depending on the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied.

In this case, unlike the first embodiment described above, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged on the upstream side of the V winning device 650 and the time saving state is set during the small hit game. Is configured so that many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a to enter the ball entry port (for example, the general ball entry port 63, the second ball entry port 640), and further, the opening operation is performed by a small hit game. It is preferable that the ball entry port guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a pays out more balls than the V winning device 650.

In addition, as the time saving end condition, the fluctuation number ending condition is set to 2 times and the winning number ending condition is set to 1 time, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol change after the time saving state is set. It is preferable to configure so that many balls can be entered into the ball entry port guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small hit game. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a specific time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to provide a new game property.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, a V winning device 650 that is opened when a small hit is won is arranged in the right side region, and a right-handed game is played during the small hit game. By doing so, the V winning device 650 is made to win a ball, and when the ball winning the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), two types of hits are set. ing. Furthermore, the contents of the jackpot set as two types (the content of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, etc.) are configured to be set according to the type of the small hit which is the lottery result of the special symbol. doing.

In such playability, for example, when a small hit is won, the lottery result is identified by the stop display mode of the first symbol which is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and corresponds to the current small hit. By discriminating the contents of the jackpot set in If you win a small hit that is less than the game and a game state (for example, normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set after the big hit game is completed, you do not intentionally win two types of hits, and the next There was a risk that the game would be played so as to aim for a small hit.

Therefore, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the period until the ball launched by performing the right side game reaches the V winning device 650 is special to the first display device 37. The right area so that it is longer than the period from when the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the symbol is stopped and displayed until the small hit game is executed (until the time when two types of hits can be obtained during the small hit game). Of these, it is preferable to provide a delay flow path for delaying the flow of the ball on the upstream side of the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the right-handed game is performed after determining the lottery result of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a hit between the two types. Therefore, in order to win two types, the right-handed game can be continuously executed even before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (from the variable display of the special symbol), as described above. It is possible to prevent malicious games from being played.

In this case, for all the small hits, the period until the ball launched by playing the right side game reaches the V winning device 650 is the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first display device 37. It is not necessary to make it longer than the period from when is stopped and displayed until the small hit game is executed (until the time when two types of hits can be obtained during the small hit game), and some small hit games ( In particular, it suffices that the small hit type in which the big hit content that is advantageous to the player is set) is executed so as to satisfy the condition.

Further, in the first embodiment, the expectation level per two types during the small hit game (the possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game when the right-handed game is continuously performed) is determined. It is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and specifically, as described above, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is different depending on the winning small hit type. Not limited to this, for example, by making the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a, which is rotated in the small hit game, different according to the winning small hit type, the expectation level per two types during the small hit game (continuation). In the case where the right-handed game is performed, the possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game) may be different.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during the small hit game is set to a constant operation regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down during the small hit game is specified. An operation pattern is set in which the first period communicating with the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) passing through the region and the second period communicating with the other flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) are alternately established. , The opening timing of the V winning opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing at which the first period and the second period are established.

Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the right-handed game can be continued by executing the same effect as the small hit game. In this case, if the special symbol is lost in the lottery, the special symbol's final display time, that is, the period for stopping and displaying the special symbol lottery result is changed according to the type of the loss. In some cases where the lottery result of the symbol is out of order, the final display time of the special symbol can be lengthened (the period until the next special symbol change is executed can be lengthened).

Therefore, it is possible to perform a game aiming at two kinds of hits other than the case where the small hit game is won. Further, by applying the effect at the time of disengagement (pseudo small hit game effect) to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the delay member described above, the right-handed game can be performed more continuously.

Further, the V winning device 650a can be set to the small hit type in which the opening operation (small hit game) in which the ball cannot win is executed, and the small hit of the small hit type (unfortunate small hit) is won, that is, 2. Even when a small hit game with no expectation for two types is executed, the above-mentioned (pseudo small hit game effect) may be executed.

In addition, the number of times that the lottery result (specific loss, unfortunate small hit) of the special symbol that can execute the above-mentioned pseudo small hit game effect is measured, and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the measurement result. It may be configured. As a result, the time saving state can be ended based on the number of times the pseudo small hit game effect is executed, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the small hit game effect this time is a pseudo one, that is, It is possible to facilitate the continuous right-handed game in order to grasp whether or not the ball wins in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game production.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. In the second embodiment, the point that the first embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol and the content set as the end condition of the time saving state are different. The difference is that the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different from the point.

In the first embodiment described above, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the winning number that is satisfied based on the number of winnings that are won in the small hit. The end condition and the end condition are configured to be settable, and the time reduction state is terminated when any one of the end conditions of one of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time saving state is continuously set, and makes it possible to play a game with a sense of tension during the time saving state and provide a game that does not get tired. there were.

Further, as the winning count end condition, different conditions can be set according to the set small hit type, which makes it more difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, since different time-saving end conditions can be set according to the jackpot type of the jackpot in which the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the timing at which the time-saving state ends.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, it is only difficult for the player to grasp the plurality of time saving end conditions set according to the result of the game and the time saving information updated during the time saving state, which is predetermined. There is a problem that it is difficult to make the player think that he / she has won the big hit by himself / herself because it is left to the lottery result of the special symbol to determine what the time saving end condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether to perform a right-handed game or a left-handed game in a state in which the time saving state is set. In addition, the time saving end conditions that are likely to be established differ depending on the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in the game in the time saving state executed according to the game content selected by the player, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage or the time saving state can be continued for a long period of time, the player is self-sufficient. It can be thought that it is the result of playing the game in.

Further, the second embodiment is configured so that it is possible to obtain per two types as in the first embodiment described above, and the first game (left-handed game) and the second game are performed during the time saving state. When (right-handed game) is performed, the expected value for the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the expected value for acquiring per 2 types (expected value for acquiring 2 types per special symbol 1 fluctuation) , Are configured to be different.

Specifically, when the first game is performed, the time-saving game in which the time-saving state can be continued for a short period of time is likely to be short, and the time-saving game in which it is easy to obtain two types of hits during the time-saving state is executed, and the second game is performed. When the above is performed, the period during which the time saving state can be continued tends to be long (longer than the first game), and it is difficult to obtain two types of hits during the time saving state (compared to the first game). It is configured so that a time-saving game (which is difficult to acquire) is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to select the game content during the time saving state according to the player's own convenience, so even a player who wants to play a game for a long period of time can play the game only for a short period of time. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a non-player to play a game without dissatisfaction. It should be noted that a detailed description of the contents for performing a game with different game characteristics during the time saving state will be described later.

<Regarding the content of the production in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the contents of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), the content of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed will be described. FIG. 82A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period during the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the display screen, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, the "preference after the jackpot" for guiding the game method in the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends in the central portion of the main display area Dm. The comment "Please enjoy the game" and the comment "End of big hit" to notify that the big hit game is over are displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a first guide display area Dm4 indicating the content of the first game that can be executed during the time saving state and a second guidance display area Dm4 indicating the content of the second game that can be executed during the time saving state are displayed. A Dm5 and an acquired content display area Dm9 for indicating the privilege acquired during the jackpot game are formed. In the second embodiment, "left-handed" indicating a left-handed game as a first game that can be executed during a time-saving state, and "short" indicating a characteristic game property when a left-handed game is performed during a time-saving state. The comment "time game" is displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4.

Further, in the second guidance display area Dm5, "right-handed" indicating a right-handed game as a second game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and characteristic game characteristics when the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. A comment indicating "relaxing game" is displayed in the second guidance display area Dm5. That is, in the second embodiment, as a game method during the time saving state, a left-handed game in which the time saving state is settled in a short period of time and a right-handed game in which the time saving state can be enjoyed for a long period of time can be selected. This can be displayed immediately before the time saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game). Therefore, the player can be made to play the game by an arbitrary game method at the timing when the time saving state is set.

In the present embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in characters in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5, and the game method in the time saving state is displayed by the player. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to display all the differences between the first game and the second game, or the differences may be displayed by a picture instead of a character. It may be configured to do so. Further, as shown in FIG. 82A, only major differences are displayed in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5, and the first guide display area is displayed during the period of the display. By selecting Dm4 or the second guide display area Dm5, detailed contents may be displayed.

With this configuration, even for players who think that it is sufficient to roughly grasp the game contents that differ depending on the game method, and for players who want to grasp the details of the game contents that differ depending on the game method. Can also provide an appropriate display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), the display contents immediately after the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 82B is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the second embodiment has a function of holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) with respect to the first embodiment described above. The second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reserved for indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol. The symbols are configured to be displayed with four "triangular" marks, the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi.

This reserved symbol is the second reserved symbol in the order in which it is reserved and stored (the second special symbol lottery is executed) in the same manner as the reserved symbol of the first special symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to fourth reserved symbol Dse). It is displayed in order from the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi, that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2 (in the order in which the ball enters the ball entry port 640). That is, the reserved symbols (Dsb to Dse) of the first special symbol and the reserved symbols (Dsf to Dsi) of the second special symbol are both displayed so as to gradually shift toward the executing symbol Dsa. The player can easily grasp the reserved symbol corresponding to the next executed special symbol from the display content of each special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), immediately after the time saving state is set, the character "?" Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether to execute the current time saving state in the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). In addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 82 (b), a display mode for indicating that the game method in the time saving state has not been determined may be displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2, for example, a left-handed game. , The characters "left or right" indicating that any of the right-handed games may be played may be displayed.

Although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, whether the entry port where the ball enters for the first time after the time saving state is set is the first entry opening 64 or the second entry port 640. Is determined, and the gaming method arbitrarily selected by the player is determined based on the determination result. Therefore, the character "?" Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2 during the period from when the time saving state is set until the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640.

Further, in the second embodiment, the display content of FIG. 82 (b) is configured to continue for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time saving state is set, and the time saving state is maintained during that period. The fluctuation pattern is set so that the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning information stored on hold at the time when is set ends. With this configuration, if the winning information for winning the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the special symbol, before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (in the game guidance display area Dm2). The special symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot can be terminated (before the display mode for guiding the game method is displayed).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which a big hit is won due to a special symbol change on a side different from the game method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82B, the game method during the period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, but other display areas. It may be configured to display the game method currently set in. That is, during the jackpot game, it is necessary to display the display method for guiding (instructing) the game method that is advantageous to the player, so it is necessary to display the display method in the guidance display area Dm2, but the time is shortened. While is set, it is configured so that the same game result can be obtained regardless of which game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) the player selects. The game method may be displayed in another area for displaying the current game method, instead of the guide display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) the game method that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the situation in which the game method is guided (instructed) to the player by changing the display mode (for example, the color and shape of the characters) and the current game method ( It may be configured so that it can be distinguished from the situation in which the game method selected by the player) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83A, the content of the effect when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 83A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 imitating a "lottery box" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the lower left of the main display area Dm. On the side, a game content display 811 for guiding the game content of the first game to the player is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 for suggesting the number of time reduction ends in the first game is formed.

That is, in the first game (left-handed game in the time saving state) in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery is executed according to the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, and the result (1st prize to miss). Is displayed as the game result display 810, so that an effect display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as the game method during the time reduction, the characters "left-handed" indicating the game method of the first game are displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. ..

When a specific game method (game direction) such as "left-handed" or "right-handed" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2, the game is different from the displayed game method (game direction). When a game is played by the method (game direction), an error notification for correcting the game method (game direction) is executed. That is, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) is performed in the time-saving state, an error notification is executed when the right-handed game is performed, and the second game (right-handed game) is performed in the time-saving state. After it is confirmed that the game will be performed, an error notification will be executed when the left-handed game is performed. In addition, during the period when neither game method is determined during the time saving state, the error notification is not executed regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 for displaying the reserved number (number of reserved symbols) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol A special figure 2 holding number display area Dm7 for displaying the number of holdings (number of holding symbols) is formed, and a special symbol corresponding to the game method (left-handed game) currently selected in the sub-display area Ds (left-handed game) is formed. Only the reserved symbols of the first special symbol) are displayed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). With this configuration, only the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol corresponding to the game method selected by the player can be emphasized and displayed (effect display).

Further, the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in the dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the exact number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) for each special symbol. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83A, the player can easily identify the current number of reservations "0" in the special figure 1 hold number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 hold number display area Dm7. Although it is configured to be displayed in the size of, the number of holds for each special symbol can be displayed in a size that cannot be identified unless the player is aware of it, or the number of holds can be displayed with an identifier other than a number. It is good to configure it so that it does.

Then, when the effect display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83 (a) is executed, the result of the lottery is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. , The remaining time reduction number for suggesting the time reduction end number is updated and displayed in the time reduction number display area Dm10 based on the progress of each value (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of small hit winnings) with respect to the time reduction end condition. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the time saving state by grasping the result of the lottery and the display content of the time saving number display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the character 812 imitating a boy searches for the treasure box 813 for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol. At the same time, the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol (second special symbol) corresponding to the selected game method (right-handed game) is displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. Regarding the content of the effect executed when this right-handed game is selected, the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is different from the effect content of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the effects executed when the right-handed game is selected in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effects are different from the effects of the first embodiment described above. Explain the contents. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a game screen when a right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the second embodiment, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are configured to display whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. In FIG. 84, the notice display mode 820 showing the characters “chance” for the first reserved symbol Dsf corresponding to the next special symbol change is the third reserved corresponding to the special symbol change after three changes. A notice display mode 821 showing the characters "end" is displayed for the symbol Dsh.

The notice display mode set for each of the reserved symbols is selected and displayed using the reserved display selection table 222aa, which will be described later.

In this way, by displaying the notice display mode for the reserved symbol, the player is motivated to win a big hit by the time the special symbol change is executed while predicting the special symbol change at which the time saving state ends. Will play the game. In addition, based on the content of the notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time saving state does not end and execute the special symbol change with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the content of the game in the time saving state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram schematically showing the game content in the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type among the game contents in the time-saving state in the second embodiment. be. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won by a lottery of the first special symbol with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the first special symbol is better. It is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit game (a small hit game executed corresponding to the small hit A), which is easier to obtain a second type hit than the second special symbol.

Further, in the second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above is used, and when the time saving state is set, the ball is moved to the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. The opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed so that the ball can be easily entered. That is, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, more balls than in the normal state are entered into the second entrance 640, and a lot of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. be able to. On the other hand, even if the time saving state is set, the ease of entering the ball into the first entry port 64 does not change at all from the normal state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are the contents of the game in the time-saving state, will be compared and described. First, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the time saving state (the number of prize balls that can be obtained by inserting a ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640) will be described. The number of prize balls in this time-saving state is configured to be larger in the second game than in the first game. Then, when the first game is performed in the time-saving state, only the same number of prize balls as in the case where the normal state is set can be obtained, and the number of balls (holding balls) decreases during the time-saving state. The game to go is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is performed, it is possible to put many balls into the second entry port 640, so that many prize balls can be obtained, and as a result, during the time saving state. A game of keeping (maintaining) the ball (holding ball) is executed.

The period during which the time saving state can be continuously set is configured to be shorter when the first game is performed than when the second game is performed. Specifically, among a plurality of time-saving end conditions, as a variation number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, a variation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. And a condition for ending the number of fluctuations that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 80, and when the first game is executed, the maximum number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 30. However, it is configured so that the time saving state is not set continuously.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation of acquiring a big hit (including per type and per type 2) for each special symbol change (lottery) executed during the time saving state is higher when the first game is performed. It is configured to be higher (larger) than when two games are played. Explaining the degree of expectation of winning this jackpot, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery of the special symbol executed when the first game is executed) and the lottery of the second special symbol (the first). The probability of winning a big hit (probability of winning per type) is the same (1/200) as the lottery of special symbols executed when two games are executed. That is, the first game and the second game are configured with different expectations for winning the two types.

Explaining this point in detail, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the first game, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be 1/10, and it is executed during the second game. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be halved. Then, the distribution of the small hit type set when the small hit is won is set so that the small hit A: small hit B is 9: 1 when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Has been done. That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the first game, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by making the probability of winning a small hit and the distribution of the small hit type set at the time of winning a small hit different, the first game fluctuates once with a special symbol than the second game. Based on the (lottery), it is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (including per type and per type 2) is high.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving end condition that is easily satisfied when the first game is executed and the time saving ending condition that is easily satisfied when the second game is executed are set to be different. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once is most likely to be satisfied, and then the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. It is set so that it becomes difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time saving end condition that is satisfied in the case of the case and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the small hit B is won three times.

When the second game is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit D is won 20 times is most likely to be satisfied, and then it is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 80 times. It is set so that it becomes difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time saving end condition and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends, so that different game characteristics can be achieved. Can perform the game of.

Further, as different game characteristics, it is possible to select a game property aiming at a big hit in a short period of time (first game) and a game property aiming at a big hit in a long period of time (second game). In addition, as a method for different game methods, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and the case where the first game is performed and the case where the second game is performed are different. It is configured so that the time saving end condition can be easily satisfied. As a result, the period in which the time saving state is continuously set can be made different between the first game and the second game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. It differs in that it is done. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the first per random number table 202a is replaced with the first per random number 2 table 202aa, and the first per type selection table 202b is replaced with the first per random number table 202a. The 1-per-type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with the time-saving grant table 202e, and the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae is replaced with the small-hit type selection table 202f. The type selection 2 table 202af is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the open scenario 2 table 202ag is provided instead of the open scenario table 202g.

The first random number 2 table 202aa is different from the first random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in that the value to be determined as a small hit winning (first random number counter value C1) is changed. There is. Here, the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first random number 2 table 202aa includes the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol and the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol. ,have.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. The special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above in that a value to be determined as a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. The description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa, “10 to 109” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the small hit determination value. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is determined (executed) using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed), it is determined as a big hit at a ratio of 1/200. , It is configured to be judged as a small hit at a rate of 1/10.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (c). FIG. 87 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" is defined as a big hit determination value, and "5 to 499" is a small hit. It is specified as a judgment value. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is judged (executed) using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed), it is determined as a big hit at a ratio of 1/200. However, it is configured to be judged as a small hit at a rate of 1/2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit can be won in both the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured. As a result, even if the first game (left-handed game) that executes the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the second game (right-handed game) that executes the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. However, it is possible to satisfy the winning count end condition that is established based on the number of winnings in the small hit.

Further, since the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol can be set differently, the first game and the second game can be set differently. It is possible to make the easiness of satisfying the winning count end condition different. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games in which the ease of ending the time saving state differs depending on whether the first game is executed or the second game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 86 (a), the description will be continued. The first hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of the time saving state given to some jackpot types is changed. The other elements are the same. The description of the same element will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c). FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and FIG. 88 (b) is the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1. 88 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. It has a selection 2 table 202ab2, and various tables are used properly according to the corresponding special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 has the acquired first hit type counter value C2 of "0 to 9" in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1. In the range, "big hit A" is defined as the jackpot type, "big hit B" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "10 to 49", and "big hit C" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "50 to 99". Is stipulated.

The "big hit A" defined here is a jackpot type in which a round game executes a 15-round jackpot game, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the round game is 5 rounds, and the time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Big hit C" is a big hit type of 5 rounds of round game, and if the game state at the time of winning (at the time of setting) is the normal state, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game, and at the time of winning (at the time of setting). ) Is in the time saving state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

As described above, the second embodiment has a jackpot type (big hit C) defined so that the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. ing. As a result, the player can be made aware of whether or not the jackpot has been won, the set jackpot type, and the game state at the time of winning, so that the game can be made more complicated and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the consciousness.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type is "big hit". "D" is specified.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad is different from the variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selected during the period in which the time saving state is set are different. .. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89B is defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 included in the variation pattern 2 table 202ad. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. As shown in FIG. 89A, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state and is referred to when the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is set and when the time saving state is set. It has a time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, and a variation pattern according to the game state when setting a variation pattern of a special symbol (when executing a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39)). It is configured to set the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89 (b), the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be described. The time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 changes the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined number of times from the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game) with respect to the time saving variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, it differs in that it is configured to set a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in which a specific time is specified.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, the total time of 1 to 4 special symbol changes after the big hit ends is constant (3) regardless of which special symbol change is executed. Seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, from the end of the jackpot game until a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses, a selection display for allowing the player to select a game method set in the time saving state (FIG. 82 (b)). ) Is displayed.

With this configuration, during the period when the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved symbol) already acquired when the time saving state is entered is displayed. Since it can be easily executed, a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) different from the special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol) mainly executed by the game method (for example, left-handed game) selected during the time saving state is used. 2 Even if the change of the special symbol) is executed, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won between 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit is set as a special symbol after the end of the big hit. It is different according to the number of fluctuations, and the timing to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol of the 4th rotation after the big hit, the timing to stop and display that the lottery result of the special symbol of the 3rd rotation is a hit, The timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol of the second rotation is a hit and the timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol of the first rotation is a hit are all configured to be constant. doing.

With this configuration, the selection display screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) displayed when the time saving state is set can be displayed for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition to making it possible, the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to many reserved balls can be digested by using the period during which the selection display screen is displayed.

Further, if a hit (small hit, big hit) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set. Therefore, if a hit is won within a predetermined period (within a predetermined number of fluctuations of a special symbol (within 1 to 4 rotations)) after the end of the jackpot, the timing of notifying the player of the winning result (winning). (Timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating) is configured to be constant.

In the second embodiment, a variation pattern table is used in which a special variation pattern is selected for the variation pattern set in the period from the time saving state is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed four times. However, for the period in which a special fluctuation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the first special symbol and A special fluctuation pattern may be selectably configured for the number of special symbol fluctuations (8 times) corresponding to the total number (8) of the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the second special symbol. However, the period from when the time saving state is set until the change of the special symbol is executed twice may be targeted. Further, in the second embodiment, when a winning is won, a fluctuation pattern dedicated to winning is set, but whether or not to set a fluctuation pattern dedicated to winning based on the content of the winning hit. It may be configured to determine whether or not, and set the fluctuation pattern based on the determination result.

Specifically, among the cases where a hit is won, there are cases where a big hit is won and a small hit type in which a small hit A is set (that is, a small hit type in which two types of hits are easier to obtain than other small hit types). Only when the set small hit) is won, the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the hit may be set. As a result, it is possible to give a great expectation to the player who has noticed that the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern (variation time) different from the usual one is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), as a fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol fluctuation after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation) after the time saving state is set, the first special The symbol is configured so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol is set. As a result, if the special symbol can be continuously changed during the time saving state, the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed in the game in which the first special symbol is changed (first game, left-handed game). ) Can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time.

In FIG. 89 (b), the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot is defined as the content specified in the time saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is referred to when the time reduction state is set. ) Indicates only one type of fluctuation pattern for the lottery result of the special symbol after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation), but in reality, a counter (not shown) (depending on the control process of the main control device 110) is shown. It is configured to select one from a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times according to the value acquired from the loop counter whose value is updated), but the detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this way, even in the fluctuation pattern table configured to select one fluctuation pattern from a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the second special symbol. It is configured to be easy to use. Therefore, if it is possible to continuously change the special symbol during the time saving state, the game that changes the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) is the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. Can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time. The above-mentioned short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is most likely to be set, except when the first special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the second special symbol in all the selectable fluctuation patterns. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is easy to select is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the average fluctuation time per fluctuation when all the fluctuation patterns are set according to the design values. Is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the shortest fluctuation time that can be set according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is set according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It also includes configurations that are set or set to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time obtained. That is, when the player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations per unit time is the second special symbol in the first game (left-handed game) in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed. It suffices if it is set to be more than.

The time saving 2 table 202ae differs from the time saving table 202e of the first embodiment described above in the time saving end conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type, and the time saving. The difference is that the type of counter that sets the value that is the end condition has been changed (increased). Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the time saving 2 table 202ae will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (d). FIG. 88 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving 2 table 202ae. The time saving 2 table 202ae replaces the special figure 1 counter 203ad with the time saving medium counter 203k and the special drawing 2 counter 203ae with the small hit C counter 203p with respect to the above-mentioned time saving table 202e. The difference is that the counter 203ac is provided and the values set (assigned) to the various counters are different.

In the second embodiment, as described above, the player selects the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game) as a plurality of games having different game characteristics during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be set, and it is easy to be satisfied among a plurality of end conditions (time reduction end conditions) for ending the time saving state depending on whether the first game is executed or the second game is executed. It is configured so that the termination conditions are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "100", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "100". It is stipulated that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "100". In the case of, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "1", and the value of the small hit B counter 203n is "3". , It is stipulated that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20".

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "40", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "70", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "2", and the small hit. It is specified that the value of the B counter 203n is set to "5" and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40". When the jackpot type is "big hit D", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "30". , Special figure 2 The value of the counter 203ae is "80", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is "20". It is specified to be set.

That is, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit A" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (small hit A counter 203 m). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times (special). FIG. 2 The time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

In addition, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit B" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won once (small hit A counter 203 m). The time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) becomes the time saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the small hit D is won 20 times (the value of the small hit counter 203ac). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (when becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

When the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit C" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (by becoming 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 70 times (special figure 2). When the time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit D" is set, the above-mentioned "time saving end condition" is set. The same time saving state (time saving end condition) as "Big hit B" is set.

That is, it is established by differently executing (selected) game methods in the state where the time saving state is set (depending on the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)). It is possible to make different time-saving end conditions that are easy to do. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a different game as a game in the time saving state.

Furthermore, the time saving end condition (value set in various counters) is configured to be different according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and it is established when the same game (for example, right-handed game) is played during the time saving. It is configured so that the time saving end conditions that are easy to do are different. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, you can be interested in the jackpot type of the jackpot that was won this time.

In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types set when a jackpot is won, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more types of jackpot types are provided. You may. In this case, multiple jackpot types with the same game content (opening period, number of round games, inter-round interval period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won are provided, and the time saving end condition is provided for each jackpot type. It is good to configure so that they are different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time reduction state (content of the time reduction end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied in a shorter period of time when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. It is configured. As a result, in the first game, the period (time reduction period) in which the time reduction state is continuously set can be shortened.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is easier to obtain two types of hits when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to win. With this configuration, the first game is a game that provides the player with the playability of aiming for two types in a short short period of time, and the second game is a game that aims for one type in a long short time period. It can be a game that provides sex to the player.

Therefore, by selecting the game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time saving state, the game can be executed with different game characteristics, and the player is provided with a game that does not get tired of. be able to. Further, in the second embodiment, since the game period in the time saving state is different between the first game and the second game, the player can be made to select the game method according to the playable period. It is possible to provide a suitable game to a good player.

Further, in the second embodiment, regardless of which game method is selected during the time saving state, the jackpot probability during the time saving state (the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery and the small hit game during the small hit game). Since the sum of the probabilities that the ball passes through a specific area and wins a jackpot is almost the same (including an error that the player does not notice (for example, an error of 10% or less)), for which player You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the time saving end condition is set so that no advantage or disadvantage can occur to the player in the first game and the second game regardless of which jackpot type is set. As another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, a time saving end condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and other than the above-mentioned predetermined jackpot type. When a specific jackpot type is set, the time saving end condition may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set jackpot type (executed jackpot game), so that the interest of the game can be improved. When the game methods (first game, second game) that are advantageous to the player are configured to be different according to the jackpot type in this way, all the jackpot types are considered in consideration of the predetermined distribution rate. It is preferable that the player is configured so that no advantage or disadvantage can occur between the case where the first game is executed and the case where the second game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from always selecting only one of the game methods when the time saving state is set.

In addition, a storage means for storing the jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, the period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means (for example). A notification means for notifying (displaying) the player of the time saving history) may be provided. As a result, it is possible to predict the time saving state to be set in the future and select the game method based on the time saving state set in the past. In addition, the effect display (big hit effect display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game is used to notify the player of a suggestion mode suggesting a game method that is advantageous to the player. You may.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The small hit type selection 2 table 202af is made to be able to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above. , The difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different. Other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af, and FIG. 90 (b) is the contents specified in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1. 90 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202af is the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1 referred to when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. It has a special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, which is referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed.

In the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the value range of the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is "0 to 89", and the small hit type is "small hit A". However, "small hit B" is defined as a small hit type in "90 to 99".

Here, the small hit type "small hit A" is the same as the "small hit A" of the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, 2). "Big hit A" is set as the big hit type of the big hit that is set (executed) in (when the seed hit is acquired). The "small hit B" is the same as the "small hit B" of the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, when two types of hits are obtained. ) Is set (executed) as the jackpot type of the jackpot, "jacket B" is set.

Further, in the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is set to "0" and the small hit type is set to "small hit A". , "1 to 99", "small hit D" is defined as a small hit type.

Here, the small hit type "small hit D" is a small hit type in which the small hit game with the lowest expectation per two types (about 5%) is executed among the plurality of small hit types, and passes through V. "Big hit B" is set as the big hit type set (executed) at the time (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game and when two kinds of hits are obtained). In other words, it is the most disadvantageous small hit for the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag differs from the opening scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that an opening scenario corresponding to the small hit D is specified instead of the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit C. Other than that, they are the same. Then, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit D, among the opening scenarios corresponding to the small hit C, the on period of the flow path solenoid 650k was shortened, making it more difficult to pass V (passing the ball to a specific region). Since the difference is only between the point and the point that the opening scenario set when passing through V (when acquiring per type 2) is changed to 5 rounds instead of 15 rounds, detailed illustration is omitted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a small hit D counter 203ac is provided instead of the small hit C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203aa, and a special symbol. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b described above. Since it is provided for the second special symbol, detailed explanation is omitted, but when the ball enters the second entry port 640, which triggers the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the second It is variably set when a lottery (variation) of a special symbol is executed.

The small hit D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of times a small hit is won for which a small hit D is set as a small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 98), it is defined in the time saving 2 table 202ae. The value is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed this time, the small hit won this time. When it is determined that the small hit type of is small hit D, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (not shown). If it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state. In the second embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even when any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if the end condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0. In this way, even when the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (fifth time saving end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the small hit D counter Since the value of 203ac is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is continued even though the time saving state is completed. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol set as an end condition for causing the movement is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol changes during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol set as an end condition for causing the movement is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol changes during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. There is a condition for shortening the working hours. As a result, when the first game (a game in which only the first special symbol is changed) and the second game (a game in which only the second special symbol is changed) are executed, the dedicated time saving end conditions can be satisfied. Can be.

In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 202ae are provided so as to measure the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the total variation of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). A means for measuring (number of times) (corresponding to the time reduction / medium counter 203k of the first embodiment) and a means for measuring either the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (for example, a special figure). 1 counter 203ae), and by executing the process of subtracting the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 from the total number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 (second special symbol) may be calculated. good.

With this configuration, among the time-saving end conditions, the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. The end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the end condition that is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol can be managed by using two counters. In order to obtain the same effect, the measured value (subtracted value) of the special figure 1 counter 203ae of the second embodiment and the measured value (subtracted value) of the special figure 2 counter 203af are added up. It may be configured to calculate the total number of fluctuations.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 222 of the second embodiment has a state display selection table 222b and a final state display selection with respect to the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 26A). It differs from the table 222c in that a hold display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the table 222c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the RAM 223 of the second embodiment has a provisional hit determination flag 223h and a provisional time reduction end with respect to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 26 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. Flag 223j, time reduction lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time reduction pre-end fluctuation flag 223n, are deleted, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223aa, right-handed flag 223ab, left-handed flag 223ac, time-saving start flag 223ad , The difference is that the time reduction counter 223ae is provided. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

The hold display selection table 222aa wins a prize for the hold symbol (see FIG. 84 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the hold ball of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state. It is referred to when selecting the display mode (see FIG. 84 (a)) for notifying the player of the pre-determination result of the information, and whether or not the time saving state ends (update status of the time saving ending condition). In addition, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is suggested (notified) to the player in advance.

Here, the contents specified in the hold display selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hold display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, the hold mode effect of setting the same display mode as the state display mode set for the special symbol variation being executed in the first embodiment described above for the hold symbol is executed. (See FIG. 84).

The hold display selection table 222aa is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the hold mode effect, and is temporarily updated based on the result of the look-ahead processing of the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i. Various hold display modes are defined based on the obtained time saving information) and the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o. The values indicating the hold display mode described in the hold display selection table 222aa are the same as the state display mode of the first embodiment described above, and the display mode shown with reference to FIG. 15 is the value for each value. Since it is specified correspondingly, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the hold display selection table 222aa, the current hit / fail judgment result stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i, that is, the special included in the winning information corresponding to the current processing. The lottery result of the symbol is "big hit", and the information indicating the big hit (already hit information) is not already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i before the current processing is executed (already hit). When the information "none") and the pre-end information indicating that the time-saving pre-end condition is satisfied (pre-end information "yes") are stored, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 0". The hold display mode "3" is defined in the range of "69", and the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "big hit", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "none", the value of the state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49". The hold display mode "3" is defined as the hold display mode "1" in the range of "50 to 69" and "9" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set when the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information "-". However, the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In this way, the prize information corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the hold display mode is set this time and the prize information already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (acquired before the prize information targeted this time). By variably setting the hold display mode according to the winning / failing judgment result of the special symbol included in the winning information) and the progress of the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol for the player, It is possible to suggest in advance whether or not the time saving state will end.

Therefore, when the hold display mode in which the time saving state may end is displayed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to win the jackpot before the hold display mode is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to set multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from suddenly ending in a gaming machine in which it is difficult to understand the period during which the time-saving state is continuously set. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game that gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Next, when the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "small hit A", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". The hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of, the hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". In this case, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the hold display mode "7" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the hold display mode "7" is in the range of "70 to 99". "9" is specified in the range.

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set when the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information "-". However, the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "small hits B and D", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". The hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of "", the hold display mode "6" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". In the case of, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the hold display mode "2" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the hold display mode "4" is in the range of "70 to 99". "9" is specified in the range of.

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set when the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information "-". However, the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

When the result of this hit / fail judgment is "missing", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is held and displayed in the range of "0 to 49". Aspect "1" is a hold display mode "4" in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". The value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as the hold display mode "1" in the range of "0 to 69" and "9" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set when the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information "-". However, the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

As described above, in the second embodiment, the hold display selection table 222aa is described so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the status display mode of the first embodiment described above. There is. In addition, when the winning information acquired earlier includes information for winning a big hit (win / fail judgment result), the display mode that can be set (selected) for the subsequent reserved symbols is restricted (holding display). Only aspect "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected). Therefore, when the hold display mode is selected and displayed for each of the plurality of hold symbols, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode of the acquired winning information (reserved symbol) is changed with high probability, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a determination means for determining whether or not to actually display the hold display mode selected in the hold display selection table 222aa, and the display mode of the hold symbol are changed according to the determination result of the determination means. When the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39"), the hold display mode may not be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the future game content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed and whether or not the jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped only by the display mode of the reserved symbol.

Further, since the hold display mode "9" is selected with a predetermined probability regardless of the information included in the acquired winning information (holding symbol), the future game will be played only by the holding symbol display mode. It is possible to further suppress the fact that the content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed and whether or not the jackpot has been won) is easily grasped.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

When the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa receives a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110, the second special symbol 2 according to the content indicated by the command. It is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the symbol. Since the detailed configuration is the same except that the target command is changed with respect to the configuration of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The right-handed flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute the right-handed game (second game), and when it is set to ON, the right-handed game (second game) is performed. It indicates that it is a period for executing the game). In the right-handed flag 223ab, the winning information received in the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is the special drawing 1 (No. 1). When it is determined that the prize information is not related to (1 special symbol) (that is, the prize information is related to special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No in FIG. 101 (a)), it is set to ON. NS.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time saving state ends.

The left-handed flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute the right-handed game (second game), and when set to ON, the left-handed game (first). It indicates that it is a period for executing the game). In the left-handed flag 223ac, the winning information received in the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is the special drawing 1 (No. 1). When it is determined that the prize information is related to (1 special symbol) (S3002: Yes in FIG. 101 (a)), it is set to ON.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set can be selected by adjusting the direction in which the player actually shoots the ball. It is configured as follows. Then, the game method selected by the player is determined to be an appropriate game method in the time saving state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined to be an inappropriate game method in the time saving state. ..

In the second embodiment, the ball entry port where the ball first enters after the time saving state is set is in the left-handed area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass) when the left-handed game is performed). The first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) or the second ball port arranged in the right-handed area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass) when a right-handed game is played). 640 is determined by analyzing the winning command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the appropriate game method in the time saving state is determined based on the determination result, but the time saving state is In the set state, it suffices if it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not an appropriate game is being played, and if an appropriate game is not being played, an error notification can be executed. A configuration other than the configuration of the form may be used.

For example, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and a game method during a jackpot game or during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the jackpot game is completed and a time saving state is set can be used. It may be configured to be selected by operating the operating means, and an appropriate gaming method may be set when the ball passes through the gaming area corresponding to the gaming method selected by the operating means. Thereby, the game method desired by the player can be set as an appropriate game method more reliably.

Further, it may be configured so that the player can variably set an appropriate game method while the time saving state is set. With this configuration, by changing the game method while predicting the update status of the time reduction end condition, the player can positively select the game (to set the game method) so as to have a more advantageous time reduction state. Game) can be performed. In this case, it is set to change the game method by operating the operating means, and it is inappropriate regardless of which game (first game, second game) is executed during the game method variable period. It is good to configure it so that it is not discriminated as a game. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation of changing the game method performed during the time saving state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters a specific entry slot, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of entry slot into which the ball enters. However, for example, it may be configured to set an appropriate game method according to the type of the entry slot into which a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered after the time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being set in the gaming area corresponding to the undesired gaming method due to an erroneous operation and setting the erroneous gaming method.

The time saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time saving state has been set as the game state, and indicates that the time saving state has been set by being set to ON. The time saving start flag 223ad determines that a time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes in FIG. 99) in the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described later, and further, the received time saving related command is transmitted. When it is determined that the time reduction setting information (information indicating that the time reduction state has been set) (S2252: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99).

Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and when it is determined to be ON, 4000 is set in the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae described later (S3302 in FIG. 104). ), The flag is set to off (S3303 in FIG. 104). That is, the time saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time saving state has been set on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a dedicated process (time saving state) only when it is set to ON. The process to be executed only when is set) is executed.

The timekeeping time counter 223ae is a counter for continuing the elapsed period (elapsed time) since the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, a predetermined value is set and the value is subtracted. Thereby, the elapsed period from the time saving state is set is determined. When it is determined that the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104), the time reduction time counter 223ae has a value of 4000 (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104). Is set (S3302).

Next, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the big hit is completed. It is configured in. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal state (during the normal game). Since it is configured to be (difficult), the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who commits the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol will be drawn by cheating. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize information of the second special symbol (the prize information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not held and stored, for example, the time is shortened. The winning information of the second special symbol is reserved and stored in the state (in the state where the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is based on the reserved winning information. (Fluctuation) is never executed. Thereby, when the normal game is performed, it is possible to surely prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily inserted into the second entry port 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640. A right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball). (By passing through a specific area), the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate discomfort to the player who has won the big hit via the small hit game.

In this embodiment, the ball can pass through a specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Small hit games with different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are configured to be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol or first special symbol or first 2 The change number end condition (first time reduction end condition) that is established when the change number (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches the specified change number (100 times), and the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) As a result, when the number of winnings in the small hit (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit winning) reaches the specified number of operations, the operation number end condition (second time reduction end condition) is satisfied. , Is set.

Further, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type) before the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition or the second time saving ending condition is satisfied. (Winning) or, a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and during the small hit game according to the winning small hit (small hit game according to the small hit type), the ball is passed through a specific area to win the big hit. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second type before acquiring one type or two types. When any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way may end the time saving state when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the time saving state is set ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning the second kind. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. If the number is (4), the jackpot is won, and in the "first special symbol change (lottery) during the time saving state" that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot is won. Even so, it is possible to suppress the provision of a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

<Control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
In the control process in the second embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the special symbol variation process is executed. The time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42), and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is changed to the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96). The difference is that the look-ahead process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed instead of the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) executed in the start winning process. Further, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). In this special symbol variation processing 2, the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab and the time saving number update processing are performed with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the above.

When the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not changing (S202). : No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab are acquired (S251), and the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab value. It is determined whether (N2) is larger than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S253) and changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab is set (S254). After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) is performed. Similarly, the processes of S206 to S210 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S213 are the same as in the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Processing is executed. In the process of S213, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S213: Yes), the processes of S214 to S218 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), and this process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in the process of S213 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S213: No), the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the time saving number update process 2 is executed (S271). This time reduction number update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time reduction number of times and setting the game state to the normal state, similarly to the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 42). The details of the time saving number update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is completed, the processes S220, S221 and S218 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the time saving number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving number update process 2 (S271). In this time saving number update process 2 (S271), the time saving number of times is subtracted even for the fluctuation of the first special symbol with respect to the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, and the time saving end condition. The difference is that it is changed so as to determine whether or not is established, and the other processes are the same. The same processing will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. After finishing the processing of S602, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of FIG. 2 (S651). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is subtracted by 1 (S652), and the process proceeds to the process of S653. On the other hand, in the processing of S651, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to 1. Subtraction (S654) is performed, and the process proceeds to S653.

In the processing of S653, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the values of various counters is set (S653), and then whether the value of any of the time reduction / medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0. Determine (S655). If it is determined that none of the values of the time saving / medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S655: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S655, when it is determined that any of the values of the time saving / medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S6511: Yes), the above-described first embodiment The process of S605 to S607 is executed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155). In the start winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the second ball opening 640, and the second When there is a start prize at the entrance 640, the process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters. Is added, and the look-ahead process 2 is executed instead of the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44).

When the start winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same manner as the start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), from S704 described above. The process of S706 is executed.

After finishing the processing of S706, it is next determined whether or not the present time is during the time reduction or the jackpot of the special symbol (S751). If it is determined that the current time is during the time reduction or the jackpot of the special symbol is being hit (S751: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of S751, if it is determined that the current time is not during the time saving or the big hit of the special symbol (S751: No), the look-ahead process 2 (S752) is executed and the process is shifted to S753.

In the process of S701, when the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is not detected (S701: No), there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b In the processing of S753 executed when the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S703: No), and when the processing of S752 is completed, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Whether or not it is determined (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, whether or not there is a ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a prize at the second ball entry port 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is If it is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to the look-ahead process 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203ab is added by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the process of S705. In the external output process (S1501) of the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 51), the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 2 of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223aa.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the processing of S757, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area of the free hold area (special figure 2 hold 1st area to special figure 2 hold 4 area) of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S758). In the process of S758, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 hold second area is set, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 hold fourth area is set. , Each is the first area.

Next, when the process of S758 is completed, the process proceeds to the look-ahead process 2 (S752), and the main process is completed.

Next, the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S752) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S752). The look-ahead processing 2 (S752) in the second embodiment is referred to when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 with respect to the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above. Instead of the random number table 202a per unit, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or time saving variation pattern table 202d2), the first random number 2 table 202aa, special figure 1 Refer to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), lottery in the second special symbol. It differs in that it adds a look-ahead of the results, and is otherwise the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the look-ahead process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the same process of S801 as the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above is executed. In the process of S801, if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S851: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S851: Yes), special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af1 and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S852).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process proceeds to the process of S854. On the other hand, in the process of S851, even if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S851: No), the process proceeds to the process of S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: Yes), special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2, special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af2 and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S855).

Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result, a jackpot type, a small hit type, and a variation pattern acquired in the process of S855 is set (S856), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This process differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in that the time saving content (time saving end condition) set at the end of the jackpot control (end timing of the ending effect) is different. ..

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as those of S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above are executed, and in the process of S1612, it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning time is shortened (S1651). If it is determined that the jackpot winning time is short (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to S1653. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot winning time is not in the time saving (that is, it is in the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot). Determine (S1652).

When it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and it is determined that the jackpot is not C (5R time saving no jackpot) in the processing of S1652 (S1613: No), or in the processing of S1651. When it is determined that the jackpot winning time is in the time reduction (S1651: Yes), the time reduction end condition corresponding to each jackpot type is set based on the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88 (d)) (S1653). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No) and the jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot) is determined in the processing of S1652, or S1653. When the process of is completed, the same process as in S1617 to S1620 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above is executed, and this process is completed.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the prize information related process (see FIG. 57) with respect to the above-described first embodiment. The point of changing to the prize information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), the point of changing the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 103), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63). Was replaced with the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 104), detailed explanations were added for various counter update processes (see FIG. 105 (a)), and details of the effect update process (see FIG. 105 (b)). It is different from the point where the above explanation is added, and it is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2163). The command determination process 2 (S2163) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 with respect to the command determination process (S2113 of FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the related process (see FIG. 57) has been changed to the prize information related process 2 (see FIG. 100) and the content of the process to be executed when a time saving related command is received has been changed. Are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes S2201 to S2209 as the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is a prize information command (S2209: Yes), the prize information related process 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process proceeds to S2217. The content of the winning information-related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

On the other hand, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a winning information command (S2209: No), then it is the same as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 of FIG. 56). If the processing of S2211 to S2215 is executed and it is determined in the processing of S2215 that the command received this time is a time saving related command (S2215: Yes), then the content of the received time saving related command is set to the time saving. It is determined whether the information is the information transmitted from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is the time saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S2253), and the time saving information is stored in the time saving information update area 223g. The information is updated (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2217. In the process of S2254, a value that is a time saving end condition is set in various counters based on the information included in the time saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, the time reduction corresponding to the content set in S1614 of the command (big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 98)) including the time reduction setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot B. When a command indicating information) is received, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", and the small hit A counter is referred to with reference to the time saving 2 table 202ae. Set the value of 203m to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac to "20" (see FIG. 88 (d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2254 is completed, the processing of S2217 is then executed to end the main processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S2252, when it is determined that the information included in the time saving related command received this time is not the time saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the time saving related command received this time is If the information (time reduction update information) that updates the time reduction information (number of fluctuations and number of small hit wins) corresponding to the time reduction end condition (approaches the time reduction end condition), the information regarding the time reduction end condition has already been set. Since the time saving game has been started, the process of S2253 for setting the time saving start flag to be turned on is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2254.

In the process of S2254 in this case, the time saving update information is read from the plurality of information included in the time saving related command received this time, and the processing of updating the target time saving information is executed. Further, when the content indicated by the time saving information after the update indicates that the remaining period until the time saving end condition is satisfied is less than the predetermined period, that fact is stored in the time saving information update area.

Next, the contents of the winning information-related process 2 (S2251) will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prize information related process 2 (S2251). The prize information-related process 2 (S2251) is for setting a display mode indicating the updated content of the time saving information based on the prize information with respect to the prize information-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 57). The difference is that the content of the processing of is different and the processing for setting the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) in the time saving state is added. ing. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information-related process 2 (S2251) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f (information for indicating the currently set game state) is read (S2301), and the read information is read. It is determined whether the gaming state indicated by is the gaming state indicating the time saving state (whether the time saving is in progress) (S2302). When it is determined by the processing of S2302 that the current time is not shortened (S2302: No), after executing the same processing as S2312 of the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above, S2311 Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the currently set gaming state is in the reduced working hours state (during the reduced working hours) (S2302: Yes), the game state setting process is then executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). , The process for setting an appropriate game is executed in the time saving state, and the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 (a).

When the process of S2351 is completed, the game content determination process is then executed (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) executes a process for determining whether an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state, and for detailed contents, refer to FIG. 101 (b). It will be described later. When the process of S2352 is completed, the hold display setting process is subsequently executed (S2353), and then the process proceeds to the process of S2311 to end this process.

The hold display setting process (S2353) executes a process for setting the display mode of the hold symbol displayed corresponding to the prize information command received this time based on the prize information included in the prize information command received this time. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (a), the contents of the game state setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (S2251 of the figure 100) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (S2351). In this game state setting process (S2351), the game method (game direction) executed during the current time saving state is set based on the winning information included in the winning information command first received after the time saving state is set. Execute the process to do.

When the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101A) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). The time saving start flag 223ad determines that the time saving setting information has been received in the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) (S2252: Yes in FIG. 99), that is, when a new time saving state is set. It is set to on (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the state is the state immediately after the time saving state is set.

If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), then the winning information received this time is related to special figure 1 (lottery (variation) of the first special symbol). It is determined whether it is (winning information for showing the result) (S3002), and if it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3002: Yes), it is placed in the left-handed area in the state where the time saving state is set. Since it indicates that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 provided, the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to on (S3003), and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3004). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to special figure 1 (related to special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No), the time saving state is set. In this state, since it indicates that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 arranged in the right-handed area, the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the game shifts to S3004. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the second embodiment, the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on from the time when the time saving state is set until the first winning information command is received. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the area where the ball entry port into which the ball enters is arranged (right-handed area, left-handed area). The game in which the ball is fired against the player is set to be an appropriate game in the time saving state, and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off.

Thereby, the timing for setting the game method in the time saving state can be limited to the period in which the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), the content of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the prize information-related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99). I will explain. FIG. 101 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game content determination process (S2352). In this game content determination process (S2352), the prize information included in the prize information command received this time is the prize information based on the appropriate game method with respect to the game method set as the appropriate game method during the time saving state. Is determined, and the process for setting the error command is executed based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol) ( S3101), if it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102). In the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), the left-handed game (first game) in the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game. While in the state (with the left-handed flag 223ac turned on), a winning command indicating that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 in which the ball launched by the left-handed game can enter is received. Since this is a case, this process is terminated as it is without determining that it is abnormal.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3102: No), the right-handed game (second game) in the time saving state. Is set to be an appropriate game (with the right-handed flag 223ab turned on), and the ball launched by the left-handed game can enter the first ball entrance 64. Since it is the case that the winning command indicating the ball is received, it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed, the display error command is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of S3101, the winning information received this time is not related to special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol), that is, the winning information received this time is related to special figure 2. When it is determined that it is (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON (S3103). ), If it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3103: No), the left-handed game (first game) in the time saving state ) Is set to be an appropriate game (with the left-handed flag 223ac turned on), and the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter the second entrance 640. Since it is the case that a winning command indicating a winning ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game has not been performed, a display error command is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when a winning command is received after setting an appropriate game method in the current time saving state by the game state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. 101 (a), FIG. 101 ( By the game content determination process (S2352) shown in b), it is possible to determine whether or not the game method in the time saving state is appropriate. With this configuration, even if the player can select the game method (direction in which the ball is launched) at his / her own will, the game method selected by the player is set as an appropriate game method, and the game method is set as an appropriate game method. Since an error command indicating an abnormality can be set when a game method other than the above is executed, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the winning information-related process 2 (see FIG. 100), after the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)) is executed, the game content determination process (see FIG. 101 (b)). Is configured so that the game content determination process is not executed when neither the right-handed flag 223ab nor the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), if one of the flags (the right-handed flag 223ab and the left-handed flag 223ac) is not set to on, the other flag (right-handed) is set. Since it can be determined that the middle flag 223ab and the other flag of the left-handed flag 223ac are set to ON, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In the second embodiment, in the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), an appropriate game method in the time saving state is set based on the winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101 (b)) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (either the right-handed flag 223ab or the left-handed flag 223ac is on). It will be set to).

On the other hand, for example, as the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), the winning information command is received a plurality of times, and the time saving state is appropriate based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. When executing the process of setting the game method, the appropriate game method in the time saving state is set until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (until the winning information command is received a predetermined number of times). You will not be able to do it. In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate the state in which the game method is not set, and when the unset flag is on, that is, when the game method is not set, the game content determination process is performed. (See FIG. 101 (b)) may be configured to be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the error command from being set based on the game (ball launch) executed while the game method is being determined.

In the second embodiment, the game method during the time saving state (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) is included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. Since the determination is made based on the winning information, it is not necessary to collect dedicated information for determining the game method, and the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a means for detecting the passage of a ball in an area where a ball flowing down a left-handed region surely passes and a means for detecting a ball passing in an area where a ball flowing down a right-handed region surely passes are detected. A means for the game may be provided, and the detection result of the ball passage of each means may be collected to set an appropriate game method during the time saving state. With such a configuration, it is necessary to add a dedicated configuration and the control process becomes complicated, but since the game method selected by the player can be reliably detected, the setting accuracy of the game method can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, in order to determine the gaming method selected by the player, the detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance is used. It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353) executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. .. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353). In this hold display setting process (S2353), when an appropriate prize information command is received during the time reduction state, the update status of the time reduction state and the jackpot game are displayed for the hold symbol displayed corresponding to the prize information command. The process of setting the effect mode of the hold suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of execution is executed.

When the hold display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the prize information command received this time is a command including the prize information related to the special figure 1 (the prize information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol). (S3201), and if it is determined that the information is related to the special figure 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202). If it is determined in the process of S3202 that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, and will be described later. The process proceeds to the processes of S3203 to S3206, and the process for executing the hold suggestion effect is executed by using the hold symbol for the received winning information command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game. Because it is a winning information command that does not correspond to (because the winning information command of the first special symbol is received while the right-handed game (second game) is determined to be an appropriate game), the processing of S3203 to S3206 Is skipped to end this process.

Similarly, in the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information related to the special figure 1 (S3201: No), that is, the winning information related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol). If it is determined that the command is set to ON (S3207), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207), and if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207: Yes), the prize received this time is won. Since the information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process proceeds to the processes of S3203 to S3206 described later, and the process for executing the hold suggestion effect is executed using the hold symbol for the received prize information command. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3207, if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game. Because it is a prize information command that does not correspond to (because the prize information command of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received while the left-handed game (first game) is determined to be an appropriate game). The processing of S3203 to S3206 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the prize information command is received, the prize information included in the received prize information command is the prize information corresponding to the game method selected by the player. It is configured to determine whether or not it is, and to execute the effect (hold display effect) using the prize information included in the prize information command only when the prize information corresponds to the game method selected by the player. ing. As a result, it is prohibited to execute the hold display effect for a game that the player does not intend (for example, a game in which the operation handle 51 is mistakenly operated and the ball is launched in a direction different from the intended direction). can do.

Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player himself / herself, information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player by the hold display effect) can be obtained, and the player is motivated. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner. In the second embodiment, when the player plays an unintended game (a game method different from the game method selected by himself / herself), the hold display effect is not executed. It is sufficient to configure the information that can be acquired by the player to be disadvantageous as compared with the case where the player uses the game method selected by himself / herself. The content of the information indicated by the display mode displayed on the screen may be reduced, or the display mode indicating the information of the content different from the fact may be displayed.

Return to FIG. 102 and continue the description. In the process of S3203, the information of the provisional time saving information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), and the hold display mode using the hold display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the provisional time reduction information update area 223i. Is selected (S3204), the selected hold display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), and the display hold display command corresponding to the selected hold display mode is set (S3206). This process ends.

Next, the contents of the variation display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). The variation display setting process 2 (S2134) is different from the variation display setting process (see S2114 of FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above, and the effect setting process (S2804 of FIG. 63) is performed by the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 103). The difference is that it is replaced with S2851), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). The effect setting process 2 (S2851) is different from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when the time saving state is set as the game state is different. doing. Other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as the above-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) are executed, and the information read in the process of S2902 indicates the time saving state. If it is determined that this is not the case (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information read in the process of S2902 is the information indicating the time saving information (S2902: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set ( S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the process of S3302, 4000 is set to the value of the timekeeping time counter 223ae, then the timekeeping start flag 223ad is set to off, the display game selection command is set, and S3304), and this process is terminated. The display game selection command set in the process of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 of FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display game selection command, the display control device 114 causes the player to select the game method in the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (b)). ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is larger than 0. Determine (S3305).

The time-saving counter The time counter 233ae measures a predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the timing of setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time-saving state is set. It is determined whether or not the current timing has passed the above-mentioned predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment).

In the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae is larger than 0, that is, 4 seconds have elapsed from the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time reduction state is set. If it is determined that the game method is not used (S3305: Yes), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in the period of continuously displaying the selection screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) for selecting the game method. Therefore, the processes of S3306 to S3308 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3305; No), the hold included in the winning information storage area corresponding to this fluctuation. The mode information is read (S3306), the effect mode corresponding to the read hold mode information is set (S3307), the display effect command indicating the selected effect mode is set (S3308), and the present process is terminated.

As described above, when setting the variation display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol, the effect mode corresponding to the variation display is set based on the hold mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect mode associated with the hold effect display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold mode information. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect having a relevance for a long period of time (the period during which a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol are executed), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 102), the winning information corresponding to the game method (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)) selected by the player is provided. Since the hold mode information is set only for the target, the target special symbol variation when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed corresponds to the game method selected by the player. In the case of a special symbol variation that has not been performed, since the hold mode information is not set in the winning information storage area 223a, the effect mode is not set for the variation display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect display (see FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b)) using the predetermined effect mode only for the special symbol variation corresponding to the game method selected by the player, and the effect is easy for the player to understand. Can be provided.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S2161) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 105 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S2161). The various counter update processes 2 (S2161) differ from the various counter update processes (S2111) of the first embodiment described above in that a process of updating (subtracting) the value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is added. The other elements are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

When various counter update processes 2 (S2161) are executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3401), and if it is determined to be larger than 0 (S3401: Yes), The value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is subtracted by 1 (S3402), and then the values of various other counters are subtracted (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this process is terminated. Since the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update processes of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3401, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3401: No), the processing of S3402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3403, and then the process is started. This process ends. That is, since the value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is decremented (updated) by 1 each time various counter update processes 2 (S2161) executed at 1-millisecond intervals are executed, the effect setting process 2 ( The value of 4000 set in (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105B is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162). The effect update process 2 (S2162) is different from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 in the time saving state is added. However, the others are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2162) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving state is set (S3501), if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3501: Yes), and then the time saving state is set. It is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol change in the time saving state is executed.

In the processing of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON. Then (S3503), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3503: Yes), a right-handed display command is set (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3508. When this right-handed display command is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the right-handed display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and is right to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute the hitting game.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3503: No), then the left-handed flag 223ac is set to on. If it is determined whether or not (S3504) is set, and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3505: Yes), a left-handed display command is set (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

When a left-handed display command is set in the process of S3506, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the left-handed display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and left the player with respect to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute the hitting game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3505; No), that is, it is held and stored after the time saving state is set. The change of the special symbol that had been performed was executed, but if 4 seconds have passed without new entry into the 1st entry port 64 or the 2nd entry opening 640, a display standby command is set. Then (S3507), the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the process of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, the display control device 114 continuously displays the character "?" In the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to the player. The screen for selecting the game method (see FIG. 82 (b)) is continuously displayed.

With this configuration, even if the game is temporarily interrupted due to a restroom break or the like after the jackpot game is completed, it is possible to easily restart the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, different time saving end conditions are set for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the player A game for executing the lottery of Special Figure 1 (left-handed game) and a game for executing the lottery of Special Figure 2 (right-handed game) can be selected.

As a result, it is possible to play a plurality of types of games in a state in which the time saving state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the games at an early stage.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the game of executing the lottery of special figure 1 (left-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, the game of executing the lottery of special figure 2 (right-handed game) is executed. It is configured so that the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied and it is easier to win a small hit that is easier to obtain a second type hit than in the case of doing so.

With this configuration, the player can select a game that is likely to be a big hit but the time saving state is easy to end, and a game that is difficult to be a big hit but the time saving state is hard to end. The game can be arbitrarily selected according to the convenience.

In the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is set as an advantageous state, and the player is configured to select a plurality of types of games in the advantageous state. For example, the gaming state in which the probabilistic state is set may be set as the advantageous state, and the case where the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set may be set as the advantageous state.

Further, in the second embodiment, when an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state) is set and an end condition (for example, a time saving end condition) for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, it is disadvantageous to the player. The game state (for example, the normal state) is set so as to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the advantageous state end condition for terminating the advantageous state is satisfied, the advantageous state is higher than the advantageous state. It may be configured to shift to a more advantageous super-advantageous state. With such a configuration, the player can be enthusiastically played so as to quickly shift from the advantageous state to the super-advantageous state.

Further, as the advantageous state end condition for terminating the advantageous state, a disadvantageous end condition in which a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state is set by being established, and a super-advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state (for example). For example, it may be configured to set an advantageous end condition in which the latent state) is set, or depending on the game method selected, in addition to the ease of establishing the advantageous end condition, the disadvantageous end condition It is advisable to configure the conditions so that the ease of establishment of the favorable termination condition is also different.

With this configuration, the subsequent game results can be significantly different depending on the game method selected in the advantageous state for the player, so that the player feels as if he / she played the game by himself / herself. Can be given.

In the second embodiment, an example of two types of game methods (left-handed game, right-handed game) selected by the player is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any of three or more types of game methods can be used. It may be configured to select a game method.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 124. In the third embodiment, the point that the second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650 and the game content based on the lottery result of the second special symbol are different from the first embodiment. It differs in that.

Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game in which the V winning device 650 is opened is executed, and during the small hit game. When the ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area, it has two types of hits in which the big hit game is executed (set) after the small hit game is completed. However, in the third embodiment, the small hit is performed. When the player wins the game, only a small hit game for opening the second variable winning device 1650 is executed, and a specific area is not provided in the second variable winning device 1650. That is, the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it uses a pachinko machine 10 that does not have game playability for each of the two types.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 1650 instead of the V winning device 650 and a configuration of the electric accessory 640a with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the above is changed, the other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a ball flowing down the right side region (right-handed region) of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, and an electric accessory is on the downstream side thereof. A second ball entry port 640 with a 640a is provided. A plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided on the downstream side thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, as in the first embodiment described above, the ball flows down into the left side region (left-handed region) of the variable display device unit 80 while the normal state is set as the gaming state. A game aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game to be performed, that is, a game mainly in which a lottery of the first special symbol is performed, and while the time saving state is set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 It is configured so that a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by a right-handed game in which a ball flows down to a right-handed area (right-handed area), that is, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol is mainly performed.

Details will be omitted because they have been described in the first embodiment, but also in the second embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is in the left side region where the ball launched by the left-handed game can flow down (on the left side of the lower end position of the variable display device unit 80). A second variable winning device 1650 is provided. The second variable winning device 1650 executes an opening operation in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won by a lottery of a second special symbol.

Although the details will be described later, in the small hit game of the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period of 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be arranged at a position where the ball is difficult to reach.

That is, if only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit among a plurality of special symbols and a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball may flow down. The second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left-handed area. With this configuration, it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 when the small hit game is executed.

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small hit winning of the second special symbol can be used only in order to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, since the player is not given a privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game executed by the small hit winning, even if the winning probability is set so as to win the small hit with a high probability, the player is given a winning probability. It is possible to suppress the situation where excessive benefits are given.

Furthermore, since the period during which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650, there is a high probability of a small hit. Even if the winning probability is set so as to win the game, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given an excessive privilege.

Further, in the third embodiment, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in a left side area different from the game area (right side area) in which the ball launched in the right-handed game in which the second special symbol is drawn is flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is performing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is open (executing the small hit game). It is possible to execute a small hit game without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player, but in addition to the above, for example, the glass unit 16 and the second variable winning device A decorative member may be provided between the 1650 and the second variable winning device 1650 so as to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the second variable winning device 1650. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is performing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (execution of the small hit game). It is possible to execute a small hit game without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

In addition, a light emitting member (for example, an LED) for allowing the player to visually recognize the light emitting state is provided in the decorative member provided in the vicinity of the second variable winning device 1650, and in a part of the case where the small hit game is executed. It is preferable to configure the light emitting member to operate (light emit). Specifically, a predetermined lottery is executed when it is determined that the small hit game is executed by the small hit determination means for determining that the condition for executing the small hit game is satisfied and the small hit determination means. It is preferable to provide the lottery means for performing the lottery and the light emitting control means for executing the control to operate the light emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a difference between the number of small hit games that are actually executed and the number of small hit games that the player can see (operate the light emitting member), and the small hit games are actually played. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the game has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict when the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the small hit game is executed (the number of times the small hit is won) is satisfied (when is the end timing of the time saving state). Can be done.

Further, it is preferable that the light emitting control means executes the control to emit light even when the above-mentioned light emitting member is not won as a small hit. As a result, the number of times the light emitting member emits light can be made larger than the number of times the small hit is actually won, so that the time is shortened based on the number of times the small hit game is executed (the number of times the small hit is won). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the end condition is satisfied (when is the end timing of the time saving state).

In this case, the light emitting member is operated when there is a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to a change in the special symbol being executed, or a lottery result of a big hit as a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the winning information stored on hold. It is good to configure it so that it is easy. That is, it is preferable that the light emitting operation executed to notify the fact that the small hit game is won is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

As a result, when the light emitting member emits light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the small hit game is executed, whether the big hit of the special symbol is won, or whether it is just a decorative effect. .. Further, a state in which a factor that terminates a state that is disadvantageous to the player (execution of a small hit game), that is, a state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state) is established, and a state that is advantageous to the player (a state that is advantageous to the player). Since the light emitting member is made to emit light by winning the jackpot), the player can be interested in the game result after the light emitting member emits light.

In the case of using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the light emitting control means emits light from the light emitting member is the timing at which the small hit is won (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing at which the small hit game is started, or the timing at which the small hit game is started. , The timing during the small hit game, the timing after the end of the small hit game, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, etc. may be set, or a predetermined predetermined timing may be set. May be set.

Further, the light emitting control means may be configured to change the conditions for causing the light emitting member to emit light based on the operation result for the operating means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 times or more in 2 seconds (continuous striking operation)) is satisfied, the number of operations of the light emitting member and the number of small hit winnings are determined. It is preferable to configure the light emission control so as to be approximate (more similar than when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied). As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the player can be enthusiastically participated.

In addition, using the light emitting operation of the light emitting member described above, for example, the player is notified (suggested) of the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (remaining number of small hits won) and the small hit type of the small hits won this time. ) May be configured. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in the light emitting operation content of the light emitting member.

In the third embodiment, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not a small hit is won, so that it is difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, and a feeling of tension is given. The game is made to be played by the player, but the player is not limited to this, and the player is notified that the small hit has been won, but the player is notified of the small hit type set for the winning small hit. It may be configured not to notify, or it may be configured to notify the player up to the small hit type. In this case, in order to notify the player that the small hit has been won, a specific display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display mode in which the player can identify that the small hit has been won). The third symbol may be stopped and displayed), or the second variable winning device 1650 may be provided in the right-handed area. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of small hits won in the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while predicting the end timing of the time saving state.

<Regarding the content of the production in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, the effect during the time saving state executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The figures shown in each of FIGS. 107 to 110 are schematic views schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. , The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the winning information of the second special symbol is also configured to be reservable and memorable. Therefore, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The difference is that the effect using the reserved storage information of the second special symbol is executed as the effect for suggesting the remaining time reduction (the effect for suggesting the remaining period of the time reduction state to the player). Hereinafter, the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the third embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the effect content used in the first embodiment.

FIG. 107A is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen displayed when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the time saving state is set, the effect start screen for explaining the content of the effect executed during the time saving state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the small display area Dm11 has a plurality of situation display modes such as the first situation display mode Dm11a, the second situation display mode Dm11b, the third situation display mode Dm11c, and the fourth situation. The display mode Dm11d is displayed.

In this plurality of status display modes, each display mode corresponds to the condition of establishment of a plurality of time-saving end conditions (progress until the time-saving end condition is satisfied), and the progress until the time-saving end condition is satisfied. The display mode is configured to be variable accordingly. Specifically, a bomb having a fuse of a predetermined length is displayed as each situation display mode, and when the first fluctuation is executed after the time saving state is set, the fuse is ignited.

Then, among the time-saving end conditions, the situation display mode corresponding to the time-saving end condition in which the condition is likely to be satisfied is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than the other situation display modes. By changing the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the timing at which the time saving state ends by the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. , The player can be made to pay attention to the production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), on the effect start screen (time reduction start screen), in order to notify the player of the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the central portion of the main display area Dm, "even one explodes. Then, the characters "End in a short time" and "Big hit when digestion is completed" are displayed. As a result, if even one of the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time saving state ends, and the fire of the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished. It is easy to know that it will be a big hit.

The state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b, that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed in the time saving state. This is a state in which a plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are on fire. If it is determined that the special symbol does not start changing after the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set (the special symbol does not start changing after the jackpot game ends), the time saving state waits. The screen may be configured to display a screen indicating that the remaining time reduction suggestion effect for starting the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the game is advanced with the time saving state set and the time saving end condition is approaching (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, or the number of small hits won in the time saving state reaches the predetermined number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the combined status display mode Dm11z for suggesting (notifying) that fact is displayed in the small display area Dm11. FIG. 107 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen during the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the time reduction state.

In this combined status display mode Dm11z, when the progress status of a plurality of time-saving end conditions is a pre-end condition (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 50 as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 30. When it is reached, it is displayed when the small hit A winning number 5 is set as the winning number end condition, and the condition that is satisfied when the small hit A winning number reaches 3) is satisfied. be. Therefore, by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time saving state is about to end.

In addition, when the time saving state is completed by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress status of the plurality of time saving ending conditions satisfies the pre-ending condition (among the plurality of set time saving ending conditions, the time saving ending condition is set. When any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time reduction end condition is satisfied to end the time reduction state. That is, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), when a plurality of situation display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) whose display modes are variable according to the progress status of each time saving end condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, Since it is necessary to execute an effect that one of the status display modes explodes when the time saving state ends, it is easy for the player to know which of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied this time. There was a problem that it was grasped by.

In this way, the player can easily grasp which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied this time, so that a plurality of time-saving ends set when shifting to the time-saving state can be achieved. The conditions were easily predicted, and there was a risk that the timing of the end of the reduced working hours could be easily predicted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the pre-end conditions are satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the progress of each time-saving end condition of the transition. Therefore, it is configured to display the coalescence status display mode Dm11z. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is satisfied to end the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, the combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed only when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, but even one time-saving end condition ends. The coalescence status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when the previous condition is satisfied, or when the value corresponding to the specific time reduction end condition among the plurality of time reduction end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition, the coalescence status display mode is displayed. Dm11z may be displayed.

Then, when the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed. FIG. 108 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. FIG. 108A shows a display screen when the time saving end condition is satisfied for one of the winning count end conditions, and corresponds to the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b. A stop display is made with a combination of "341" indicating that the third symbol has won a small hit, and in the small display area Dm11, a display mode indicating a state in which the bomb has exploded is displayed, and the main display area Dm In the central part, the character "end" is displayed to notify the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, the content of the effect of suggesting the remaining time reduction for a special situation when the time reduction state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (b). FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for holding and storing the winning information of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is drawn by lottery in the normal state (during the left-handed game). When the jackpot is won and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol stored on hold may be executed.

And, among them, there was a case where the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold included the winning information of winning the jackpot (so-called holding inner consecutive villa). In this way, even though the time saving state is set, the next jackpot is based on the winning information already acquired before the time saving state is set, instead of the winning information of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state. When the game is executed, if the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) executed during the time saving state is executed, a contradiction occurs between the effect content and the game result, and the effect is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol that is held and stored when the time saving state is set, and the winning information is obtained. When it is determined that there is winning information, it is configured to execute a special effect (effect in hold during time reduction) instead of starting (execution) the normal remaining time reduction suggestion effect (see FIG. 107 (a)). doing. As a result, if the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) that is executed during the time reduction state is executed, a contradiction will occur between the effect content and the game result, and it will be suppressed that the effect will be reduced. A sense of superiority can be given to the player by performing a special effect in the unusual situation where the jackpot is won again in the hold memory after the jackpot ends.

When the effect in hold during the time reduction is executed, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the characters "!?" Are displayed in the combined status display mode Dm11z. In order to indicate to the player that an effect different from the normal remaining time reduction suggestion effect is being executed, the characters "something is wrong" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. .. By performing such a display, it is possible to easily make the player understand that an effect different from the usual one is being executed.

Further, in FIG. 108 (b), since the first special symbol is changed as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is changed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Dm1a. It is displayed, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b.

It should be noted that the display screen shown in FIG. 108B is also executed when, for example, before the time saving state is set, it is determined that any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied based on the winning information already acquired. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot is immediately (until all the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the winning information stored on hold are completed). Since it is possible to notify the player that either the player is elected or the time saving state ends, the player can be interested in the content of the next effect to be executed.

When the time saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed to notify the player that the time saving state ends. do. On the other hand, when a big hit is won from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (a) is displayed. FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the timing when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b) and the jackpot of the first special symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when a jackpot is won by the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol that has already been held and stored in the state where the time saving state is set, the special figure 1 variation display area In Dm1a, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating a big hit, and the fire extinguished coalescence status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the characters "fire extinguishing completed" and "big hit" are displayed to indicate that the big hit has been won.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit (the timing when the special symbol change of the first rotation is executed after the end of the big hit), the time saving state is held and stored. If the content of the winning information is determined and, as a result of the determination, it is determined that there is winning information that wins the jackpot, a special effect (time saving) that is different from the normal time saving state (remaining time saving suggestion effect) It is configured to execute the production in the middle hold.

With this configuration, the jackpot will be won immediately after the remaining time reduction suggestion effect is executed, and the production content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect and the game result may not match, or the game result may be dealt with. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forcibly changing the effect content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect.

Next, the effect content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect when the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time reduction state is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the number of remaining time reductions is determined in the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied when the special symbol variation is executed and the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that a plurality of winning count end conditions that are satisfied when a small hit is won in is set, and the time saving state ends when any of the multiple setting time saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to predict the period during which the time saving state is continuously set (timing at which the time saving state ends), and the interest of the game during the time saving state is improved. ..

Even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in this way, the period until the time saving state ends may be fixed. For example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates until the game progresses in the time-saving state and the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied is 3, and the number of small hits is 5 times until the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, since a small hit is won only once for each change of the special symbol, the time is shortened when the special symbol lottery is executed three times regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It will end.

In the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is determined, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the small display area Dm11. (In the example of FIG. 109 (b), "3 times") is displayed. With this configuration, in a gaming machine in which the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be complicatedly set by setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time-saving state ends is determined in advance, Since the timing can be clearly notified to the player, it is possible to play the game while being aware of the remaining period of the time saving state.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is determined, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the small display area Dm11 (in the example of FIG. 109 (b)). Since "3 times") is displayed, the period in which this display is displayed is a period in which the time saving state does not end based on the number of times the small hit is won, no matter how many times the small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to win a large number of small hits while the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

In addition, when such an effect display is used in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is possible to win two kinds of hits by winning a small hit, so that it is more enthusiastic. You can play games. That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, if a small hit is won during the time saving state, a chance to win two kinds of hits and a pinch at which the time saving state ends come. , As shown in FIG. 109 (b), it is determined that the time saving state is a period in which the time saving state does not end based on the small hit winning (a period in which it is confirmed that the time saving state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). By executing the effect of notifying (remaining period fixed notification effect), while the remaining period fixed notification effect is being executed, if a small hit is won, only the chance of winning two types will come. Since it is possible to notify a person, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the player can win many small hits.

Further, in the third embodiment, different time saving end conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, and in some of them, a predetermined time saving state is set. Each time saving end condition may be set so that the time saving end condition is not satisfied during the period.

In the third embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the player that it is a period during which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set. FIG. 110A is a schematic view showing a display screen at the time of short-time rush after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 (a), but in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, the time saving state is at least until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times. The time saving end condition is set so that the end does not end. That is, the period from the setting of the time saving state to the execution of the special symbol change 20 times is the period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110A, the present is a specific period after the time saving state is set (the period during which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol). An effect (invincible effect) for notifying the player of this is executed. During this invincible production, a bomb that is not lit is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the player is notified that the bomb does not explode (the period during which the time saving state does not end). There is.

Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the remaining period mode 820 for notifying the remaining period of the invincible effect is displayed. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110 (a), the characters "until the squib is ignited ..." and "20" are displayed as the remaining period mode 820. In this way, by executing the effect (invincible effect) for showing the player the period during which the time saving state does not end, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind during the time saving state. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. .. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the first random number 3 table 202ba is used instead of the first random number table 202a for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19A) in the first embodiment described above, and the small hit type selection table is used. The difference is that the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb is replaced with 202f, the time saving 3 table 202bc is replaced with the time saving table 202e, and the opening scenario 3 table 202b is provided instead of the opening scenario table 202g. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 112A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the first random number 3 table 202ba defines a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. The special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 has the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 20B) of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

FIG. 112 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. The special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 20C) of the first embodiment described above in that the range of values determined to be small hits is different. Different, otherwise the same. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the acquired first random number counter value C1 is in the range of "5 to 499".

That is, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200). However, it is determined that it is a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot or the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2.

The range determined as a big hit or a small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and it may be specified that the probability of being determined as a small hit is lower than the probability of being determined as a big hit. The range determined to be a small hit may not only be specified by continuous values, but may also be specified with a gap. Further, in the third embodiment, the determination of big hit or small hit is executed using the same table regardless of the set gaming state. For example, depending on the set gaming state. It may be configured to perform a jackpot or small hit determination using different tables.

Specifically, the range determined as a small hit is wider in the table used when the time saving state is set as the gaming state than in the table used when the normal state is set as the gaming state. It is good to configure as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit winnings used to end the time saving state are configured to occur frequently during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the situation that frequently occurs in the normal state. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), in the third embodiment, the small hit is not won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. However, it may be configured to win a small hit by a lottery of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, for example, when the time saving state is set and the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold includes the winning information for winning a small hit, the time saving state is immediately terminated. be able to. When such a configuration is used, for example, it is preferable to use it in a gaming machine capable of providing a gaming state that is advantageous to the player if the time saving state is immediately terminated.

Specifically, as the game state, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low (normal state: low probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). Low probability state, time saving state: low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol (probability variation state: high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) Latent state: High probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set, and the latent state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied during the period when the probability change state is set. It is preferable to configure so that the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, it can be advantageous for the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest. Further, in such a gaming machine, when the winning information of the first special symbol, which is stored on hold when the probabilistic state is set, includes the winning information for winning a small hit, the probabilistic state is immediately terminated. By using the configuration that shifts to the latent state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to memorize the winning information of the first special symbol up to the maximum number (4) by the time the probability change state is set. ..

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb has different contents of each small hit type from the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, for example, the small hit type defined for the range of the small hit type counter value C5 is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the first embodiment described above, the third embodiment is not provided with the V winning device 650, and is a game in which a ball is passed through a specific area during a small hit game to obtain a big hit (per two types). Since it does not have a property, each small hit type defined in the small hit type 3 table 202bb is different in that the content of the big hit game set at the time of acquisition of two types is not associated with each other.

FIG. 113B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the time saving grant 3 table 202bc is set for each jackpot type with respect to the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 21 (d)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that the provisions of the time saving end conditions are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, among the time saving end conditions, "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. As the winning count end condition established based on the winning count, "1" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "10" is set for the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "50" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. It is specified to be set. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "wins once for the small hit A (the small hit to which is set)", and "small". The end condition is satisfied when either of the conditions of "winning the hit B (small hit set) 10 times" and "winning the small hit C (small hit set) 50 times" are satisfied. A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state a) is set.

When the jackpot type is jackpot B, among the time saving end conditions, "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the number of small hit winnings. As the winning count end condition established based on, "5" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "5" is set for the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "25" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. Is stipulated as. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times", "the small hit A (the small hit to which is set) is won 5 times", and "the small hit". The end condition is satisfied when either of the conditions of "winning the hit B (small hit set) 5 times" and "winning the small hit C (small hit set) 25 times" are satisfied. A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state b) is set.

When the jackpot type is jackpot D, among the time saving end conditions, "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and based on the number of small hit winnings. As a condition for ending the number of winnings, "20" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, and "80" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "the small hit A (the small hit to which is set) is won 20 times", and "small". A time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state c) is set in which the end condition is satisfied when any of the conditions of "winning the hit C (small hit to which is set) 80 times" is satisfied.

As described above, in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments, in the third embodiment, a plurality of different time-saving end conditions are set according to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, and a plurality of set time-saving end conditions are set. Since the time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions is satisfied, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

In addition, since the time saving end condition that is easy to be established and the establishment are different according to the time saving state (a to c) set according to the jackpot type, the time saving state is based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the time saving state. Since the case where the time saving state ends and the case where the time saving state ends based on the number of small hits won in the time saving state can be mixed and generated, the pattern in which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

In the third embodiment, the number of items set as the time saving end condition is different depending on the set time saving state. Specifically, in the time-saving states a and b, the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won is set, but in the time-saving state c, the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won is set. Is configured so that is not set.

With this configuration, even if the player grasps the type of the small hit game to be executed during the time saving state (the first symbol corresponding to the small hit type set for the winning small hit is stopped and displayed). Even if the player grasps the type of the small hit game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed, the game determines whether or not the type of the small hit game is set as the time saving end condition. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, the time saving end condition is set for all the small hit types (small hits A to C) that can be set. However, as a configuration other than this, for example, a small hit type set when a small hit is won is added (for example, small hits X to Z), and the time is shortened for the added small hit type. It may be configured so that the end condition is not set.

With this configuration, if a small hit is won during the reduced working hours state, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the end of the reduced working hours state is approaching (under the reduced working hours condition). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the reduced working hours end.

Further, in this case, the small hit type (for example, small hit A) in which the time saving end condition is set and the small hit type (for example, small hit X) in which the time saving end condition is not set are used to perform the small hit game. It is preferable to configure the operation contents to be the same (including an error that cannot be identified by the player). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the current small hit type according to the operation content during the small hit game.

Next, the contents of the opening scenario 3 table 202b in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202b. As shown in FIG. 114, the opening scenario 3 table 202b is different from the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described above in that the contents of the opening scenario defined corresponding to the small hit A to the small hit C are different. , The difference is that the contents of the opening scenario defined corresponding to the jackpot D are different, and the other elements are the same.

Here, the above-mentioned differences among the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202db will be described. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted. As described above, the third embodiment is a small hit game in which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened as a small hit game executed when a small hit is won (a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening is opened). Is configured to run. Further, in the third embodiment, even if the ball wins the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hit game, it is configured so that the two kinds of winning cannot be obtained.

Therefore, in the opening scenario defined corresponding to the small hits A to C of the opening scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation content for one round (1R) corresponding to the small hit game is specified. Further, as shown in FIG. 114, in the third embodiment, an open scenario is defined in which an error of a degree that is difficult for the player to identify is provided corresponding to the small hits A to C.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit A, the opening operation in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 seconds is executed, and the opening corresponding to the small hit B is performed. In the scenario, the opening operation in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 seconds is executed, and in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit C, the second variable winning device 1650 is second. Each opening scenario is defined so that the opening operation in which the opening time of the variable winning opening is 0.09 seconds is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the contents of the small hit game actually executed, while defining different opening scenarios for each small hit type. Can be done.

In the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the content of the small hit game to be executed, the second variable winning is made corresponding to each small hit type. Although the opening scenario in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the device 1650 is made different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify is specified, the period of the start interval of the small hit game (0.5 seconds) is also specified. ) And the period of the end interval (0.5 seconds) may be different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify. In addition, each time may be different so that the period of the opening scenario defined for each small hit type is the same.

In addition, among a plurality of small hit types, a specific small hit type is configured to specify an opening scenario different from other small hit types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). , It may be configured to make the player identify that a specific small hit type has been set, and in this case, it is different from other small hit types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). It is advisable to configure the time saving end condition to be set for the small hit type for which the opening scenario is defined. With this configuration, by grasping the content of the small hit game to be executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, the same opening scenario may be specified for a plurality of small hit types. In this case, depending on the small hit type, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the small hit game is being executed. It is good to configure so that different effects are executed. Here, as a predetermined condition set while the small hit game is being executed, for example, a ball wins a prize in the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hit game, or during the small hit game. It is preferable to set a condition that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period (during the predetermined period) during which the small hit game is being executed.

In addition, as the effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the small hit game, for example, an effect in which the type of sound generated when the ball passes (enters) the predetermined area is different, or a frame button is used. In addition to the effects of different sounds and lights based on the operation of 22, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform different effects.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26A), and the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba is added. It is different in that it is. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba. In this time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, with respect to various time saving end conditions set in the set time saving state, game information (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hits won) corresponding to various time saving end conditions, that is, , The value of the time saving medium counter 203k, the value of the small hit A counter 203m, the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and the information included in the time saving information update area 223g updated based on the time saving related command indicating the value of the small hit C counter. Based on this, it is for determining that the time saving state has passed for a certain period of time.

By referring to the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, the current time saving state can be largely classified. Then, by changing the effect mode according to the division, it is possible to roughly notify the player of the progress of the time saving state. In the third embodiment, the progress of the time saving state is determined in two stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to determine in three or more stages. .. In this case, for example, a plurality of threshold values may be defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, and the current progress may be determined based on the corresponding threshold values.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). In the third embodiment, the remaining time reduction number of times confirmation flag 223ba and the confirmation fluctuation flag 223bb are added to the above-mentioned second embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time reduction state has been determined, and is turned on when the number of changes of the special symbol until the end of the time reduction state is confirmed. It is set. That is, in the third embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, and the small hit is won during the time saving state. Since the winning count end condition, which is established when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, is set, it is possible to determine the remaining period until the time saving state ends in the entire period in which the time saving state is set. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

That is, for example, when a value of "100" is set as the end condition of the number of fluctuations and a value of "2" is set as the end condition of the number of winnings, the special symbol fluctuates 100 times or 2 per small hit. Since the time saving state ends when the time is won, the remaining period of the time saving state cannot be determined unless the period until the small hit is won twice. On the other hand, even when the above-mentioned time saving end condition is set, if the game in the time saving state progresses, the special symbol is changed 98 times, and the small hit is never won, the time saving state is reached. It is confirmed that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of is 2 times.

In this way, when the remaining period (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) until the end of the time saving state is determined, the time saving state is suddenly ended by executing the effect of notifying the player to that effect. The situation can be suppressed. Further, as in the third embodiment, when the time saving end condition has the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition, the remaining period until the end (special symbol remaining variation number) is determined. By executing the effect of notifying the player to that effect, it is possible to expect the player to win the small hit without giving a sense of danger that the time saving state will end.

The remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to on when it is determined in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) that the remaining time reduction number has been determined, and the effect setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122). (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is set to ON (FIG. 122S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is set (FIG. 122). S3357). As a result, the number of times the special symbol changes until the time saving state of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ends is displayed (see FIG. 109 (b)).

In the third embodiment, when the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the time saving state is determined, the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate that fact, but the player It may be configured to notify the remaining period of the time saving state with respect to the above. A confirmation flag and a special figure 2 remaining time reduction confirmation flag for indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations of the second special symbol until the end of the time reduction state are confirmed are provided, and the special figure 1 remaining time reduction confirmation flag is turned on. When set to, the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the special figure 2 remaining time reduction confirmation flag is set to on, the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed. You may.

With this configuration, for example, a game in which only the first special symbol is changed (lottery) and a game in which only the second special symbol is changed (lottery) are set separately. In the machine, it is possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol according to the game content actually executed (the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is actually performed).

The definite fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that the period from when the time saving state is set until the time saving end condition is satisfied at the shortest time is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, and is a special flag until the time saving end condition is satisfied. This is set to ON when the number of symbol fluctuations is 15 or more. The definite fluctuation flag 223bb is a value corresponding to the value of various counters indicating the time reduction end condition in the definite fluctuation determination process (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123). When it is determined that the minimum value of is 15 or more (S3653: Yes in FIG. 124), the display time saving command corresponding to the minimum value is set (S3654 in FIG. 124) and is set to ON (FIG. 124). S3655).

Then, when it is determined that the minimum value indicating the value of various counters indicating the time saving end condition is not 15 or more (S3653: No in FIG. 124), a display time saving command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (FIG. In S3656 of 124), when a plurality of pre-end conditions are satisfied (S3602 of FIG. 124) in the time saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 of FIG. 123), it is set to off (see S3608 of FIG. 123).

As a result, after the time reduction state is set, it becomes possible to notify the player of the period during which the time reduction end condition cannot be satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety that the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with peace of mind (without worrying about the end of the time saving state) during the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON by referring to the values of all the counters set corresponding to all the time saving end conditions set in the time saving state. However, it suffices if the player can be made to play the game in the time saving state with peace of mind. For example, it can be established in the current time saving state. A time saving state discriminating means for discriminating the time saving end condition is provided, and it is determined whether or not to set the definite fluctuation flag 223bb on by referring only to the value of the counter corresponding to the time saving ending condition determined by the time saving state discriminating means. However, a discriminating means for discriminating a time-saving end condition that cannot be satisfied in the current time-saving state is provided, and only the counter value corresponding to the time-saving end condition determined by the discriminating means is excluded. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON.

<Regarding the control process in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment>
In the control process in the third embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is changed to the timer interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 118) with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is changed. ), Instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning prize executed in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit control process is changed to the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 120) after the process 2 (see FIG. 96) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, detailed description of the content of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the contents of the timer interrupt process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 3. In the timer interrupt process 3, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above is replaced with the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43). The point of executing the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above, and the V entrance pass process (see FIG. 47) and the V pass process. The difference is that (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

When the timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above. Then, when the processing of S103 is completed, the special symbol variation processing 3 is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) (S174). Details of the special symbol variation processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119. Then, instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above is executed (S155). The details of the start winning process 2 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37), and then S110 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37). The process of S110, which is the same as the process of, is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S174) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S174). In this special symbol variation processing 3, the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the small hit start setting for the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the start of the small hit is set instead of the processing.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, unless the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: No), S251 to the same as the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment described above. The process of S255 is executed. The details of the processes of S251 to S255 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). ), The same processing of S206 to S210 as the processing of S206 to S210 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S220 are the same as the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Processing is executed. In the processing of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), a small hit opening scenario according to the small hit type set corresponding to the winning small hit is displayed. It is set by referring to the opening scenario 3 table 202b (S271). Next, the start of the small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set on (S273). After that, the time saving update process for small hits is executed (S274), and this process is terminated. The small hit time saving update process (S274) is executed in the small hit start setting process (FIGS. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same process as the hitting time reduction update process (FIG. 41, S405), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). The small hit control process 3 (S1555) is changed to the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is a process to be executed, and for the above-mentioned small hit control process (see FIG. 53), the processes related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j are deleted, and the target to be operated during the small hit game is a V winning device. The difference is that the second variable winning device 1650 is used instead of 650.

When the small hit control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same processes as those of S1701 to S1705 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above are executed, and in the process of S1705, the second variable winning opening is opened. When it is determined that the timing (timing to open the winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), S1706 is the same as the processing of S1706 of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 53) described above. The process is executed, and then this process is terminated. The processes S1701 to S1706 executed in the small hit control process 3 execute an operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small hit of the first embodiment described above is performed. Although the operation target is different from that of the control process (see FIG. 53), since the control contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the process of S1705, if the timing is not the second variable winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the same process as S1711 to S1715 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed. When it is determined in the process of S1715 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), the same process of S1720 as the process of S1720 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed, and then the process of S1720 is executed. This process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured so that a normal state and a time saving state can be set as a gaming state, and the period in which the normal state is set is provided in the left region. 1 A left-handed game is performed in which a ball is inserted into the entrance 64 to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed. If so, a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

The time saving state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, is a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, that is, a variation number ending condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol. Alternatively, it is continuously set until any of the winning count end conditions that are established based on the winning count that is won in the small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied.

Then, by making the content of the time saving end condition different according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is configured so that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing when the time saving state ends (the period during which the time saving state is continuously set). doing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In addition, even if a time-saving end condition is set that makes it difficult for the time-saving state to end, it is assumed that the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state early or the time-saving state is likely to end depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. However, since the reduced working hours can be continued for a long period of time depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is longer than that of the gaming machine in which the reduced working hours are set for a predetermined specific period. The game can be played while expecting it to continue.

<Regarding the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. In the third embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 121) and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is produced with respect to the above-described first embodiment. It differs in that it is changed to the setting process 3 (see FIG. 122), and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S2163 of FIG. 99) with respect to the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 of FIG. 56). The difference is that the process related to winning information (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is executed and the content of the process executed when a command related to time saving is received is changed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process of the first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 of FIG. 99) described above is executed. If the same process as any of the above is executed, and then in the process of S2215, if it is determined that the command received this time is a command related to time saving (S2215: Yes), then the contents of the time saving information update area 223g are displayed. Update and move to the process of S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a command related to time saving is received, the received command is stored as it is, instead of performing the process of changing the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above. The process is executed.

Then, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the time saving state. In the third embodiment as well, when a time saving-related command is received as in the first embodiment described above, a process of varying the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above is performed. It may be configured as.

Next, the process of the effect setting process 3 (S2871) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this effect setting process 3 (S2871), the time saving state is changed based on the progress of the time saving state (the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (the number of remaining fluctuations) and the number of fluctuations after the time saving state is set). The production mode of the production for suggesting the remaining period is set.

When the effect setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is in the reduced working hours state (S2902). .. If it is determined that the time is not shortened (S2902: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving state is (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read out (S3351), and the special symbol type (special figure 1) of this fluctuation (this fluctuation) is read. Alternatively, the lottery result is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by this fluctuation (S3353).

As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied (S3353: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the time reduction end is set (S3355), and this process is terminated. In the process of S3354, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S3354: No), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the number of remaining time reductions is set (S3357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S3356, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), the time reduction remaining period determination process described later is executed with reference to FIG. 123 (S3358). , End this process.

Next, the contents of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358). In this time saving remaining period determination process (S3358), the current time saving is performed according to the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, that is, the time saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110. A process for determining the situation and setting an effect mode based on the determination result is executed.

When the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358) is executed, first, the time saving remaining period is determined based on the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3601). .. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602), and if a plurality of remaining periods have not been reached (S3602: No), a definite fluctuation determination process is executed (S3063). , End this process. The content of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124, but in the state where the time reduction state is set, the time reduction end condition (values of various counters) set this time is determined. , When the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the process for determining the period during which the time saving state does not end (the number of special symbol changes) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604), and the definite variation flag 223bb is turned ON. If it is determined that it is not set (set to off) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is fixed, and if the number of remaining time reductions is not fixed, it is combined. A display time saving command indicating the mode is set (S3605), and this process is terminated. When the display time saving command indicating the coalescence mode is set in the process of S3605, the coalescence status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107 (b) is displayed.

This makes it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied, and at the same time, indicates that a plurality of time-saving end conditions have reached the point of being satisfied (that is, the time-saving state is long). It is possible to notify (that it is continuing).

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to on (S3604: Yes), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to off (S3608), and whether the above-mentioned remaining time reduction number is fixed. Move to the process of determining. If it is determined in the process of S3604 that the number of remaining time reductions is fixed, then information indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored in the time reduction information update area 223g (S3606), and the display time reduction indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored. A command is set (S3607), the remaining time reduction number fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063). In this definite fluctuation determination process (S3063), as described above, a command for determining a period during which the set time saving state cannot be completed and displaying that fact on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is issued. The process to set is executed. As a result, in a gaming machine having a game property (a game property having a plurality of time reduction end conditions) in which it is difficult to know when the time reduction state ends, the player can display the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 110). ), It is possible to grasp the period during which the game can be played with peace of mind.

When the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the definite variation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3651: No), the time is shortened. The values corresponding to the medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value thereof is extracted (S3652).

In the present embodiment, in the process of S3652, the values of the various counters described above in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are determined based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a counter that is variable in synchronization with various counters included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above, and is configured to make a determination based on the value of the counter. Is also good.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in this embodiment) that can be notified as a definite variation, and if it is determined that it is a condition value (15) or more (S3653). : Yes), then the display time saving command indicating the minimum value is set (S3654), the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3655), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player only when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, and thus the fixed fluctuation Only when the flag 223bb is set to ON, the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be set as an effect mode for the player to play the game with peace of mind. That is, for example, when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is one, the player is notified to that effect, and the player is prevented from giving anxiety. be able to.

In this embodiment, when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, an effect mode for notifying the player to that effect is set. However, the content is not limited to this, and the content to be notified to the player may be different based on the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, when the player performs a specific operation. May be configured to notify the fact that the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is less than the predetermined number of times, or the player performs a special operation. In this case, it may be configured to notify only when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of times the special symbol changes) is a special number of times larger than the predetermined number of times.

If it is determined in the processing of S3653 that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), a display time saving command corresponding to the updated time saving information is set (S3656), and this processing is terminated. do. If it is determined that the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON in the processing of S3651 (S3651: Yes), the processing of S3652 and S3653 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3654.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 153. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel) with respect to the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is configured.

Then, as the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the second special symbol is drawn (variable) more often). The time saving state (that is, the time saving state) and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol are longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The state) and the game state are configured to be configurable, and a game state having a different degree of advantage to the player is provided in the time saving state.

Further, it is different in that different effects (time reduction number display) are executed corresponding to the plurality of time reduction states described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment will be described as being different from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 125 is a front view of the gaming board 13 used in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-handed region is different. In this figure, the ball launched by the left-handed game flows down the left-handed (left side) area along the arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is the game board. It is configured to flow down the right-handed (right side) region along the arrow PA2 shown in 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, in the present embodiment, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first starting port 64 has an opening on the upper surface having a size capable of allowing one game ball to enter, and two nails are slightly larger than the diameter of the two game balls at the opposite positions of the opening. They are arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game game to the left first starting port 64 (for example, the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64 when 250 game balls are launched). It is configured so that the ratio of) can be changed.

Further, in the right side region of the variable display unit 80, a second start port 640 and a first start port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as a right side first start port 64) are arranged in parallel vertically. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game plate 60 into which one game ball can enter. An ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is arranged on the front surface side (opposing surface) of the opening. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is pivotally supported on one end side so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played for a predetermined number of times (once or twice in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction (a direction away from the opening) so that the can be guided to the second starting port 640. The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol hits), the opening of the second starting port 640a is maintained in a closed state (standing up in the vertical direction).

Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640. When the ordinary electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. With this configuration, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure the game ball in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 64.

In this embodiment, when the gaming states are the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time-saving gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit is high. Further, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the player fires the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the gaming ball is won in the first starting port 64 on the left side. Perform the game to make it. Then, the third symbol becomes a hit, and the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit increases when the game shifts to the probabilistic game or the time-saving game. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to be a hit. Has been done. Therefore, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state is high, it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, while the winning in the right first starting port 64 is reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game (low probability game state). It is configured so that a jackpot (which is difficult to give a probabilistic game) is given.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big hit is made, a big hit is given so that a probabilistic game is easily given after the big hit game at 100%. That is, the person who wins the second special symbol is more likely to be given the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is opened, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more and less than two game balls. It is an interval of. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the right first starting port 64 due to the nails arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured at intervals (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when winning a prize in the right first starting port 64, it is configured so as to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state of standing upright in the vertical direction).

In the present embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, the right first starting port 64 is not won, but the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the right first starting. The interval may be set so that the opening 64 can be won, and the ratio may be reduced so that the right first starting port 64 can be won.

Next, the contents of the effect mode (effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device) in the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. First, with reference to FIG. 126, a display screen at the time of entering the time saving state, which is displayed corresponding to the set type of the time saving state, will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, although the details will be described later, it is possible to change (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), and further, it is set in the time saving state. By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol different, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the time reduction state, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol are easily executed. It is possible to set the second time saving state, in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation of.

Then, only the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win the small hit, and when the small hit is won, the two kinds of hits can be obtained as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, by fluctuating (lottery) a plurality of special symbols at the same time (in parallel), a specific lottery result is obtained in one special symbol lottery so that a lottery result advantageous to the player does not occur at the same time. When (for example, a hit) is won, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a loss.

Further, when the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the time saving corresponds to the fluctuation start timing of each special symbol executed at the same time (side by side). It is configured so that the number of times the state is set (the number of time reductions) is subtracted.

That is, when the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, the time-saving game is likely to be performed according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set as the time-saving end condition, but the second special symbol When the second time-saving state is set, which mainly fluctuates, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped based on the small hit winning as described above, so that it is set as the time-saving end condition. There is a problem that there is a big difference between the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of games actually executed.

Specifically, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times as the time reduction end condition and the first time reduction state is set, the first special symbol If only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 100 times), the first time is shortened. It is possible to execute the special symbol change about 100 times during the state (the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped due to the lottery result of the first special symbol).

On the other hand, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times as the time saving end condition and the second time saving state is set, the second special symbol is set. (Lottery) is configured so that only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (a long time (longer time than the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), and In the second special symbol lottery, if it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of approximately 1/1 (probability excluding only the probability of winning a big hit), the small hit will be won in the second special symbol lottery. Since the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped every time, the number of fluctuations actually executed is about 50 times.

In this way, even when the same condition is set as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed while the time saving state is set (forced stop) in the type of the time saving game to be executed. The number of fluctuations without) will be different. In such a case, if the player is displayed with the actually set number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) regardless of the type of time reduction state that is set, the time reduction state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem that it would be provided.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) to be notified to the player on the display screen (time reduction state entry screen) when the time reduction state is set according to the type of the time reduction state to be set. Is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to suppress the provision of a time saving state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the number of time reductions to be notified to the player (the number of remaining time reductions) is displayed differently according to the type of the set time reduction state, the remaining time reduction to be notified to the player is obtained. When the number of times and the actual number of times of remaining time reduction are different, the process of correcting the number of times of remaining time reduction notified to the player is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, for example, in a state where the first time saving state is set, by temporarily interrupting the game during the game, the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times, or the second time saving state can be set. Even if the player wins a lottery result other than a big hit or a small hit in the lottery result of the second special symbol and the first special symbol that is changing cannot be forcibly stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to synchronize the reported number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving.

Specifically, when the above-mentioned second time saving state (time saving A) is set, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is actually as shown in FIG. 126 (a). Even if it is set as the time saving end condition to reach 100 times, "50" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times that the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped by the small hit winning, and the first When the time saving state (time saving B) is set, "100" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 as shown in FIG. 126 (b).

As a result, when the second time reduction state is set, it is possible to make the player think that the time reduction end condition in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50 times is set. Then, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated (subtracted) by the forced stop of the special symbol, the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) according to the update (subtraction). However, since it is configured to update (subtract) the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 according to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is continuously set. The period (number of special symbol changes) can be updated (subtracted) without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), when the time saving state is set, the reserved symbol corresponding to each special symbol is not displayed in the sub display area Ds. doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from detecting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that is actually executed while the time saving state is set by the digestion mode of the reserved symbol. In the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. The area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm7 are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member provided on the game board 13 is not the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification means may be provided to notify the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in a light emitting mode by using a part thereof. Further, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the correction effect for correcting the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed on the display screen (time reduction state setting screen) when the time reduction state is set is different depending on the type of the set game state. (See FIG. 126). In this case, for example, the game is temporarily interrupted in the state where the first time saving state is set, and the second special symbol is executed a plurality of times, or the second special symbol is executed in the state where the second time saving state is set. When the special symbol is changed under unusual conditions, such as when the lottery result is out of order and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, the reported number of remaining time reductions and the actual remaining time reduction There was a risk that the number of times would be different.

In such a case, for example, in a time saving game in which the time saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped. That is, when the actual number of remaining time reductions becomes larger than the number of times corresponding to the reported number of remaining time reductions, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the third symbol is temporarily displayed during the variable display. It is stopped, and the same production mode as when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in the main display area Dm (a concept including an error that is difficult for the player to notice) is displayed. That is, during the variation display of the second special symbol, a pseudo stop effect that makes the player think that the variation of the special symbol has stopped is executed, and the display mode of the remaining time reduction display area Dm10 corresponds to the pseudo stop effect. (Remaining time reduction for notification) is updated (subtracted), and the correction effect is executed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 127 (b).

With this configuration, the reported number of remaining time reductions can be synchronized with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, although detailed description will be described later, this correction effect is executed only when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is a predetermined time or more (30 seconds or more). It is configured to be done. Therefore, even if the pseudo stop effect is executed during the fluctuation period of one special symbol, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the actual number of remaining time reductions is less than the number of times corresponding to the reported number of remaining time reductions, the display of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. An effect (multiple variation fusion effect) for updating (subtracting) the mode (remaining time reduction for notification) may be executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from the first embodiment described above. It's different.

FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number 4 table 202ca, a first random number selection 4 table 202cc, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small hit type selection 4 table 202ce. Has been done.

First, the random number 4 table 202ca per first will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table 202ca. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first random number 4 table 202ca defines a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol, which has been described above. The first is different from the random number table 202a (see FIG. 20A) in that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2, and other than that. It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b). FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 has a range determined as a small hit from "5 to 989" to "5 to 998" with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. The difference is that it is changed to ", and other than that, it is the same. That is, in the lottery of the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of 994/1000.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130 (a), the first type selection 4 table 202cc will be described. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 4 table 202cc. The first hit type selection 4 table 202cc is different from the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21 (a)) described above, in place of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 The table 202cc1 is different in that the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202cb2 is provided in place of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc1. The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202bc1 is based on the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21 (b)) and shows the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and after the jackpot game is completed. It is different from the set game state.

Specifically, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the time saving state (time saving A) is set and the jackpot B is selected. Is executed as a jackpot game for 5 rounds, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set. Then, when the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the normal state is set. That is, as the jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) are set as the time saving states that can be set after the jackpot game is completed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed as the game in the time reduction state, and when the time reduction B is set, the time reduction state is in progress. The lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed as the game of. In this way, it is possible to set different game specifications in the time saving state by making the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol mainly executed during the time saving state different according to the set time saving state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having game specifications equal to or greater than the types of game states that can be set, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc2 will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (c). FIG. 130 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202 kb2. The special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202bc2 is defined with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21 (c)) corresponding to a possible value of the first hit type counter value C2. The difference is that the types of jackpot types to be played are increased, the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the jackpot D is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the first hit type counter value C2, and the jackpot E is defined in the range of "70 to 99". Then, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, after that, the time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when the jackpot E is selected, the jackpot E is selected. As a game, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed, and then a time saving state (time saving B) is set.

That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed, and 70% of them are set to the time saving A and 30% are set to the time saving B. .. Here, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the time saving game mainly by the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed again. On the other hand, when the time saving B is set, the time saving game mainly by lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a left-handed player is hit in a normal state or a probability change state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a 58% ratio (big hits B and D) is an advantageous latent state. It is configured to move to. Then, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits EG). Therefore, once the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640 by hitting right. It is easy to execute, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can play the game for one purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal state, and a time saving A for determining the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state. At least the fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 and the fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B are specified. Next, the specific contents of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. The normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 has a random number value (variation time) for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type (hit / fail determination result). The variable type counter value (counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a hit (big hit) is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and the normal reach (normal reach). 20 seconds) is associated, and super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 198".

On the other hand, in the case of a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a variation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. The range of "71-120" is associated with the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds), and the range of "121-170" is associated with the deviation normal reach (20 seconds). Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "171 to 198" is associated.

Further, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (a), the details of the variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A will be described. FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A. The variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A is referred to in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving A is set in the time saving state. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a jackpot ultra-short fluctuation (1 second) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ) Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the deviation of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), the deviation ultra-long fluctuation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is.

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. For the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small hit short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 For the deviation of the special symbol (special drawing 2), the deviation short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time saving B will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time saving B. The variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time saving B is referred to in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving B is set in the time saving state. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has a jackpot short variation (5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Are specified in association with each other. Further, for the deviation of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), the deviation ultra-long fluctuation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is.

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot ultra-short fluctuation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by associating the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For the deviation of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the deviation long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce will be described. The small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 69". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game having the same open pattern as the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 70 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 70% (70/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "70 to 99", "small hit B" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 30 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 30% (30/100).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 151. The fourth embodiment is largely characterized in that the lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be duplicated and executed for each of the above-described embodiments. It's different.

Then, in the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol (first time saving state) and the lottery of the first special symbol. The difference is that the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the time saving state (second time saving state), which is executed more frequently, can be set.

In the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state which is the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the first time saving state and the second time saving state which is more advantageous than the first time saving state can be set. , It is possible to provide a plurality of gaming states having different advantageous stages to a player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S194), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194). The special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194) makes various determinations and decisions based on the counter values acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. In order to enable the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode determined by the predetermined control, or to stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Control is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203d is on) (S7001), and the jackpot is in progress (during the jackpot). When it is determined (S7001: Yes) that the flag 203d is on), it is not necessary to set the lottery of the special symbol, the stop of the variation display, and the like, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot medium flag 203d is off) (S7001: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether or not the small hit medium flag 203g is on). Is determined (S7002). In the process of S7002, if it is determined that a small hit is in progress (the small hit medium flag 203 g is on) (S7002: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit medium flag 203 g is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S7003).

If it is determined in the process of S7003 that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (S7003: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to the process of S7006. Here, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the processing for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, when the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol in the variable display with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is performed. Will be executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, in the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that the above conditions are met, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed (S7004), and the process shifts to S7006. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139.

In the process of S7006 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S7004) or the first special symbol change stop process (S7005) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change. (S7006), if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7008), and this process is terminated. Similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008) is the second special symbol when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. This is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7006, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7006: No), the second is provided on the condition that a new starting prize is detected in the second entrance 640. A second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery is executed (S7007), and this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation (lottery) control of the first special symbol and the fluctuation (lottery) control of the second special symbol are configured to be executed independently. .. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the change of the second special symbol (lottery) regardless of whether or not the change of the first special symbol (lottery) is executed. Therefore, the lottery of special symbols can be executed a plurality of times in a short time, and the game efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, a big hit or a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and while a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) based on the winning is executed, a new special symbol is used. It is configured so that fluctuations (lottery) do not start. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the complicated act of predicting the lottery result of the special symbol while performing the winning game, and the player can pay attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the stop display is performed in a display mode indicating that one of the plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has won the jackpot. When this is done, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. As a result, a state in which the special symbol fluctuates during the jackpot game, or a state in which one special symbol wins the jackpot (during the jackpot game) and the other special symbol wins the jackpot may occur. Since it can be eliminated, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation start processing and the special symbol fluctuation stop processing are not executed during either the big hit game or the small hit game, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, it may be configured not to execute the fluctuation start processing of the special symbol and the fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol only during the big hit game, or the fluctuation start processing of the special symbol during the big hit game or the small hit game. , The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute more fluctuations (lottery) of special symbols, so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S7004).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S). It is determined whether N1) is a value larger than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is larger than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted by 1. Then (S7103), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set (S7104).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the processing of S7104 is completed, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S7105 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S7106). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the game state being played.

When the process of S7106 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (FIGS. 138 and S7107). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) includes the result of determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S7108). Although the details of this game state update process (FIG. 138, S7108) will be described later, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the values of various counters (time reduction / medium counter 203k) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process to do. When the process of S7108 is completed, this process is completed. A detailed description of this game state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

On the other hand, in the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of random numbers that are big hits or small hits defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match. The determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S7202 is a big hit (S7203), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S7203: Yes), the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. It is set (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S7205). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value according to the current gaming state (for example, in the normal state). If there is 0, if the time is shortened, 1) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S7203: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208), and then , End this process. In this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured so that the small hit is not won. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery is not a big hit in the processing of S7203 (S7203: No), the lottery result is missed. It is configured to determine that there is, and the process of S7208 is executed. However, for example, when the process of the first special symbol is configured to win a small hit, it is not a big hit in the process of S7203. When the determination is made (S7203: No), it may be determined whether or not the player has won the small hit, and the process may be executed according to the determination result. In this case, in contrast to the special figure 2 deviation processing (see S7708 in FIG. 145), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, a process different only in that the first special symbol is targeted instead of the second special symbol is executed. Just do it.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot of a special symbol is set (S7301). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7204 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139).

When it is determined in the process of S7301 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S7301: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S7201 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). Based on the value of the per-type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined (selected) from the first per-type selection 4 table 202cc (see FIG. 130) (S7302), and the process proceeds to S7303.

On the other hand, in the process of S7301 when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7304), and the process proceeds to S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state that can be set as the gaming state is the time saving A (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the time saving B (second time saving) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A. Since the state) and the game state can be set, the game states that can be set are configured to be three types: normal state, time saving A, and time saving B, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k and the time saving. The current gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the state storage area 203cd.

Specifically, when the value of the time-saving and medium-time counter 203k is 0, it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, and when the value of the time-saving and medium-time counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current game is played. It is determined that the state is a time saving state. Then, when the information indicating the time saving A (for example, the information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving A (first time saving state). If it is determined that there is, and information indicating the time saving B (for example, information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving B (second time saving). State) is determined.

The configuration for determining the current gaming state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area that temporarily stores the currently set game state while constantly updating it is provided, and the current game state is determined using the information stored in the game state storage area. You may. With such a configuration, the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, but the current gaming state can be reliably determined. Further, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, four types), the current game state can be easily determined.

In the processing of S7305, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state) (7305), and then based on the selected fluctuation pattern. , Special figure 1 variable pattern command is set (S7306).

When the processing of S7306 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S7307). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S7308), and ends this process.

Next, the game state update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138), will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S7108). In this game state update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the update of the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the 4th embodiment, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated so as to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. With this configuration, even when a process that can independently execute the fluctuation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used (start of fluctuation of the special symbol). Even if the order and the order of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol are interchanged), the time saving state can be appropriately set according to the predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the time reduction state (S7401). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time reduction state, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped and the present End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203k is set to 1. After subtracting (S7402) and setting the remaining working hours command indicating the value of the working hours counter 203k (S7403), this process ends.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k from the remaining time reduction number command, and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, since the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the time saving information update area 223g according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it synchronizes with the value of the time saving medium counter 203k of the main control device 110. You can update the value while letting it.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the first special symbol is stopped by a combination of the processing of stopping the first special symbol when the fluctuation time elapses and the first special symbol is stopped by the combination of the symbols indicating the jackpot, the first special symbol is changing. A process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol with a combination of symbols indicating the deviation is executed.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S7501), and when it is determined that it is the end timing (S7501). S7501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S7502). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to on for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to on (S7503), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203cc has been turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S7505).

When the processing of S7505 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), the jackpot flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203k are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to on (S7508), the jackpot middle flag 203d is set to on (S7509), and the process proceeds to S7510.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7502, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the processing of S7503 to S7509 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (stop display) is set (S7510). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S7511), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S7501, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S7501: No). S7512), this process is terminated. During the period during which the process of S7512 is being executed, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed (S7501: Yes), the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. The process of stopping the fluctuation display (S7503 to S7511) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S7502: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display (S7503, S7504) is executed.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 142) is based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). ), The jackpot scenario is set in the process of S7506. For example, the jackpot scenario is stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) using the opening period of the jackpot game. A jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506 based on the game state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (the other) is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. , Not limited to this, for example, when the stop symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol, that is, a combination of stop symbols indicating that a small hit has been won. The other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be configured to be forcibly stopped at the off symbol, or at the time when the small hit symbol of the one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the other symbol is stopped. The variation display of the symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be restarted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the above-described example, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific stop symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) indicating a hit, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is stopped or provisionally. Although the configuration for stopping has been described, other configurations may be used as long as the winning game of both players is not executed at the same time. Even if the symbol is displayed as stopped, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is continued without being stopped or temporarily stopped, and while the hit game (for example, the jackpot game) based on one special symbol is being executed, the other special symbol is displayed. When a stop symbol indicating a hit (for example, a jackpot symbol) is displayed as a stop, the execution of a hit game (for example, a jackpot game) based on the other special symbol is waited until one of the hit games is completed (postponed). ) May be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols, and at the same time, a plurality of winning games occur at the same time, providing a game that is difficult to understand. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, since it is possible to start another winning game in succession after one winning game is completed, it is possible to continuously provide a privilege (winning game) that is advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. Can be made to.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, the game is that the jackpot is won in the other special symbol (the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by using the effect (hit effect) executed during one of the hit games. It is preferable to configure it so as to notify the person. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one hit game is not a hit (it is a miss), the winning effect being executed is used so as not to notify that it is a miss. good. As a result, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result in which no new privilege is given to the player, the effect for the currently given privilege is given priority to the player. , It is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and as a result of the lottery, one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a hit (small hit, big hit). At that time, control is executed to forcibly remove the fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol, but as another configuration, for example, the lottery result of one special symbol is won (small hit). , Big hit) (when the change of the special symbol whose lottery result is a hit is started), in the lottery of the other special symbol executed after that, the forced lottery excluding the winning lottery result (Determination using a special table in which deviations are specified for the entire range of the acquired random number counter value C1 per first) may be executed.

With this configuration, even if the lottery of a plurality of special symbols is executed independently, it is possible to prevent the plurality of winning games from being executed at the same time. In addition, instead of the timing when the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is set according to the timing when the special symbol is drawn (the start timing of the fluctuation in which the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, since forced disconnection control can be performed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the effect content executed during the variable display of the other special symbol and the lottery result of the other special symbol. can.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S7007).

In the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to on (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (S7607), and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is stopped and displayed at the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot). This is a flag that is set to turn on while displaying the stop display of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is turned on in the processing of S7601, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S7602 to S7606 for setting the fluctuation start. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol from starting to fluctuate again within the same process. can. In the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) of FIG. 137, after the variation processing related to the first special symbol is executed, the variation processing related to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is configured to be executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is used. For example, in the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) of FIG. 137, after executing the variation processing related to the second special symbol, When the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag (the target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) is replaced with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc. It may be configured to use the flag).

Further, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute fluctuations (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the lottery result of one special symbol is won. In the case of showing, it is preferable to specify the variation processing of each special symbol (special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 137)) so that the variation processing for the special symbol which is advantageous for the player is executed first. As a result, for example, when a hold storage function (hold storage means) is provided in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the change of the special symbol is started at the same time (within the same process) after the jackpot game is completed, the player It is possible to preferentially handle the lottery result of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a disadvantageous game.

Specifically, for example, the first special symbol lottery in which it is easy to give a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, per 16 rounds) and the second special symbol lottery in which it is difficult to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In a gaming machine that can independently execute a special symbol lottery, a storage means that can store up to a plurality (for example, 4) of the right to execute each special symbol lottery is provided, and after the jackpot game is completed. Etc., when the lottery of each special symbol is performed at the same time (same process) and the lottery result of each special symbol shows a win with the same fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds). By configuring the process related to the first special symbol to be executed with priority, the winning game of the first special symbol (a privilege advantageous to the player) is given regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7601, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S7601: No), the second entrance 640 is used. It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected (S7602). If the winning (winning) to the second entry port 640 is detected (S7602: Yes), then the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small The second special symbol jackpot determination for acquiring each value of the hit type counter C5 and storing it in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S7603) and executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. The process is executed (S7604). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the processing of S7604 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S7603. Execute (S7605). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146. After the process of S7605 is completed, the game state update process (see FIG. 141) described above is executed (S7606), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S7602, if it is determined that the winning of the second ball opening 1640 is not detected (S7602: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be independently (parallel) and can be changed (lottery), and the special symbol is changed. It is configured to execute a process of updating the game state (a process of subtracting the number of time reductions) when the (lottery) is executed. That is, when the process of changing (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (within the same process) is executed while the time reduction state is set, the number of time reductions is subtracted by two. Will be.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are independently (parallel) changed (lottery) is used, but in the third symbol display device 81, one special symbol is used according to the game state. Is used as the main special symbol, and is configured to perform an effect that makes it appear as if a game using only the main special symbol is being performed (see FIG. 126), providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. However, even when the variable display emphasizing only the main special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this way, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are internally used. Since the number of time reductions is subtracted due to the change (lottery) of the special symbol), there is a contradiction between the display mode of the number of time reductions and the update status of the game state (internal number of time reductions). Alternatively, there is a problem that the updated content of the display mode of the reduced number of times is inconsistent with the effect content of the variable display in which only the main special symbol is emphasized.

The details of such a problem will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions for display (number of remaining time reductions) is updated according to the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the main special symbol. When display control is performed and there is a difference between the number of time reductions on the display and the actual number of time reductions, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the main special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more). When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process of correcting the display time reduction number is executed so as to fill the difference between the display time reduction number and the actual time reduction number. ..

With this configuration, the player simply plays the game while paying attention to the effect executed in response to the main special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81, and an appropriate time saving situation (remaining time saving). The number of times) can be grasped, and an easy-to-understand game can be played.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139) is executed. The difference from (see) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, the process of S7702 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the first random number 4 table 202ca. The only difference between these processes is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area). The same control as the process (see FIG. 137) is performed.

When the processing of S7702 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S7703), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S7703: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a big hit. The processing of S7704 to S7707 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes S7704 to S7707, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137), the same process as each process of S7204 to S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot is executed. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S7703: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. Special Figure 2 Off-axis variation processing is executed (S7708), and this processing is terminated. Next, the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S7708).

In the special figure 2 deviation processing (S7708), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S7702 of FIG. 144 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801), and if the lottery result is a small hit. (S7801: Yes), the small hit flag 203cc is set to on (S7802), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S7803). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7801 that the lottery result is out of order (S7801: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7805), and then This process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the special symbol reservation ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S7902). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7704 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144) described above.

In the process of S7902, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S7902: Yes), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is displayed. Read (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144) described above, the first hit type selection 4 table 202 bb (see FIG. 131 (a)). ) To determine the jackpot type (S7904).

When the processing of S7904 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S7906). Then, the process proceeds to S7908.

On the other hand, in the process of S7902, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S7902: No), the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907) is executed, and the process proceeds to S7908. Transition.

In the process of S7908, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7908). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S7909), and then ends this process.

Next, the special FIG. 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8001). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is on (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134) (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S8004), and the variation of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Select a pattern (S8005). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S8006), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8001, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd corresponding to the current gaming state (S8001: No) (See FIGS. 131 to 133) is read (S8007), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S8008). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S8009), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S8103). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8105). The process proceeds to S8106.

Next, the processing after S8106 differs from the above-mentioned processing after S7505 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 140 and S7005) in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special drawing. 2 It differs in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8101 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S8101: No). S8102), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the second special symbol (S8103: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S8104), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S8104), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 detachment stop process (S8104).

In the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S8203).

When the processing of S8203 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S8204). After that, the small hit flag 203cc is set to off (S8205), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to on (S8207).

When the processing of S8207 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S8208). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37, is stopped to fluctuate with a small hit symbol (S8209), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201 when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S8201: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S8210). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is disengaged and stopped fluctuating at the symbol (S8211), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). The jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed at the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game, with respect to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52) (see S1504 in FIG. 52). The difference is that the contents of the game state after the jackpot game is set) are different. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since there are differences in the configuration of the game board 13 and the main control contents between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the detailed operation contents may differ during the jackpot. Even in such cases, it is assumed that the processing contents are the same, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed. That is, the same process as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed during the period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the current end timing of the ending effect is (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot C (S1691).

In the processing of S1691, the current jackpot type is based on the information stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area that temporarily stores the currently executed jackpot type. To determine.

In the processing of S1691, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot C (any of jackpot A, B, D) (S1691: No), that is, after the end of the current jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game). ), Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state is set so that the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or B and jackpot D. The process of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time saving state (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player or a time saving state (second time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time saving state. ..

In the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot D (S1692: No), the information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S1693), and the process proceeds to S1694. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S1692, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S1692: Yes), the information indicating the time saving B state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694. Transition.

When the time saving A state is set, that is, when the jackpot types this time are jackpots A and B, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state. In addition, the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A (see FIG. 133 (a)) is referred to, and the time saving game in which the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is more likely to be executed than the variation of the first special symbol (lottery). When executed and the time saving B state is set, that is, when the jackpot type this time is jackpot D, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time saving state. , The variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B (see FIG. 134 (b)) is referred to, and the time saving game is executed in which the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is easier to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol (lottery). Will be done.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state is provided according to the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is provided. By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol different depending on the jackpot type for which the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state (time reduction A) in which the second special symbol becomes the main special symbol. ) And the time saving state (time saving B) in which the first special symbol becomes the main special symbol can be set. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state set as the gaming state, the time saving state on the disadvantageous side of the player (time saving B) and the time saving state on the advantageous side of the player (time saving A) ) And can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, it is possible to set a game state having a different degree of advantage simply by making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol different, so it is necessary to use a special configuration for making the degree of advantage different. Therefore, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S1693 or S1695, next, 100 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k (S1694), and a status command for notifying the set gaming state to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1696). ). After that, the same processes of S1617 and S1618 as the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) can be set, and 100 is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k regardless of which time saving state is set. It is configured to do. That is, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, only the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a time saving state in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are set may be set.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the same time saving end condition (100 for the value of the time saving medium counter 203k) is set regardless of the set type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B). However, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of the set time saving state, and it is disadvantageous for the advantageous player when the time saving state in which the time saving game is performed which is advantageous for the player is set. It may be configured so that the time saving end condition which is hard to be established is set as compared with the case where the time saving state in which the time saving game is performed is set.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 4 (S1595). The small hit control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) is a part of the process executed at the opening timing of the V winning opening with respect to the small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that is deleted, and the same processing is executed except for that. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit control process 4 (S1595 of FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same processes of S1701 to S1706 as the above-mentioned small hit control process (see S1505 of FIG. 53) are executed, and when the process of S1706 is completed. , S1707 and S1708 are skipped, the processes of S1709 and S1710 are executed, and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the current timing is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the same processing of S1711 to S1721 as the processing of the small hit control processing (S1505 of FIG. 53) described above is performed. Execute and end this process.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation configuration). ) And one type that wins a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and one type that wins a small hit by a special symbol lottery and wins a big hit when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. It is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that it has a configuration (so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed configuration) in which the above can be performed.

Then, in the gaming state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the time saving state (time saving A) in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is mainly executed. ) And can be set by changing the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in the simultaneous fluctuation.

Further, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol, and the time saving state in which the time saving A is set described above is more game than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. It is configured to be in a game state that is advantageous to the person. Further, in the time saving state in which the time saving B is set, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is configured to be larger than in the normal state.

That is, the above-mentioned simultaneous fluctuation configuration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned one-kind and two-kind mixed configuration, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol in the time-saving state is made different according to the jackpot type. By configuring the above, it is possible to execute a time-saving game in which a large number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed and a time-saving game in which a large number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed.

In addition, by configuring the second special symbol to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol (including a configuration in which a small hit lottery is not performed in the first special symbol), a time-saving game in a time-saving state. , An advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player by aiming at both one type and two types (a time saving game that causes a lot of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol) and a disadvantageous time saving that aims at only one type. It is possible to set a state (a time-saving game in which a large number of changes (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed). Further, even when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, it is advantageous for a conventional gaming machine having a 1-type / 2-type mixed configuration in which only a gaming state (time saving state) in which it is easier to obtain two types of hits than in a normal state can be set as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set a plurality of game states at different stages and provide various games to the player, and it is possible to provide a game rich in interest.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the fourth embodiment, lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be duplicated and executed for each of the above-described embodiments (so-called simultaneous variation configuration). ) Is a big difference.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) is mainly executed and the time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is mainly executed (lottery) are mainly executed. The state (time reduction A) can be set, and the number of time reductions (number of time reductions on the display) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed according to the set time reduction state. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to display the number of time reductions corresponding to the number of fluctuation effects (the number of fluctuations of the main special symbol) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 129 (b)), and win the small win in the lottery of the second special symbol. In that case (when the small hit symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol indicating the deviation.

Since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit at a rate of 994/1000 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the number of time reductions is set in the gaming state in which the time reduction A is set. Even if 100 times is set, the fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can be executed only about 50 times.

Therefore, when the time reduction A is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display 50 times as the display time reduction number, and the fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) is performed. ) Is executed, the display time reduction count is updated (subtracted). As a result, the number of time reductions is actually set to 100 times, and the number of time reductions is as if the player does not notice that the number of time reductions is subtracted in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is forcibly stopped. It is possible to make people think that 50 times have been set, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned time saving number display is performed, for example, when the second special symbol is won by lottery, or when the hold memory of the first special symbol is lost and a new change of the first special symbol is started. When the first special symbol does not change at the time when the small hit of the second special symbol is won (when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, at the timing when the change of the second special symbol is stopped. If a situation occurs in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be stopped, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state becomes larger than the number of times of display time saving. , When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the fluctuation of the second special symbol or when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not performed and a new fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the second Since the first special symbol is changed regardless of the change of the special symbol, the number of changes of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state is less than the number of times of display time saving. Problems occur.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the display time reduction number and the actual time reduction number, the time reduction number correction effect for correcting the error is executed. (See FIG. 127). As a result, the time saving state ends with an error between the number of fluctuations of the main special symbol executed during the time saving state set this time (the remaining number of times executed during the time saving state) and the number of times of display time saving. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in order to update the display time reduction count according to the fluctuation of the main special symbol executed during the time reduction state, the player pays attention to the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time reduction count. You can play the game in a short time with peace of mind.

As the above-mentioned correction effect of the number of time reductions, in the subtraction correction effect executed when the number of time reductions for display is larger than the actual number of time reductions, the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is set for a predetermined time (for example). , 30 seconds) or more, and if the fluctuation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-variation stop and pseudo-variation stop) that makes one special symbol fluctuation appear as multiple special symbol fluctuations. The effect of updating (subtracting) the number of display time reductions is executed when the fluctuation is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a pseudo manner or when the fluctuation is restarted from the temporarily stopped state. Will be done. As a result, the number of display time reductions can be subtracted without discomfort during one special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the addition correction effect executed when the number of display time reductions is less than the actual number of time reductions, is the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? Is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, an additional display is executed on the display screen to indicate that the number of display time reductions is added, and the display time reduction number is added. good. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the number of time reductions has been added on the way.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the same time reduction number is set, the displayed time reduction number is set differently according to the set time reduction state, so that the player can be set. It is possible to play a game in a short time state without giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the number of time reductions to be displayed in advance is different according to the set time reduction state, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the effect of correcting the time reduction number for display during the time reduction state, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the correction effect for correcting the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state is not limited to the above-mentioned ones. By displaying the item on the display screen, a plurality of display time reduction times may be subtracted in one main special symbol change, or a number less than 50 may be displayed in advance as the display time reduction number. , The execution frequency of the subtraction correction effect may be extremely reduced.

In addition, the effect mode of the addition correction effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, after the display time reduction number of times is "1 time", "? May be configured so that the player does not know, or when it is known in advance that the lottery for the main special symbol change has been won in succession, a plurality of main special symbol changes can be combined into one main. It is configured to make a pseudo fluctuation so that it looks like a special symbol fluctuation, and even though the main special symbol fluctuation is actually executed twice, the display time reduction number is subtracted only once. You may.

Further, even when there is no error between the number of display time reductions and the actual number of time reductions, the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect may be intentionally executed. As a result, various effects can be performed during the time saving state, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired of.

Among the contents of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, the differences from the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. do. First, the contents of the effect setting process 4 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 4 (S2891).

The effect setting process 4 (S2891) is a part of the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 104) of the second embodiment described above with respect to the effect setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63). (Refer to S2851 in It differs in that it added a process to correct the number of times of use.

When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as the above-mentioned effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the above-mentioned effect setting process is executed. The same process of S3301 as in 2 (see S2851 of FIG. 104) is executed. In the process of S3301, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time saving state is set, the first special When the symbol variation is completed, the same processes of S3306 to S3308 as in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) are executed, and then the display time reduction number correction process is executed (S3376), and this process is performed. To finish.

In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), the display time reduction number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time reduction state is discriminated from the actual time reduction number, and a predetermined error occurs in the discrimination result. In this case, a process for correcting the value of the display time reduction number of times is executed. The detailed contents of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the currently set time saving state type is the time saving A (S3371). ), If it is determined that the time reduction A is not (S3371: No), the display time reduction B start command is set (S3372), and the process proceeds to S3374. The display time reduction B start command set here is output to the display control device 114 by command output processing in the same manner as the other display commands described above, and displays the display screen shown in FIG. 126 (b). Referenced when.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3371 that the time reduction A is (S3371: Yes), the display time reduction A start command is set (S3373), and the process proceeds to S3374. When the display time reduction A start command is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126 (a) is displayed.

In the process of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3375), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the content of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376). In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-mentioned lower correction effect process with reference to FIG. 127.

When the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time reduction counter Ca, that is, the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction display area Dm10 of the display screen is read (S3701). .. The display time reduction counter Ca is set to the time reduction state in which the time reduction A is set, that is, the time reduction state in which the second special symbol is mainly changed (lottery) is set. It is updated every time the fluctuation is executed, and when the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly performed is set, the first special symbol is set. Is updated every time the fluctuation of is executed.

Next, the actual number of remaining time reductions stored in the time reduction information update area 223g is read (S3702), and the difference between the value read in the processing of S3701 and the value read in the processing of S3702 is calculated (S3703). In the process of S3703, it is determined whether there is a difference between the compared values (S3704), and if it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the fluctuation time set in the current fluctuation pattern is read out (S3705). It is determined whether the read variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

If it is determined that the time is 30 seconds or more in the processing of S3706 (S3706: Yes), then the number of pseudo stops corresponding to the difference value calculated in the processing of S3703 (special symbol in the pseudo stop effect (third symbol)). (S3707), and a correction variation pattern corresponding to the set pseudo-variation number (pseudo-stop number) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the display time reduction counter Ca is corrected to the value of the time reduction information update area, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, when it is determined that there is no difference (S3704: No), or in the process of S3706, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S3706: No), this process is performed as it is. finish.

<About the first modification in the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by executing the right-handed game. As described above, a configuration was used in which the first ball entry port 64 was arranged in the left side region and the second ball entry port 640 was arranged in the right side area. Then, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, a plurality of small hit types (small hits A to C) can be set, and the number of times the small hit is won in the state where the time saving state is set is set. Based on this, in detail, when the set number of times of the small hit type set for the difference won in the small hit reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. ..

On the other hand, in this modified example, there is a big difference in that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by executing the right-handed game. In this way, in the right-handed game executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end for ending the time-saving state is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. As conditions, it is possible to set a special figure 1 end condition based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 end condition based on the lottery of the second special symbol.

Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time saving state ends, the game content can be easily predicted, resulting in a monotonous game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early. can.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 154. The same elements as those of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right region. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the left side flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member and the right side flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 forming the lower surface of the flow surface is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a constant opening / closing operation is executed by a movable control means (not shown). It is configured in the open state where the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side arranged below the movable lid 1500, and the closed state where it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. The opening and closing operation is executed.

Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process results in an opening period of 0.1 seconds. An opening / closing operation is performed in which a closing period of 2 to 3 seconds is repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The right-side first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

Then, the sphere that flows down the left side flow path 701 and flows down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left side flow path 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the lower end of the flow end of the left side flow path 701, and passes through the right side. It flows out to the lower area of the area. Further, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be able to enter above the through gate 67 of the left flow path 701, and when the electric accessory 640a opens, a ball flowing down the left flow path 701 is the first. 2 It is configured to be guided to the entrance 640.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 flow into the inflow port 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the back side of the left flow path 701 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 154). It flows out to the lower area of the right area. Here, the ball outflow position of the left side flow path 701 and the ball outflow position of the right side flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. 154.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling member 1500 is always arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing when the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened coincide with each other. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the left first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling (or falling onto the constantly movable member) on the constantly movable member 1500 is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state is 0 in 0.9 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the left first entrance ball opening 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the left first entry slot 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is played. It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball is entered in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 balls out of the 250 shot balls fired will enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entrance 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, about 9 out of the 250 fired balls are designed to enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if the prize balls to be paid out are to be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be arranged based on the design concept to the extent that the player is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game in the time saving state or the jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the present modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the first modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second entry is made in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is arranged. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23 (b)), it is promptly performed. The ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so as to allow the ball to flow down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

With this configuration, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Further, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the flow path of the ball that can enter the second entry port 640. Since the left side flow path 701 is provided with the right side first ergosphere 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Can be suppressed.

In this modified example, in the right area of the game board 13, the ball entry port (the first ball entry port 64b on the left side) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the ball entry that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. A mouth (second ball entrance 640) is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can win a prize in any of the ball entrances. A distribution device may be provided in the right region of the board 13 to alternately distribute the ball to the first taxiway leading to the left first entry port 64b and the second taxiway leading to the second entry port 640.

With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol can be alternately satisfied, which is excessive for the player. (That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state), and the game state that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is provided (that is, the game state that is advantageous to the player is provided (that is, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a biased manner). That is, it is possible to suppress that only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state).

<About the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. In the second embodiment described above, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 end condition) and the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure). 2 End condition), and the degree of expectation to win 2 types based on the lottery of the 1st special symbol, and the degree of expectation to win 2 types based on the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. Was configured to be different.

Specifically, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that the time saving state is easier to end (the time saving end condition is easier to be satisfied) and the two types are easier to obtain than the lottery for the second special symbol. rice field. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the time saving state is set, the left-handed game (the game in which the first special symbol is drawn) and the right-handed game (the game in which the second special symbol is drawn) are It was configured to display an effect screen for selecting either one and let the player play a desired game.

On the other hand, in the first modification, an effect for performing one game (right-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the one game. When it is determined that the state is (the state in which the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied), the effect for performing the other game (left-handed game) is executed. With this configuration, the game can be enjoyed to the maximum extent in the time-saving state by performing the game according to the effect to be executed (variable game method).

Next, the display screen in the state in which the time saving state of this modification is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (big hits A, B, D in the second embodiment described above) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and FIG. 155 (b). ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the condition before the end of the time reduction related to the right-handed game is satisfied during the period in which the time reduction state is set, and FIG. 156 (a) shows the time reduction state is set. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after the condition before the end of time reduction about a right-handed game is satisfied during the period. In each display screen, the same reference numerals are given to the elements displaying the same effect mode as that of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying "right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 also shows "right-handed". Is displayed. Here, in the present modification, unlike the second embodiment described above, an effect display for encouraging the player to play the game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the game state is set in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. It is configured so that the display mode corresponding to the instruction command for notifying the corresponding game direction is displayed.

That is, during the jackpot game and during the time saving state, the display mode indicating "right-handed" is always displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Please hit right after the jackpot rush rushes in" is displayed in order to perform the right-handed game after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state and the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied (special figure 2 condition before the end of time saving). As shown in FIG. 155 (b), the comment "End of pounding rush, entry into pullback zone" indicating that the right-handed game in the reduced working hours state has ended is displayed, and "left" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. The characters "hit" are displayed.

As a result, the player finishes the right-handed game and starts the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. In fact, since the time saving state has not ended, "right-handed" is continuously displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Then, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbol that can be acquired by the left-handed game are displayed.

Then, when the player starts the left-handed game, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the effect in the pullback zone is executed. Since the effect in the pullback zone is the same as that in the case where the left-handed game is performed during the time saving state in the second embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the state where the time saving state is set, the degree of establishment (progress) of a plurality of time saving end conditions is determined and right-handed. It is configured to perform an effect of causing a game to be performed or a left-handed game to be performed. This has the effect of allowing the player to perform various games during the time saving state.

Further, in this modification, the game direction is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 so that the right-handed game is performed in the first half of the time-saving state and the left-handed game is performed in the second half. As a result, the right-handed game can be continuously executed from the jackpot game, and the left-handed game can be continuously executed when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Further, when the state is reached immediately before the end of the time saving state in the right-handed game, that is, the time saving ending condition that is satisfied based on the information updated by the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is immediately before the establishment. When it is determined that there is, since the effect of guiding the left-handed game is executed, it is possible to guide the player to the game in which it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state according to the current situation. .. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to an advantageous game method.

Further, in the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, the first game is performed by the left-handed game regardless of whether the normal state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the ratio of balls entering the ball entry port 64 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is set or the normal state is set in the "pullback zone" in which the left-handed game is performed in the latter half of the time saving state.

In the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as described above, the time saving state is configured so that it is easier to win the two types based on the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, during the "pull-back zone" in which the time saving state is set, the ease of lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is the same as in the case where the normal state is set, but the lottery Based on this, it is easy to obtain a hit between two types, so that the game state is more advantageous than the normal state.

Therefore, it is possible to produce a gaming state in which a jackpot is actually set more easily (it is easier to obtain two types of hits) than in a normal state as a "pull-back zone", so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, the timing at which the pre-time reduction condition is satisfied based on the right-handed game differs depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (the lottery result of the second special symbol), so the period during which this "pull-back zone" is executed is indefinite. Become a thing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the "pull-back zone" to continue for a long period of time.

Further, in this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the game state, and the guidance display is performed according to the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction end condition is established). It is configured to set the display mode of the area Dm2, and the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 to actively guide the player to the game method. However, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to be variable according to the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction end condition is established). You may. In this case, if the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied by the right-handed game (the game for executing the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol) during the time reduction state, the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied. It is preferable to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so as to be less conspicuous than in the case where the game direction is not displayed.

In this way, in the state where the time saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second according to the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is established). By changing to the notification mode, the player can visually determine the degree of advantage when the game is executed according to the game direction (for example, right-handed) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. ..

<About the fifth embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, a game (first game) in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed when the time saving state is set. It was configured so that the player could select the game (second game) to be performed (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of Special Figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. It was configured to draw the special figure 2 by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, and the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time saving state ends). It was configured so that the player could select a game (easy to play) and a game (from that game) in which the short-time end condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, in the game in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied (first game), in one special symbol lottery, in the game in which the time saving ending condition is hard to be satisfied (second game). Probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (per 2 types) during the small hit (during the small hit game) It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by letting the player select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It can be suppressed. In addition, depending on the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time saving state (the ease of satisfying the time saving ending condition) and the degree of expectation of a big hit for one special drawing lottery should be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game that suits him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is easier to enter the ball than in the normal state. The game is aimed at the mouth 640, but the other game (first game) is a game aimed at the first entrance 64, which has the same ease of entering the ball as in the normal state. There was a problem that it was difficult to give an advantage due to the time saving state being set.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, a game (first game) in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed when the time saving state is set. It was configured so that the player could select the game (second game) to be performed (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of Special Figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. It was configured to draw the special figure 2 by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, and the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time saving state ends). It was configured so that the player could select a game (easy to play) and a game (from that game) in which the short-time end condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, in the game in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied (first game), in one special symbol lottery, in the game in which the time saving ending condition is hard to be satisfied (second game). Probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (per 2 types) during the small hit (during the small hit game) It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by letting the player select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It can be suppressed. In addition, depending on the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time saving state (the ease of satisfying the time saving ending condition) and the degree of expectation of a big hit for one special drawing lottery should be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game that suits him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is set to the time saving state, so that the game is more than the normal state. The game aims at the second entrance 640, which makes it easier to enter the ball, while the other game (first game) is aimed at the first entrance 64, which has the same ease of entry as the normal state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to give the player an advantage due to the time saving state being set. In other words, by setting the time saving state, the special symbol changes (lottery) can be performed more efficiently than in the normal state, and in that state, different playability (easiness of ending the time saving state and one time). It was not possible to provide the jackpot expectation in the special drawing lottery.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed at the same time. By having a possible configuration (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) and varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol that can be set according to the gaming state, the player can select different playability in the time saving state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, by setting the time saving state, it is possible to provide a game in which the special symbol can be changed (lottery) more efficiently than in the normal state and the player can select a different game property. It is configured as follows.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration of a right side area of the game board 13 (a game area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) and a game area below the variable display device unit 80. Is different from the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment) described above. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side region is roughly divided into two, and the momentum of the ball launched by the right-handed game, that is, the operation handle 51. The ball flows down different flow paths according to the magnitude (launch intensity) of the resistance value detected by the variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the ball by the change in electrical resistance. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, when the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds the reference amount, the fired ball is configured to flow down the right side region, and further, the operation handle 51 When the rotation operation amount (rotation position) is larger than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (weak right-handed game), it is divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900 provided in the center of the right side region. In the case where the ball is launched toward the first right area 901a on the left side of the area and the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is equal to or more than the limit amount and less than or equal to the limit amount (strong right-handed game). Of the regions divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulatory member) 900, the ball is configured to be launched toward the second right region 901b on the right side. In the fifth embodiment, the firing intensity is increased according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, but the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 reaches a predetermined rotation operation amount. However, the operation handle 51 can be rotated even after the firing intensity is maximized. With this configuration, it is not necessary to operate the operation handle 51 up to the limit (up to the upper limit) of the rotation operation range of the operation handle 51 when performing a strong right-handed game, so that the operation handle 51 is hard to break. be able to.

Hereinafter, in the right-handed game, the game aiming at the first right-hand area 901a is referred to as a weak right-handed game, and the game aiming at the second right-hand area 901b is referred to as a strong right-handed game. In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the magnitude of the firing intensity of the right-handed game, but the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, a plurality of different games may be repeatedly set according to the magnitude of the firing intensity, or even if the ball is launched with the same firing intensity, the ball may be set. It may be configured so that different games are set according to the firing timing and the number of balls, and the right side region may be formed so that the balls flow down different regions for each different game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the firing intensity of the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball launched by the left-handed game flows down to the region. On the other hand, it may be configured to set a plurality of games.

Returning to FIG. 157, the description will be continued. The ball launched by the weak right-handed game is placed in the opening formed between the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display device unit 80) and the variable display device unit 80. It invades and flows down the first right region 901a. On the other hand, the ball launched by the strong right-handed game invades the opening formed above the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display device unit 80), and the second It flows down the right side region 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment has an identifier for indicating that the right side region is divided into a plurality of right side regions (first right side region 901a, second right side region 901b). As a result, a mark imitating a fish (displaying the first right area) 910 and a mark imitating a turtle (displaying the second right area) 911 are visible to the player near the entrance of each area (game board). It is affixed (on the surface of 13). With this configuration, it is possible to identify whether or not the game (strong right-handed game, weak right-handed game) desired by the player is actually performed, and identify the mark affixed to the trajectory of the launched ball. It can be easily identified by doing so.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-mentioned first right area display 910 and second right area display 911 are attached one by one near the entrance of each area, but the present invention is not limited to this. , You may paste more than one. Further, instead of sticking to the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 is made of a transparent member (for example, acrylic resin), and each mark is attached so as to be embedded in the transparent member. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the fired ball does not come into contact with each mark (first right area display 910, second right area display 911), so that each mark is peeled off by contacting the ball. It is possible to suppress the problem of spilling.

Of the areas partitioned by the regulation wall 900, the first right side area 901a is provided with a second entry port 640, and most (about 95%) of the balls that have invaded the first right side area 901a are the second entry balls. It is configured to enter the mouth 640. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a variation time of 10 minutes is set for the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. doing. Then, the number of balls (the number of prize balls) to be paid out when a ball enters the second entry port 640 is set to one.

With this configuration, even if a weak right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase (the number of balls paid out is smaller than the number of shot balls), and the second ball enters. Even if the ball entry rate to the mouth 640 is increased, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed efficiently.

Next, in the second right side region 901b of the region partitioned by the regulation wall 900, a through gate 67 and a right first ball entry port 964 are arranged. An electric accessory 964a is attached to the right first entrance 964. This electric accessory 964a operates on the same operating principle as the electric accessory 640a of the second embodiment described above, and is a lottery result of a general drawing lottery executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67. Depending on the situation, the ball can be changed between an open state in which the ball easily enters the right first entry port 964 and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter (impossible to enter). The detailed contents will be omitted because they are the same as those in the second embodiment described above.

By arranging different entrances for each of the partitioned areas in this way, different special drawing lottery is executed according to the content of the game during the time saving state. Although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time is short (5 to 60 seconds) with respect to the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state. It is configured to be set.

Therefore, since both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed during the time saving state, the player can select which game to play. In the fifth embodiment, different lottery results are given to the player depending on whether the special figure 1 lottery is performed or the special figure 2 lottery is performed during the time saving state. There is.

Specifically, it is easier to finish the time saving state when the special figure 1 lottery is performed than when the special figure 2 lottery is performed, and the privilege (number of prize balls) given when the big hit is won increases. It is configured as follows. In other words, during the time saving state, it is possible to execute a high-risk, high-return game by performing the special figure 1 lottery than by performing the special figure 2 lottery (a game having a different game property can be executed). .. In this way, when the player can select the game method, the player can enthusiastically select the game method by executing different game characteristics according to the selected game state.

In addition, depending on the game method selected, the period during which the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, continues (the period during which the time-saving state continues on average) is made different. Can be selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the convenience of the player himself / herself.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when a game method for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in a short period of time (shorter period than other game methods) is selected, a big hit is made in that time-saving state. When the player wins the game, the player is given a greater privilege than when another game method is selected. As a result, even if a game method in which the time saving state ends in a short period of time is selected, the privilege can be given fairly to the player, so that the player can easily select the desired game method.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first pass sensor 905a is provided in the first right side region 901a partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and a second pass sensor 905b is provided in the second right side region 901b.

The first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b are detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the game board 13, and can detect the flow (pass) of the ball in a non-contact state. It is composed of various proximity sensors. The first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b have a passage width of one sphere or more and less than two spheres (for example, 15 mm) in each region in order to reliably detect a sphere passing through each region. It is provided in the part that becomes. By limiting the flow width of the sphere flowing down each region in this way, the detection accuracy of the sphere can be improved. In addition, the number of detection means required to detect the sphere can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b described above are embedded in the game board 13 so that the detection area is the surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is embedded. Proximity sensors of a style that detects changes in capacitance caused by a ball flowing down the surface (bottom surface of a ball flow) are provided, but proximity sensors of other styles may be provided, limit switches, etc. The detection means of the contact type detection method may be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the proximity sensor corresponding to one region from detecting a sphere flowing down the other region, a predetermined thickness (predetermined thickness) so that the detection ranges of the proximity sensors do not overlap. For example, the configuration has 5 mm), but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, various displacements (capacitance displacement, magnetic field displacement) detected by the proximity sensor are prevented from being affected across the regulation wall 900. The material may be configured to form the regulation wall 900.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, a dedicated detection means is used to determine which region (first right region 901a, second right region 901b) the ball launched by the right-handed game has passed. However, the information (signal) indicating that the ball has entered the ball entrances provided in each of the first right side area 901a and the second right side area 901b is not limited to this. It may be determined based on. Further, the adjustment amount of the operation handle 51 may be detected, and the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game may be discriminated based on the adjusted amount.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player is provided with a configuration and a process for determining whether the right-handed game currently being executed is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. The current game method can be notified to the player.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. First, with reference to FIG. 158, the configuration of the upper portion of the game board 13, that is, the portion where the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed into the first right side region 901a and the second right side region 901b will be described. FIG. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball launched by the right-handed game passes through the apex portion of the game board 13 (the uppermost part of the game area of the game board 13 formed in a circle in the front view of FIG. 157). In any of the opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 and the opening 902a below the opening 902b and formed between the tip nail K1a and the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to be distributed to. Further, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 extends to the entrance width (the center point of the circular game area and the straight line passing through the tip nail K1a to the rail 62, to the tip nail K1a and the rail 62). The distance) is 2 cm, and the entrance width of the opening 902a (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display device unit 80 and the tip nail K1a in the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) is 4. It is configured to be centimeters.

This is because, in the right-handed game, when the strong right-handed game is performed, the launched ball advances stably along the rail 62, whereas in the weak right-handed game, the trajectory of the ball is stabilized. Because it is difficult, the entrance width of the opening 902a in which the ball launched by the weak right-handed game invades is wider than that of the opening 902b in which the ball launched by the strong right-handed game invades. This is to make it easier to perform.

That is, by forming the entrance width of the opening 902a wide, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 corresponding to the weak right-handed game can be widened, so that the player can perform the weak right-handed game. It can be made easier.

Further, a fish mark (first right area display) 910 is affixed in the vicinity of the opening 902a in the first right side area 901a, and a turtle mark (second right side area display) 910 is affixed in the vicinity of the opening 902b in the second right side area 901b. Right area display) 911 is attached. In this way, by affixing each mark to the area through which the ball immediately after passing through each opening (the ball immediately after being distributed to the partitioned area) passes, the area in which the fired ball is shot is directed to the player. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not the user has reached.

In the present embodiment, marks (first right side area display, second right side area display) for indicating each area are attached in the first right side area 901a and the second right side area 901b, but the present invention is limited to this. No, for example, among the areas through which the sphere before passing through each opening (902a, 902b) passes, the first right area is displayed in the area where it is determined which opening the sphere that has passed through that area passes through. 910, the second right area display 911 may be attached. In this way, a mark for indicating each area not only in the partitioned area but also in the area through which the sphere that is determined to invade the specific partitioned area passes (first right area display, second right side). By configuring the area display) to be attached, it is possible to easily attach the mark to a position easily visible to the player in the limited space of the game board 13.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 159 (a) is an enlarged view of the right side region when the variable winning device 9650a is open, and FIG. 159 (b) is an enlarged view of the right side region when the variable winning device 9650a is closed. be.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player selects a weak right-handed game aiming at the first right-hand area 901a and a strong right-handed game aiming at the second right-hand area 901b as a game method during the right-handed game. It is configured so that the player can be provided with a game having different game characteristics according to the selected game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is necessary for the player to select a desired game method from the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game, and adjust the operation handle 51 according to the game method. there were. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a of the weak right-handed game is widened so that the adjustment range of the operation handle 51 for the weak right-handed game that is difficult for the player to adjust is widened. It is configured to be wider than the opening 902b of the strong right-handed game so that the player can easily select the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the fifth embodiment, when any game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) is performed in the state where the time saving state is set. Even if there is, a variable winning device 9650a that is openly operated in the jackpot game is arranged so that the jackpot game can be executed while the game is continued.

As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the game method selected during the time saving state can be continued, so that the player is troubled in the state where the time saving state and the jackpot gaming state are repeatedly set. It is possible to play a game without feeling the feeling.

Further, the variable winning device 9650a is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entrance port 640 arranged in the first right side area 901a and the first ball entry port 964 arranged in the second right side area 901b. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball launched in the right-handed game does not enter each entrance before winning the variable winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the variable winning device 9650a has a first right region 901a and a second right region 901b as a part of the regulation wall 900 as shown in FIG. 159 (b) except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed). Since it is in a closed state so as to partition and, it is possible to prevent a ball flowing down each region from invading a different region during the time saving state.

In the fifth embodiment, any region (first right region 901a, second right region) can be executed so that the jackpot game can be executed while maintaining the gaming method selected by the player during the time saving state. A variable winning device 9650 is arranged so that a ball flowing down 901b) can also win a prize. The variable winning device 9650 may be arranged in the area where the variable winning device 9650 passes before being distributed to the right side area 901b).

Further, a variable winning device corresponding to each area may be provided. Specifically, the variable for special figure 2 is opened when the big hit is won by the lottery of special figure 2 in the first right area 901a where the ball of the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of special figure 2 is executed flows down. Special Figure 1 in which a winning device is arranged and the lottery of Special Figure 1 is executed. The variable winning device is configured to be arranged.

With this configuration, if you win a big hit by playing one of the games (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) in the state where the time saving state is set, it will be as it is for the player. It is possible to execute a jackpot game while continuing the game method of. In addition, different variable winning devices will be opened when a big hit is won according to the game method to be executed. Therefore, by making the game method different for the player while the time saving state is set. It is possible to make it easy to understand that different games are executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied) in the state where the time saving state is set, or when the special symbol When the number of small hits won by lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the winning number end condition is satisfied), the time saving state is changed to the normal state (from the gaming state advantageous to the player to the unfavorable gaming state). It is configured to migrate. Regarding this configuration, only the values set as the end conditions are different from the second embodiment described above, and the process of determining whether or not each end condition is satisfied and each end condition are performed. Since the processing for shifting the game state to be executed when is satisfied is the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by making it possible to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and not winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ease of ending the time saving state differs between the game (strong right-handed game) and the game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol (weak right-handed game). Furthermore, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the amount of privilege (prize ball amount) given to the player in one jackpot is higher than that in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. Is configured to be large, so that the player can enthusiastically select the game method in the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the content of the jackpot effect executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen at the time when the jackpot (big hit game) is started, and FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram of the display screen during the jackpot (big hit game). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the weak right-handed game, the strong right-handed game, and the player can select and execute (operate the operation handle 51) in the state where the time saving state is set. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is to be performed in the same manner as in the time-saving state, the player is guided by the production whether the game method corresponding to the time-saving game desired by the player is performed. It is configured so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 157, in the fifth embodiment, as a game method (time saving game method) in the time saving state, a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game can be executed, and further. , It is configured so that the jackpot game can be executed regardless of which game method is being executed. With this configuration, the game method corresponding to the game method in the time saving state desired by the player is executed in advance using the period during which the jackpot game, which is the stage before the time saving state is set, is executed. be able to.

Therefore, when different time-saving game methods are executed based on the operation of the operation handle 51 as in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving game method desired by the player can be surely executed. Further, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game content actually executed during the jackpot game (same as the execution game storage area) matches the game state desired by the player during the time saving state. However, it is configured to execute an effect based on the determination result. As a result, the player can easily understand the current game method (the game method during the big hit game).

When the jackpot game is started (when the jackpot opening period is reached), a "right-handed" comment is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen for selecting the game method desired by the player in the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is displayed. Specifically, a safe mode display mode 851 and a challenge mode display mode 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an arrow pointing to each display mode periodically and repeatedly indicates one of the display modes. By operating the frame button 22 with, a desired game method is selected.

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right-handed game in a time-saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed is desired, and a challenge mode display mode 852 is selected. Is selected when a strong right-handed game in a time-saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed is desired. The figure shown in FIG. 160A is a state in which the arrow 853 indicating the safe mode display mode 851 is displayed, and the player desires by operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state. The game method can be selected as the safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160A, the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the arrow 854 shown by the dotted line is displayed by the solid line.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Please select the desired game" are displayed as comments for the player to select the desired mode, and the frame button 22 for guiding the selection operation is displayed. A simulated figure is displayed. Based on the display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player grasps the content to be selected at the start of the jackpot and selects the desired game method in the time saving state. For the game method selected here, the game method being executed during the jackpot game is determined.

During the jackpot game, the figure shown in FIG. 160 (b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, "right-handed" is continuously displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the current number of round games is displayed in the round number display area 858. In the example of FIG. 160 (b), "ROUND 5" indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current game method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired game method selected at the start of the jackpot game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the figure shown in FIG. 160 (b), the display mode showing the "safety mode" is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the display mode showing the "challenge mode" is displayed in the desired game display area 861. .. That is, the display content when the actually executed game method is different from the game method desired by the player is displayed, and the game method is changed to the game guide area 859 of the sub-display area Ds. The comment "Strongly right-handed" is displayed.

By configuring the display mode in this way, adjustments for matching the actual game method with the game method desired by the player (the game method to be executed during the time reduction state) are made before the time reduction state is set. It can be performed during the period when the jackpot game is being executed. Further, when the game method being executed during the jackpot game is different from the desired game method, a guidance display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the desired game method during the period of time.

Returning to FIG. 160 (b), the description will be continued. On the display screen during the jackpot game, the running jackpot history 855 showing the game method when the running jackpot is won, the safety mode jackpot history 856 showing the number of times the jackpot was won during the safety mode, and the challenge The challenge mode jackpot history 857, which indicates the number of times the jackpot was won during the mode, is displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 160 (b) is a lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 in the state where the normal state is set as the game state. The letter "V" indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed as the running jackpot history 855.

In addition, when the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot won by the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the state where the time saving state is set. Is displayed in the running hit history 855 with the letter "V with a fish mark", and is a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the right first entrance 964. If you win, the character "V with a turtle mark" is displayed in the execution hit history 855. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the trigger of the winning jackpot regardless of the game state in which the jackpot is won.

Further, by providing the safe mode jackpot history 856 and the challenge mode jackpot history 857, what kind of game is played in the past when playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, especially when playing a game in a time-saving state. You can refer to the game history of. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict an advantageous game method, and it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, as the past game history, the game method set when the jackpot is won is cumulatively displayed, but other than that, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, It may be configured to display the accumulated value of the game methods selected in the past.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the content of the game in the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the content of the time-saving game in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed depending on the game method to be executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right region 901a is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, most of the launched balls are the second entrance 640. It is configured so that one prize ball is paid out by entering the ball.

Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol, which is executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, it is set so that the small hit is not won, and when the big hit is won. Is set to perform a 10-round jackpot game. Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving state is set, the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the second special symbol have the same degree of variation. The time is set.

On the other hand, when a strong right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right region 901b is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 964a is based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Opens. Then, if a ball enters the right first entry port 964 while the electric accessory 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, about one-third of the balls launched into the second right region 901b in the state where the time saving state is set are configured to enter the right first entrance 964. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the right-handed game is performed during the time saving state, the holding ball is maintained regardless of whether the weak right-handed game or the strong right-handed game is performed. You can get a prize ball (prize ball = medium).

Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed by the strong right-handed game, unlike the lottery of the second special symbol described above, it is configured so that a small hit can be won (the winning probability is 1/60). ). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as the time saving end condition which is a condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition which is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, even if a small hit is won, the reduction of working hours condition is satisfied. That is, when the time saving state is set, the strong right-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed has a shorter time than the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured so that a game that is easy to finish is performed.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the prize amount (number of prize balls) given to the player is larger than that in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. The game is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, in the time saving state, the time saving state is set until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 100 times, but the weakness of executing the lottery of the second special symbol with few benefits when the jackpot is won. The time saving state is set until the right-handed game (safety mode) is performed, the special symbol fluctuation is executed 100 times, or the small hit is won, that is, more time-saving end conditions are set than in the weak right-handed game. However, although the time saving state is easy to end, there are many benefits if you win the jackpot (12 round jackpot). Since it can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the fifth embodiment, the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. However, other than that, the time saving end condition described in each of the above-described embodiments may be set. For example, a small hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and the small hit type set for the winning small hit is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit A). It is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied only in the case of, and the above-mentioned specific small hit type (small hit A) is set only when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. You may. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the time saving state ends just by winning the small hit, so that it is possible to provide a feeling of excitement to the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, that is, when the small hit is won once, but the time saving end condition is satisfied. The number of winnings may be set to one or more. Further, when a small hit is won, a plurality of small hit types may be set, and different time saving end conditions may be set for each small hit type.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to fluctuate (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is The values set in each table are different from those of the fourth embodiment described above, but are the same except for the above. The detailed description of the same part or the part where the value is simply changed will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), among the configurations of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern 5 table different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment described above. The contents of 202dd will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. The variation pattern 5 table 202dd is different from the above-mentioned variation pattern 4 table 202cd in that the specified contents of the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the above-described fourth embodiment, different fluctuation pattern tables are referred to according to the set time saving state (depending on the winning jackpot type), and the first In contrast to the configuration in which the time saving state in which the 1 special symbol is easily changed and the time saving state in which the second special symbol is easily changed can be set, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern referred to during the time saving state is configured. The difference is that the simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 for shortening the working hours is specified as the table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 162 (b), the contents specified in the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 has a first special symbol (special drawing 1) as compared with the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time saving state of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that there is no significant difference in the fluctuation time set for any of the fluctuation pattern defined corresponding to and the fluctuation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2).

That is, in the fourth embodiment described above, in the right-handed game executed when the time saving state is set, both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are drawn by lottery. The lottery is mainly executed by configuring the game board 13 so as to be executed and making the length of the fluctuation time set for each special symbol different according to the type of the time saving state set as the game state. It was configured to change the type of special symbol.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time set for each special symbol is set to the same length, and the player makes a ball. The difference is that the type of special symbol in which the lottery is executed is mainly changed by changing the game area in which the game is fired.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment shows the lottery result (win / fail determination) regardless of whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. A fluctuation pattern (big hit fluctuations 1 to 3) with a fluctuation time of 10 to 60 seconds is specified for a jackpot (result), and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for a lottery result (win / fail judgment result). A fluctuation pattern of ~ 30 seconds (disengagement fluctuations 1 to 3) is specified. In addition, only the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that it can be judged as a small hit as a winning / failing judgment result, but for this small hit, 10 seconds or more as in the case where the above-mentioned winning / failing judgment result is wrong. A fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds (small hit fluctuations 1 to 3) is specified. As a result, it is possible to set the same fluctuation time for the fluctuation that wins the small hit and the fluctuation that wins the miss.

Therefore, the effect suggesting that the time reduction ends due to winning the small hit can be applied as it is even when the lottery result (win / fail determination result) is out of order. In the fifth embodiment, the effect suggesting that the time reduction is completed (the effect suggesting that the small hit has been won) is executed depending on whether the winning / failing result is wrong or the small hit. In addition to this, for example, the fluctuation time specified for the case where the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a small hit, and the fluctuation time specified for the case of a big hit, May be the same, and an effect indicating that the player has won either a big hit or a small hit may be executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand until the end whether a situation in which a player wins a big hit and obtains a privilege or a situation in which a player wins a small hit and ends a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is given. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the first pass counter 223 da, the second pass counter 223 db, the selected game storage area 223 dc, the execution game storage area 223 dd, and the jackpot information storage area 223 de are compared with the second embodiment described above. And, are different in that they are added.

The first pass counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first pass sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls that have passed through the first right region 901a during the jackpot game. be. The first pass counter 223da has the first pass sensor 905a turned on during the jackpot in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined to be present, the value is added by 1 (see S3803). In addition, the value added when determining the game method being executed is referred to (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second pass counter 223db is a counter similar to the first pass counter 223da described above, and is the number of balls detected by the second pass sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the second pass counter during the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the right region 901b. The processing using the second pass counter 223db is different only in that the target of the first pass counter 223da described above is changed from the first pass sensor 905a to the second pass sensor 905b. Is omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time saving state. In this selected game storage area 223dc, a game method selected during the game selection period set in a predetermined period (10 seconds) after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set) is set. It is stored, and when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (see S2157 in FIG. 167) that the pressing of the frame button 22 is the game selection period (S3852: Yes), the button is pressed. The corresponding game method is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, the player determines the desired game method as the game method in the reduced working hours state, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160 (b)). The current state of the game is configured to set the display mode of the game method. The information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is configured to be held until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the selection screen displayed at the start of the jackpot game (FIG. 160 (a)). In (see), the information stored in the selected game storage area 223 dc may be configured so that the selected display mode is formed so that the arrow points first.

Further, the player did not select any game method during the period (during the game selection period) during which the selection screen (see FIG. 160 (a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game is displayed (during the game selection period). When the frame button 22 is not pressed), the game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) is automatically selected. Good to configure.

In this case, the game is selected so that the arrow points to the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc at the start time and the end time of the game selection period on which the selection screen is displayed. It is advisable to set the production mode during the period. With this configuration, even if the player does not select a game method, one of the game methods is automatically selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is possible to perform a production that makes you think that it was done.

The execution game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the actually executed game method. The execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area in which the ball launched during the big hit (during the big hit game) flows down, and is a voice lamp control device. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of 113, the first right region 901a and the first right region 901a during the big hit (during the big hit game). Information indicating a game method based on the number of balls flowing down the second right side region 901b is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). With this configuration, the region where the launched ball actually flows down can be discriminated, and the current game method can be determined based on the discriminant result, so that the determination accuracy can be improved.

The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is used when determining the currently executing game method, and is displayed in the desired game display area 861 on the display screen during the jackpot game (FIG. 160 (b)). It is referred to when setting the aspect (S3554 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to the jackpot. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information about the winning jackpot, and information indicating the type of the winning jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game method when the jackpot is won (for example, the jackpot). The special symbol type that is the target of the lottery that was won in the above is stored, and in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. In this case (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Regarding the control process in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment executes the same control process as the control process of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independent (parallel). It is configured so that it can be changed. Then, if a winner is won in the lottery of one of the special symbols (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the win), the other special symbol change in progress is displayed to indicate the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop and display in the mode.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game executed when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery (provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 which is a specific area). The V switch 650e3 has a control process so that a jackpot (per 2 types) can be obtained (by detecting a sphere), whereas in the fifth embodiment, the above-mentioned 2 types hit is obtained. The difference is that it does not have the control process of.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). In contrast to the two gaming states of,, which can be set, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned two gaming states, a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol and high probability state of a normal symbol). ) And the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set.

<Regarding the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 1113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the game method when the time saving state is set, and the operation handle 51 is operated by the player to perform a weak right-handed game or a weak right-handed game. One of the strong right-handed games is executed.

In both the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game executed during the time saving state, the ball is launched to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in the front view of FIG. 157) by operating the operation handle 51 greatly. The game method of the right-handed game to be played is divided in detail, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for the player to execute the desired gaming method, a slight adjustment period and adjustment firing (shooting the ball while adjusting the amount of operation) are required.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 157, at least when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is maximized (when the operation handle 51 is rotated all the way to the right). Since the operation amount is configured to correspond to the strong right-handed game, the player can easily execute the strong right-handed game, but for the weak right-handed game, the operation handle. While operating 51 to the extent that it becomes a right-handed game (to the extent that the fired ball reaches the right area of the variable display device unit 80), it does not become a strong right-handed game (the fired ball is the second right side). It had to be adjusted to such an extent that it did not flow down the region 901b), which required an adjustment period and an adjustment launch.

Therefore, as in the effect display (see FIG. 82 (a)) executed in the second embodiment described above, at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing immediately before the time saving state is set. When the effect display for causing the player to select the game method is executed, the time saving state is set at the stage where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted toward the game method desired by the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time-saving state is likely to be executed by the game method not intended by the player.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the time reduction set for the player after the end of the jackpot game at the timing when the opening screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game is started. It is configured to execute an effect display for selecting a game method in the state. As a result, the game method can be adjusted using the period during which the jackpot game is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in the time-saving state by the game method not intended by the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of which of the plurality of game methods that the player can select as the game method in the time saving state is executed, the same privilege can be obtained during the jackpot game. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as the period for adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 toward the game method in the time saving state without giving a disadvantageous situation to the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the desired game method in the time saving state, the game method selected by the player, and the game method actually executed during the jackpot game. Is compared, and based on the comparison result, a display is configured to guide the player to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thereby, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward the game method desired by the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the amount of benefits (prize ball amount) given when a big hit is won differs depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time saving state. It is configured in. Then, in the period in which the time saving state (including the probability change state) and the jackpot game are repeatedly continued, that is, in the continuous period (consecutive chan period, valid period) in which the normal state (excluding during the jackpot) is not set as the game state, the jackpot The number of times the player has won the prize (the number of consecutive chans) is displayed separately for each game that was being executed when the jackpot was won.

As a result, the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the winning status (number of wins) of the jackpot can be visually confirmed. Can be selected based on. Therefore, it is possible to give a strategy element to the game and improve the interest.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment, the main process (main process) is performed with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment described above. The main process 5 (see FIG. 164) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), and the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 105 (b)) is performed. The difference is that the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168) is used instead of the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168).

The fifth embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the control processing content of the main control device 110 is replaced with the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. ing. Therefore, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the replacement of the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and the control process of the other voice lamp control device 113 is the second embodiment. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the main process 5 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 5. As shown in FIG. 164, in the main process 5, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (S2197) is performed instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) with respect to the above-mentioned main process 2 (see FIG. 55). , The command determination process 5 (S2193) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (S2163), and the signal input process (S2151) is added.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2193) will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2193). When the command determination process 5 (S2193) receives a hit-related command with respect to the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99), the information indicated by the received command is stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de. It differs in that it is stored in.

When the command determination process 5 (S2193 in FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes in S2201 to S2209 as in the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described above are executed. Then, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same prize information related process 2 (S2251) as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the process of S2217 is executed. Is executed to end this process.

In the second embodiment described above, in the prize information related process 2 (S2251) described above, it is determined whether the game method in the time saving state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game, and the determination is made. It is configured to set the effect contents (effect for guidance notification, effect for error notification) based on the result, but in the fifth embodiment, it is configured not to execute such a process. Although it differs in that, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No in FIG. 165), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S2211: Yes in FIG. 165), the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (content indicated by the hit-related command). After that, the same processes of S2212 and S2217 as those of the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de, which is updated in the process of S2291 described above, includes, for example, the number of times the jackpot is won and the opportunity for the lottery to win the jackpot (the opportunity for the lottery to win the jackpot). There is information to show the game method). By configuring the jackpot information storage area 223de to update the contents immediately after winning the jackpot in this way, there is an effect that the past jackpots can be studied during the jackpot game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 165. In the process of S2211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the same processes of S2213 to S2217 as those of the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the signal input process (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the signal input processing (S2151). In this signal input process (S2151), when the first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect the passage of the ball, the process based on the detection result is executed. Specifically, the number of balls passing (flowing down) through each area (first right side area 901a, second right side area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls). ), A process of determining a game method corresponding to a region where a large number of balls is detected, that is, a region where many balls have flowed down is executed as an actual game method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3801: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the first pass sensor 905a has detected the ball (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first pass sensor 905a is detecting the sphere (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first pass counter 223da (S3803), and then the process of S3804. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a does not detect the sphere (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether the second passing sensor 905b has detected the sphere (S3804). If it is determined that the second pass sensor 905b is detecting the sphere (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pass counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b has not detected the sphere (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3806.

Then, in the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls passing through the first right side region 901a (value of the first passing counter 223da) and the number of balls passing through the second right side region 901b (value of the second passing counter 223db) during the jackpot game. Is calculated.

When the processing of S3806 is completed, it is next determined whether the difference between the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807), and it is determined that the difference is 5 or more. In the case (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first pass counter 223 da is larger than the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db (S3808).

If it is determined in the process of S3808 that the value of the first pass counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first pass counter 223 da is not larger than the value of the second pass counter 223 db (the value of the second pass counter 223 db is larger) (S3808: No), A strong right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this process ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls launched during the jackpot game that have flowed down the first right side region 901a and the number of balls that have flowed down the second right side region 901b are measured in the right side region. Based on the measurement result, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the first right-hand area 901a or a strong right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the second right-hand area 901b. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the information (game method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 and the processing of S3810 is the display of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It is configured so that the player can easily grasp it by displaying it in the current game display area 860 of the screen.

In the fifth embodiment, the current game method is set when the difference value between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db is a predetermined amount (5 balls) or more. It is configured in. That is, immediately after the jackpot game is executed (the period during which the right-handed game during the jackpot game does not fire five or more balls), the current game method is executed regardless of the area where the balls are fired. Since it is not set in the game storage area 223dd, it is configured so that the game method is not displayed in the current game display area 860.

With this configuration, the current game method on the display screen can be set immediately after the jackpot game is started, in a state where the game method in the player's right-handed game is not fixed (unstable state). It can be suppressed from being displayed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not specified until the difference value between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db reaches a predetermined amount (5 balls). It is configured in. With this configuration, the display mode for showing the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) is frequently switched. Can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 166, the description will be continued. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a command for indicating that the time saving state has been set (a command including a content indicating that the current gaming state is the time saving state) has been output, or during a jackpot game. When it is determined that the command indicating that is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

In the process of S3811, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db added during the jackpot game are cleared to 0. (S3812), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S3811: No), that is, if the game state is neither the jackpot nor the jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813). , End this process.

As the processing of S3813 described above, for example, when the game state is the normal state (when the game state in which the left-handed game aiming at the left side region is an appropriate game is set), the first pass sensor 905a Or, when the second passing sensor 905b detects the ball, that is, when it is determined that the right-handed game is being performed, a guidance display for guiding the game method to the player is executed. The first pass sensor 905a or the second pass sensor 905b detects the ball in a game state (for example, a time saving state) in which a different game is executed depending on the processing of the above and the game method executed by the player. Based on this, the processing for determining the game method being executed and displaying it in the current game display area 860 is configured to be executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is started (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the game method in the time saving state desired by the player is selected, and the period during which the jackpot game is executed is used. The game is configured so that the player can change the game method. However, the period during which the jackpot game is executed may be used as a period for changing the game method. For example, the jackpot game may be used. May be configured to execute an effect of selecting a game method (see FIG. 160 (a)) in the middle of executing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, a game selection period in which the player selects a desired game method (FIG. 160 (a)). The difference is that the operation process of the frame button 22 in (see) is added.

When the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that there is no such case (S3851: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S3851 (S3851: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game selection period is (S3852).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), the hit-related execution is executed when the hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes). In the process (S2212), 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot (after it is determined to be the start timing of the jackpot) is set as the game selection period. In this game selection period, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in a period counter value (not shown), and the counter value is updated in various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every 1 millisecond. It is configured to measure 10 seconds.

In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press on the frame button 22 is selected. Game storage area 223dc (S3853), the game method set in S3853, that is, the display pressing command indicating the game method corresponding to the button pressing is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

The display pressing command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and the game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the person (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the game method desired by the player himself during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fifth embodiment, both the game method desired by the player himself and the game method executed during the jackpot game are displayed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is necessary to adjust the game method based on the display content displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, if the game method desired by the player himself / herself does not match the game method executed during the jackpot game during the jackpot game, the game method actually executed is executed. However, the operation method of the operation handle 51 is guided (instructed) to the game guidance area 859 of the sub-display area Ds so that the game method is desired by the player himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to guide the player to a specific adjustment method, so that the player can easily execute the desired game method.

Returning to FIG. 167, the description will be continued. In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is not (S3852: No), then it is determined whether it is in another operation period (S3854), and it is determined that it is in another operation period. If this is done (S3854: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, other operation periods include, for example, a part of the special symbol change period for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the period during which the game is not executed (the change of the special symbol is executed). In the special symbol change period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected), the lottery result of the changing special symbol is displayed. It is configured to perform a production to suggest that it is a big hit.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected) during the so-called demonstration period in which the game is not executed, a screen for explaining the game content of the pachinko machine 10 or , Today's game history is configured to be selected and displayed. In this way, by differentiating the privilege (execution effect) for the operation according to the game state and the game situation when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player. , The production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the effect update process 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 5. The effect update process 5 is different from the effect update process of each of the above-described embodiments in that a process of updating the display content of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game is executed.

When the effect update process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3551), and when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3551: Yes), it is stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read out (S3552), and then the information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read out.

Then, a display game method command corresponding to the selected game method and the running game method is set (S3554). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the above is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 168. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether or not the contents of the information read in the process of S3552 (selected game method) and the information read in the process of S3553 (execution game method) match (S3555). , If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), it means that the desired game method and the current game method match, so a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method. Is set, and this process ends.

When a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is set in the process of S3556, for example, "keep as it is" in the game guidance area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment is displayed. As a result, the player can enter an advantageous state in favor of the player by maintaining the current supplementary game technique.

On the other hand, in the process of S3555, when it is determined that the selected game and the executed game do not match (S3555: No), a display instruction command for indicating a comment for changing the current game method is set (S3557). reference). Here, for example, when the selected game is in the challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the executed game is in the safe mode (weak right-handed game), "strongly right-handed" is used to change the game method. The characters are displayed in the game guidance area 859. As a result, when changing the game method from the currently being executed game method to a desired game method, it is possible to easily grasp the adjustment content that must be specifically executed.

Then, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S3551: No), further, when the process of S3556 or the process of S3557 is completed, the other effect update process is executed (S3558), and the present End the process. In the process of S3558, among the various effect update processes that can be executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the corresponding process is executed.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the first advantageous game (strong right) in which the player executes the lottery of the first special symbol in the advantageous state (probability change state, time saving state) which is the advantageous game state. It is configured so that the player can select either the hitting game) or the second advantageous advantage (weak right hitting game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Then, both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the lottery of the special symbol is more easily executed than when the normal state is set as the game state.

With this configuration, the player selects one advantageous game from a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which a lottery of a special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state during the advantageous state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, regardless of which game the player selects, it is possible to make it easier to execute the lottery of the special symbol than in the normal state, so that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the game method. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the player can select a game method in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the termination conditions of the advantageous state are different for a plurality of game methods that the player can select. It is configured in. Specifically, the number of fluctuations that is established when the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) as the time saving end condition in which the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the advantageous state and the time saving state is ended. In addition to the end condition, the first special is set by setting the winning number end condition that is established when the number of times the small hit is won (the small hit game is executed) reaches the predetermined number (1 time) in the special symbol lottery. The lottery of symbols is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, that is, It is possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot (continuation rate) during an advantageous state.

Further, among a plurality of advantageous games that can be selected by the player, if a jackpot is won in the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is difficult to continue, the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than in the first advantageous game. The content of the jackpot game is set so that the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game is larger than that when the jackpot is won in. Specifically, the jackpot is won during the first advantageous game. In that case (if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol), the jackpot game for 12 rounds is executed, and if the jackpot is won during the second advantageous game (the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). (If you win), the jackpot game for 10 rounds is configured to be executed.

As a result, the player can easily end the advantageous state but has a large privilege at the time of winning the big hit, and the advantageous state is harder to end than the first advantageous game, but the privilege at the time of winning the big hit is small. It is possible to select either an advantageous game or an advantageous game. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a desired game method according to the time that can be spent in the game and the player's own convenience such as the current condition, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state is used as the advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic state may be set as the advantageous state. That is, as the probability variation end condition at which the probability variation state ends, the variation count end condition and the winning count end condition can be set, and the probability variation end condition is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the ease of establishment of is different. Even in such a configuration, the same effect as in the case where the above-mentioned time saving state is set as an advantageous state can be obtained.

When the probability change state is used as the advantageous state, the first probability change end condition in which the normal state is set and the second probability change end condition in which the time saving state is set are set in advance when the probability change end condition is satisfied. It is advisable to set it so that the transition destination of the game state differs depending on the end condition established earlier. In this case, for example, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a game state which is more disadvantageous than the probability change state is set, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the game is more advantageous than the probability change state. It is preferable to configure the game performance in each game state so that the state is set.

Specifically, the first probability variation end condition is satisfied when the fluctuation count end condition is satisfied, and the second probability variation end condition is satisfied when the winning count end condition is satisfied. , Special figure 1 change number end condition that is satisfied when the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches 50 times, and special figure 2 change number end condition that is satisfied when the change of the second special symbol reaches 80 times. , The first special symbol or the total number of fluctuations ending condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times may be set.

With this configuration, the game specifications can be further different between the first advantageous game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is possible to strengthen the meaning of letting the player select the game method. Further, since the condition for ending the total number of fluctuations is set, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively executing the game in the advantageous state by alternately executing the plurality of advantageous games.

Further, regarding the winning count end condition, the special figure 1 winning count end condition that is satisfied when the first advantageous game is executed, and the special figure 2 winning count end condition that is satisfied when the second advantageous game is executed. By setting so as to be different, the game specifications can be further different.

In the fifth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous state (time saving state) is made different according to the type of the special symbol, and the game method in the advantageous state for the player (the special symbol that executes the lottery during the advantageous state). It is configured to provide various games to the player by letting the player select the type), but the end condition of the time saving state is not limited to this, for example, even if it depends on the big hit type when the big hit is won. It is good to configure it so that it can be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games in an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, regardless of which gaming method is selected during the advantageous state, the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (that is, that is). The amount of benefits (number of prize balls) in the case of winning one big hit is divided by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous state is continuously set when the advantageous state is set once) is equivalent. However, when using a configuration in which the end conditions of the advantageous state are different based on the jackpot type in addition to the special symbol type as described above, the winning jackpot type is used. It is preferable to configure so that the expected value of the amount of privilege given to the player is larger when the one advantageous game is selected than when the second advantageous game is selected. As a result, it becomes possible to greatly differ the subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), and a probability variation state (probability change state). It is configured so that four states of special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) can be set, and the degree of advantage for the player is different. The configuration is such that a plurality of probabilistic states and a plurality of time saving states having different degrees of advantage can be set.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, the player who wins the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be given more benefits to the player. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, more prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. , The rate of transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is high (the jackpot type capable of passing through the probabilistic switch 65e3 described later is easily selected).

Then, as the probabilistic state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, compared to the probabilistic state 1). A (relatively advantageous) probability variation state 2 is provided. In addition, as the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed (that is, compared to the time saving state 1). (Relatively advantageous) time saving state 2 is provided.

In this way, even when the same game state is set, the type of special symbol that is easy to draw is configured to be switchable, and the prize ball that can be obtained according to the details of the set game state. By making the amount and the rate of transition to the probabilistic state different, it is possible to play the game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. The probability variation state 1 is a state in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol height. It is a state in which the probability state 2 (time saving state 2) is combined.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) in the time saving state are prepared, and the operation (opening) of the electric accessory 701 is set. Based on the pattern, it is configured so that the special symbol that is easy to execute the lottery can be changed during the time saving state. The operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is variably set based on the winning jackpot type.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the special symbol in which the lottery (variation) is likely to be executed during the time saving state based on the winning jackpot type, so that it is possible to provide the player with various playability. can. Further, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving states for ending the time saving state are established based on the lottery of special symbols.

Specifically, as the variation number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the special figure 1 variation number end condition that is established based on the variation number of the first special symbol and the variation number of the second special symbol are based. The special figure 2 change number end condition, and the total change number end condition that is established based on the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. 1 The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times as the condition of ending the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, and 100 times is the number of fluctuations corresponding to the condition of ending the total number of fluctuations. It is set.

Furthermore, as a condition for ending the number of winnings that is established when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the special figure 1 that is established based on the special figure 1 small hit (small hit A) that is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. The condition for ending the number of winnings and the condition for ending the number of winnings for Special Figure 2 which is established based on the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) won by the lottery of the second special symbol are set. As a result, the number of winnings is set to 2 times, and the number of winnings is set to 20 times as a condition for ending the number of winnings in Special Figure 2.

With this configuration, the game in which the time saving state is likely to end (the time saving in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is easily performed) is easy according to the type of the special symbol in which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state. A game) and a game in which the time saving state is difficult to end (a time saving game in which a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is easily performed) can be set.

The time saving end condition set for each special symbol in the sixth embodiment may be such that the ease of ending the time saving state differs depending on the type of the special symbol, and each of the above-described embodiments may be used. Any of the specific examples used in (shown) may be adopted, and the small hit probability in the time saving state may be different depending on the special symbol type, or multiple types may be selected for the small hits that can be won by the special symbol lottery. In the configuration in which the winning count end condition is set for each small hit type, the probability that any of the winning count end conditions is satisfied may be different for each special symbol type.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state end conditions (time saving end conditions) for terminating the advantageous state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, can be set and set. It is configured so that the ease of establishing the advantageous state end condition differs depending on the type of state. Then, a plurality of advantageous states having different easiness of establishing the advantageous state end condition are configured to be transferred based on the winning jackpot type.

As a result, it is possible for the player to play a game in various advantageous states via a plurality of jackpot winnings. Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the player has a special advantageous state in which the player can be transferred only when the jackpot is won a plurality of times from the state in which the normal state is set, a plurality of jackpot wins are given to the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game so as to shift to a special advantageous state by passing through.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured to set a gaming state (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) having different expectations for shifting to a special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a gaming state (advantageous state) with a high expectation of shifting to a special advantageous state is set, it is possible to facilitate continuous playing of the game, and it is possible to enhance the operation of the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 110 is provided in the main control device 110. The first embodiment is a partial change in the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223, a partial process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, in the sixth embodiment, the configurations of the lower side and the right side region of the variable display device unit 80 are different from those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. doing. Specifically, there are two first entrances (first entrance 64a1, right side first) that trigger the lottery of the first special symbol as the entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbols. The point that the ball entry port 64a0) and the second ball entry port 64b that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are provided, that is, the point that three entry ports that trigger the lottery of the special symbol are provided. It's different.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64a1 is on the lower side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, and the second ball is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the right side of the front view. The mouth 64b is provided with a right first ball entry port 64a2 on the right side of the front view with respect to the right second ball entry port 64b.

At both the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. That is, the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 are ball entry ports having the same function. On the other hand, the right second ball entry port 64b has a function different from that of the above-mentioned two types of ball entry ports because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a first operating accessory 645a is attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2. The first operating accessory 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the right first entry port 64a2, and the ball cannot enter the right first entry port 64a2 (). It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be variable to a closed state (difficult). The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

Similarly, a second operating accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. This second operating accessory 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter (easily) enter the right second entry port 64b, and the ball cannot enter the right second entry port 64b (). It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be variable to a closed state (difficult). The second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning device 700. On the other hand, the second operating accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when the ball enters the right second entrance.

In the sixth embodiment, a first operating combination formed of a pair of blade-shaped members as a regulating member for restricting the entry of a ball into the right first entry port 64a2 and the right second entry port 64b. An object 645a and a second operating accessory 645b are provided, but any object may be used as long as the ease of entering the ball into each entry port can be changed. For example, the object is positioned in a protruding state protruding from the game board 13. By doing so, the ball may be restricted from entering the ball entry port, and the ball may be variable so as to be allowed to enter the ball entry port by being located in the buried state buried in the game board 13. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the operating accessory is in the closed state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the corresponding (attached) entry port, but it is complete. Instead of closing the ball until it cannot enter the ball, it may be changed so that the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operating accessory 645 can be positioned in two states, an open state and a closed state, but is configured to be variable to three or more states. Is also good. Further, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which an operating accessory is attached to each of the right first entrance ball opening 64a2 and the right second entrance ball opening 64b is used, but other configurations are used. For example, by changing one operating object to the first state, it is easy for a ball to enter one of the entrances (it is easier to enter than the other entrance), and the other is easy to enter. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the mouth (it is difficult to enter the ball from one of the entrances) and changing it to a second state different from the first state, one of the balls enters, contrary to the above-mentioned first state. Make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening (difficult to enter from the other entry port) and make it easier for the ball to enter the other entry port (easier to enter from one entry port). It may be configured as. As a result, it is possible to change the degree of ball entry to the plurality of entry ports according to the operation content of one operating accessory.

A distribution winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered the inside to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, if the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (if the ball enters), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entry ball is entered. The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (if the ball enters), the second operating accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance is switched to the open state and goes to the right second entrance 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution winning device 700 provided in the right region of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured so that a ball can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined toward the lower left direction in the front view, so that the ball reaching the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction. do. Further, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 701 has an open state (immersive state) in which the ball can enter the inside of the distribution winning device 700 (easy) and a closed state (protruding state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And can be switched. The electric accessory 701 is set to the open state when it is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. Since the first operating port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the ball flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first operating port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the ball flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second operating port 707. Further, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 branch, a flow path through which the ball that has entered the inside of the distribution winning device 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is set as a switching valve ( (Variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706 (slide displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left side in the front view to block the upstream side of the second flow path, and only the first flow path is open. Proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right side in the front view to block the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hits for a predetermined period (for example, the normal symbol hits). ) Has elapsed, and the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Further, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after switching to the second switching state, the switching state is switched to the first switching state again.

If the ball can be entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can be entered into the right second operating port 64b. That is, it is advantageous for the player because the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high rate of being given the probability variation state of the special symbol when it becomes a big hit, can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the flow direction of the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first actuating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first actuating port 704. The first actuating port 704 is composed of a known non-electric accessory, that is, the first actuating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first actuating port 704. Can be done. Further, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entry port 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second actuating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first actuating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second operating accessory 645b is in the open state, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entry port 64b.

In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball is entered into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a, or the first operating accessory 645a, or the first. 2 The operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery, it is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operating port 704 or enters the second operating port 707. You can pay attention to the crab. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) are provided for the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701. When the open pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the hit of the normal symbol is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Will be done. Then, after the open state for 0.1 seconds is set, the hit state ends. Since the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state during the opening period of 1 second, the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. .. On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period is the second operating port 707. It is distributed to. However, since it is difficult to let the ball enter during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, in many cases, the ball entering the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is It is distributed to the first operating port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, if the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for an extremely short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the hit of the normal symbol is started, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, the hit state ends after the open state is set for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second). During the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period moves to the first operating port 704. It is sorted. However, as described above, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter during the extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, in the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period moves to the second operating port 707. It is sorted. Therefore, in many cases, the ball that has entered the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is distributed to the second operating port 707, and the right second entry port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage for the player can be different depending on the set opening pattern, so that the opening pattern can be made interested every time the normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the gaming state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state), the time saving state 1, and the probability change state 1, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 when the normal symbol hits. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the opening pattern B is set when the normal drawing is hit. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability change state 2, it is difficult for the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are easy to be executed can be different depending on the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 169. A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is obtained by a big hit lottery performed due to a ball entering (winning) into the first ball opening 64a1, the right first ball opening 64a2, or the right second ball opening 64b (winning), After a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is as described above in the first embodiment, but for convenience of explanation. In the sixth embodiment, the reference numerals of "650" are added to the reference numerals of "650" in FIGS. 4 to 6. Although details will be omitted, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry device 65 during the jackpot is a switch used in place of the probability change switch 65e3 (the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above). ), The probability change state is given after the jackpot ends, and in this respect, it is functionally different from the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment described above. Since the other configurations and functions are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 174 (a) is included in the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1, and FIG. 174 (b) shows the contents of the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 included in the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure. The selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. When a big hit is made in, it is referred to to determine the big hit type.

First, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 included in the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the selection table 202b1 for special drawing 1. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. The pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (providing the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path is opened). Since the player continuously launches balls toward the variable winning device 65 at the jackpot, one or more balls can be made to flow down to the probability change switch 65e3 in 5 seconds. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit, the probability change state is given after the big hit.

That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 1 (a gaming state in which the special symbol high probability state 1 and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, the time saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol) after the jackpot ends. High probability state 1) is given. Although the jackpot A is likely to be in a probabilistic state, the probabilistic state to be given is the probabilistic state 1, and it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the probabilistic state. It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

A jackpot B is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49". This jackpot B has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 (normal symbol high probability state 2) after the jackpot. Is a jackpot type to which is given. When the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot, the probability variation state 2 (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state 2) of the special symbol is given after the jackpot.

That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 2 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot B ends. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because it is easy to shift to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in terms of the prize ball, it is less than the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, so that it is disadvantageous in the prize spherical surface.

A jackpot C is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 94". This jackpot C has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. The pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability change switch in the variable winning device 65). It is an operation pattern (the flow path provided with 65e3 is opened). Even if the ball is inserted at the same time as the 4th round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the probabilistic solenoid 65k within 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the sphere reaches the probabilistic solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the jackpot C, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since it is less than the case where a big hit is made in the lottery, it is the most disadvantageous big hit type for the player.

A jackpot D is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 94". This jackpot D has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. The probability change state is not given, and the prize ball is also less than when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, but since the time saving state 2 where the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is given, the big hit D Is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Next, the selection table 202b2 for special drawing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (b). FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the selection table 202b2 for special drawing 2. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 also defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first hit type counter C2, as in the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. Although the jackpot E is likely to be in a probabilistic state, the probabilistic state to be given is the probabilistic state 1, and it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the probabilistic state. Compared to jackpot B and jackpot F), the state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous.

A jackpot F is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 79". This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. .. The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because it is easy to shift to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. Also, in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls than in the case of a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

A jackpot G is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 84". This jackpot G has 15 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol.

The jackpot H is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "85-94". This jackpot H has 15 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. Although the probability variation state is not given, the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, so that the jackpot H is more advantageous than the jackpot C and the jackpot G. Also, the prize spherical surface is more advantageous than winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As described above, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type has a different number of rounds and a game state after the jackpot, the player can pay attention to which jackpot type will be used when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, depending on whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the jackpot type that is the operation pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 It's different. That is, it is advantageous for the player to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol because many prize balls can be won. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the big hit types (big hits E and F) that are the operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 80%, whereas the first In the special symbol lottery, the percentage of jackpot types (big hits A and B) that are operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 50%. Therefore, the one who wins the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be in a probable change state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, whether the lottery to be executed is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. You can make the game play by paying attention to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of the high-probability state of the normal symbol is changed according to the winning jackpot type. Specifically, the normal symbol high probability state 1 and the normal symbol high probability state 2 can be set. Then, in addition to the normal state as the game state, the probability variation state 1 in which the normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the high probability state of the special symbol, and the probability variation state 2 in which the normal symbol high probability state 2 is set are special. Five types of gaming states can be set, including a time-saving state 1 in which the normal symbol high-probability state 1 is set and a time-saving state 2 in which the normal symbol high-probability state 2 is set for the low-probability state of the symbol. It is configured.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172, a method of shifting the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in the sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big hit is made, a new game state is set after the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 172, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probability non-time saving state), it basically shifts to the probability variation state 1 (unless the launch of the ball is stopped during the jackpot) and becomes the jackpot B. Then, it shifts to the probability change state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is reached, the time saving state 1 is set, and when the jackpot D is reached, the time saving state 2 is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is the time saving state 1 (time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) and the probability change state 1 (probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state). Although the illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of times of the time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, when the game state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the jackpot E is reached, the game shifts to the probability variation state 1 and when the jackpot F is reached. , It shifts to the most advantageous probability change state 2, and when it becomes a jackpot G, it shifts to a time saving state 1, and when it becomes a jackpot H, it shifts to a time saving state 2 (loops the time saving state 2). Further, as shown in FIG. 172, even in the probability change state 2 (the probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the same state transition as in the time saving state 2 is performed. Although the illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probability change state 2, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of times of the time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203ab, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, probability variation counter 203zz, probability variation setting flag 203zzs, probability variation passing counter 203zzt1, winning number counter 203zzt2, operation counter 203zzt3, counter buffer 203zz, remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4, remaining ball timer 203zzt5 , Probability variation effective flag 203zzt6, probability variation effective timer 203zzt7, discharge number counter 203zzt8, time saving medium counter 203zu, time saving identification flag 203zx, jackpot flag 203zi, and other memory area 203z.

Of these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 (through gate), and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203za is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value of 4 is added by 1. Will be done. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 zb (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is It is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203za.

The probability variation counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation counter 203zg is set to zero, and the timing at which the specific entry port (large opening port) 65a or the second specific entry port 650a is closed in the final round of the jackpot in the main controller 110 ( That is, when the probability change flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the end timing of the jackpot), that is, when the game ball enters the probability change port 900a and the game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown), 100 is set. Will be done.

In the sixth embodiment, the ball flows down a specific area (the area for the probability change switch 65e3 to detect the ball) during the jackpot game, so that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability variation). A predetermined value is set in the counter 203 zg), but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability change state is automatically set after the jackpot game is completed according to the type of jackpot won. You may.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is larger than 0, it is special based on the first random number table for high probability. While the symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation counter 203 zg is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for the low probability time.

As described above, the counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is turned on, the jackpot game in which the distribution winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The probability change setting flag 203zzs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (the probability change switch 65e3 has detected the game ball during the jackpot game). Whether or not). Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203r is set to off based on the on. The probability variation setting flag 203zzs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

The probability variation passing counter 203zzt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged by the total of the probability variation passing counter 203zt1 and the discharge number counter 203zt8 described later. The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3. Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203zzt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203zt2) and the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the discharging number counter 203zzt8 and the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1) After it is determined whether and match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203zzt3 is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot C, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203zzt3, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0. The operation counter 203zzt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zzt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zzt5, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to do.

The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 discharges the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one of the preset rounds is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the door has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203zzt5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zzt5 (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match. NS. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual state, and the jackpot C is used. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is required to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. Indicates that it is less than an hour. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probabilistic valid timer 203zzt7 is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203zzt6 is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203zzt7, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probabilistic change effective timer 203zzt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probabilistic change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the ball is allowed to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined.

The time-saving medium counter 203zu is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203zu is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state is changed to 100 times.

The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If 0 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that the time saving state is 1 (probability variation state 1). The time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 even in the normal state where it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol as in the time saving state 1. On the other hand, when 1 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is the time saving state 2 (probability variation state 2). When the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball is entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operating port 704, and the ball can enter the left first entry port 64a2.

On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 1, when the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operating port 707, and the ball can enter the left second entry port 64b. At the end of the big hit, the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big hit. Further, 0 is set when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time saving medium counter 203zu becomes 0).

In the normal state (non-probability non-time saving state), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 because the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in the non-time saving state (so-called right-handed). This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol. In the normal state, it is difficult to put the ball into the right second entrance 64b because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, but in the case of a big hit, the rate of the special symbol is 80%. Since it will be in a probabilistic state, the merit in the case of a big hit will be greater. Therefore, there is a possibility of inducing an irregular game method.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is low, and the open pattern A is set even if the hit occurs. It can be in a state where there is no merit for a person to perform a right-handed strike. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to perform a left-handed hit, so that an irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 177. In the sixth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to store the reserved ball, and the height of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed. It differs from the fact that the probability state can be set.

First, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation processing 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol 1 N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab (variation in the special symbol 2). The display hold count N2) is acquired (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball for variable display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is larger than 0 (Z204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0. If it is determined (Z204: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (Z209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no reserved ball for variable display in the special symbol, and this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is larger than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (Z205). ), Set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation (Z206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the processing of Z207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display. The detailed description of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be omitted.

Further, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is determined to be 0 (Z204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined to be larger than 0. (Z209: Yes) performs the same processing as the above-described processing for the holding ball of the special symbol 2 for the holding ball of the special symbol 1. The detailed description of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing will be omitted.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (Z214: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (Z214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z213). When this special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing or special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the processing of Z216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the result of this lottery) is special. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (Z217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set to on (Z218), the jackpot start command is set (Z220), the time saving / medium counter 203zu, and the probability variation counter 203zg. The value of is reset (Z271), and the process proceeds to Z222.

The jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218 causes the process in the jackpot game to be executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). Since the specific description is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot start command set in the Z220 process is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. As a result, a display suggesting the start of a big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made to recognize that the special gaming state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update processing (see S219 in FIG. 38) as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special design is performed. Information is updated for the change count end condition that is satisfied based on the change count of the symbol. After finishing the processing of S219, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is larger than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the probability variation is determined. The value of the counter 203 zg is subtracted by 1 (Z224), the same processing of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the processing is transferred to Z222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203 zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S220.

In the processing of Z222, a stop command is set to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of Z216, with the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81. Is done (Z222). When the processing of Z222 is completed, the main processing is completed.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in the special symbol variation processing 6 of the sixth embodiment as well, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won as in the first embodiment described above, and when the small hit is won, the case is determined. Is executed for the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the winning small hit. With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the time saving end is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number as a condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol). In addition to the condition (variation number end condition), it is possible to set a time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is established when the number of small hits won in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. The sixth embodiment is configured to be able to set a high-probability state of a special symbol in addition to the high-probability state of a normal symbol as a game state to be set after the end of the jackpot. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (value set in the probability variation counter zg) set in advance is set as the upper limit. In this way, when a game state (probability change state) other than the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state ends with respect to the game state (probability change state). It may be configured to set conditions.

In this case, as a condition for ending the probabilistic state, a probabilistic end condition different from the above-mentioned time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state may be set. For example, the number of times is smaller than the time-saving end condition. It is advisable to set the number of winnings as a probability change end condition.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the requirements that cause the probability variation end condition to be satisfied and the requirements that cause the time reduction end condition to be satisfied to be different. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the probabilistic end condition and the time saving end condition is satisfied first. Therefore, for example, whether or not the probability change end condition has already been satisfied when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the state where the lottery of the special symbol is easy to execute is changed to the state where it is difficult to execute). It is possible to assume (whether or not the symbol has shifted from a state in which it is easy to win a big hit to a state in which it is difficult to win).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the game state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is a time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) and a probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol). As the end condition of each game state, the change number end condition (time reduction state change number end condition, probability change state change number end condition) is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number. ), It is configured to set the winning count end condition (time saving state winning count end condition, probability change state winning count end condition) that is established when the number of winnings in a predetermined small hit reaches the predetermined number. Therefore, unlike the game property of only whether or not to shift from a game state that is advantageous to the player to a game state that is unfavorable to the player, the end of the time saving state (establishment of the time saving end condition) and the end of the probability change state (probability change end condition). (Establishment of), and it is possible to shift to various gaming states.

Therefore, for the player, one end condition (for example, a time saving end condition) is satisfied before the other end condition (for example, a probability variation end condition), and after one end condition is satisfied, the other end condition is satisfied. The period until the condition is satisfied (for example, the latent probability period) may be configured to be the most advantageous gaming period for the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game property in which the player is allowed to play the game while expecting that the end condition for ending the game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, which is one of the game states, is satisfied. ..

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed according to the set time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol). It is configured so that a time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed can be set. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to obtain the lottery result which is advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, from the normal state, it is easy to shift to the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and from the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured so that it is easy to shift to a time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a more advantageous gaming state for the player by shifting a plurality of gaming states via a jackpot or the like, so that the most advantageous game for the player. You can expect to play the game in the state. Further, in this case, only when the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability change end condition in the state where the probability change state (probability change state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set. It is preferable to configure the game so as to shift to the most advantageous game state for the player.

As a result, a game state that is advantageous to the player is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, and further, the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. When a specific end condition for terminating is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, and when other than a specific end condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a disadvantageous gaming state. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, the specific end condition for terminating the gaming state advantageous to the player and the end condition other than the specific end condition used in the sixth embodiment will be described in each of the above-described embodiments. The various termination conditions described above may be applied, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). The jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off in the processing of Z1301 (Z1301: No), it is not necessary to control the jackpot, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371). If it is determined in the processing of Z1371 that it is the start timing of the jackpot, (Z1371: Yes), the opening command is set (Z1372), and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of Z1371, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374). If it is determined in the processing of Z1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k are set. The jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (Z1375), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the release operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set release scenario, and based on the read release scenario (data). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set. Then, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376). ).

In the processing of Z1376, if it is determined that the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is (Z1376: Yes), the state of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377). End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378). ).

If it is determined in the process of Z1378 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (Z1379), and this process is terminated. The details of the ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

In the processing of Z1378, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378: No), the winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), the abnormality processing 6 is executed (Z1381), and the present processing is terminated.

When the winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the round is valid. The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period, it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed, the winning number counter 203zt2 is added and updated by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is 10 or more.

When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is 10 or more, the end condition in this round game is satisfied. Therefore, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed, and the remaining Set the ball timer flag 203zzt4 to on. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball ejection time has been reached since the opening / closing door 65f1 was closed.

As described above, in the winning process 6, a process of determining whether or not the round game end condition is satisfied is executed during one round game in the jackpot game. Further, a process of appropriately determining whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 is executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0 and it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is updated by -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, the value of the probability change passage counter 203zzt1 is incremented by 1 and updated. The probability variation setting flag 203zs is set to on. After that, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0. When it is determined that the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off, the probability variation effective flag 203zzt6 is set to on, and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change is changed. It can be controlled so that the game is set.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

Next, as the abnormality process 6 (S1381), a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball is illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3 is executed.

Next, the details of the ending process 6 (Z1379 of FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 6 (Z1379). In the ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to off (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203zz is on (Z4103). When it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203zs is on (Z4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to off based on the probability variation counter 203zg being set to 100. After that, the process proceeds to the Z4105 process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4103, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not on (Z4103: No), the processing of Z4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4105.

In the processing of Z4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game based on any of jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined that the jackpot is A, C, E, or G in the processing of Z4105 (Z4105: Yes), 0 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4105, when it is determined that the jackpot is not any of A, C, E, and G (Z4105: No), 1 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx (Z4107), and the process proceeds to Z4108 processing. do.

By setting the time saving identification flag 203zx to 0 or 1 by the processing of Z4106 or Z4107, the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation processing is switched. When the processing of Z4106 or Z4107 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this processing is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variation state) is given, the type of the time saving state set is set differently depending on the jackpot type. As a result, in the time saving state executed after the jackpot game, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first operating port 704 or enters the second operating port 707. It is possible to switch between the right first entry port 64a2 and the right second entry port 64b depending on the jackpot type.

Therefore, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed by the first special symbol or the lottery is executed by the second special symbol in the time saving state. Then, by setting different advantages given to the player in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player can be changed depending on the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the probability variation rate, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of time reductions, the fluctuation time, etc. are defined as the first special symbol. The privilege may be set differently by setting differently from the second special symbol. In addition, with the configuration as in this embodiment, even in the probability-changing game state with the same jackpot probability, the type of the special symbol that fluctuates during the time-saving (during probabilistic change) is switched depending on the type of the time-saving state to be given. It is possible to change the benefits that the player can receive in the probabilistic game state. Therefore, it is possible to set a probabilistic game state in which a plurality of granted benefits are different. Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of hit types of the second special symbol is set to be larger than that of the first special symbol, the types of jackpots guided by the probability variation switch 65e3 can be set to a plurality of probability variation ratios. Therefore, the probability variation rate can be changed depending on the time saving state, and the player can be provided with a fresh game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, there is a condition (end) in which the time saving state (probability change state) ends depending on the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Ease) is different. Therefore, the advantage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed.

In addition, in the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, a game in which the player executes a lottery of the first special symbol and a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be selected and configured. It was configured so that a game corresponding to a game method selected by a person could be played. That is, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (a game that executes a lottery for the first special symbol, a game that executes a lottery for the second special symbol) can be executed. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, a time saving state), one game (for example, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol) can be executed (for example, a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed). A game state in which the time saving state 1) is set, and in the state in which the time saving state 1 is set, the other game (for example, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol is executed) can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (Time saving state 2) can be set. With this configuration, different gaming states can be set and provided to the player in a stepwise manner. Therefore, a game having a higher capture element than the above-described second and fifth embodiments. Machines can be provided.

With this configuration, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the time saving state 1 is set, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied as compared with the lottery of the second special symbol. Configure to make it easier. Specifically, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is 30 times, and the condition for ending the number of winnings when the number of small hits is won twice by the lottery for the first special symbol. Is configured to hold.

Then, in a part of the case where the jackpot of the special symbol is won during the period in which the time saving state 1 is continuously set, the time saving state 2 (after the jackpot game ends) after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends) It is configured so that the time saving state in which the lottery is executed) is set. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end condition is configured to be more difficult to be satisfied than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol is 100. The condition for ending the number of times of change is satisfied when the number of times is reached, and the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied when the small hit is won 20 times by the lottery of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, once the time saving state 2 is reached, the time saving state is more likely to continue than in the case of the time saving state 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a time saving state in which the degree of the game is different. In the above-mentioned example, the time saving state is shown as an example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and may be used for the probability changing state, and the end conditions of the probability changing state and the time saving state respectively. May be managed independently, and for example, a gaming state (latent state), which is a normal symbol low probability state, may be set in a special symbol high probability state.

Further, as the end condition of the gaming state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, either the end condition set in each of the above-described embodiments or the assumed end condition may be adopted, or a plurality of them may be combined. Is also good.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage differs depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol. 2 It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to win a big hit in the lottery of special symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. The time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (the ball is easily entered into the right first ball entry port 64a2), and the time saving state 2 is the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Is easy to execute (the ball is easy to enter into the right second entry port 64b), which is a time saving state. More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit is made, the ball is easily entered into the first operating port 704 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is easily opened) and is electrically operated. The accessory 701 is released. Therefore, by hitting the right ball in the time saving state 1, the ball can easily enter the right first ball entry port 64a1, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when a hit is made, the electric accessory 701 is easily entered into the second operating port 707 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the second operating accessory 645b is easily released). Is released. Therefore, by hitting the right side in the time saving state 2, the ball can easily enter the right second entry port 64b, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability change switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the jackpot type that allows the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot by changing the internal flow path and the jackpot type. A jackpot type is provided so that the ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult). Then, depending on whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of the jackpot types that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is changed, so that the probability change state of the special symbol is reached. The configuration is such that the rate of transition is variable. That is, the configuration is such that a person who wins a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to shift to a probabilistic state than a case where a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is the operating port (first). More attention can be paid to whether the ball enters the operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probabilistic state as well as the time saving state. That is, a probability-changing state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and a probability-changing state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. A plurality of probabilistic states in which the rate of transition to the probabilistic state differs depending on whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the degree of advantage is also different for the probabilistic state to be given. Is provided, so that the game can be performed aiming at a better state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed (lottery) according to a predetermined regularity. As in the fourth embodiment, it may be used for a gaming machine having a configuration in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed independently.

In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the types of special symbols to which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state are completely separated according to the type of the time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) to be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery (variation) frequency of each special symbol may be made different according to the type of the time saving state to be set. For example, when the time saving state A is set, the time saving state B is such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed twice to the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When the time saving state C is set, the ratio of the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol to the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol three times is set. Is configured so that only the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed, and when the time saving state D is set, only the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various playability according to the time saving state set.

Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used, and in a normal game state, a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) Will be executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first entry opening 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened is executed when the jackpot is won. At the same time, depending on the type of jackpot won, the probability of winning a jackpot by the special figure lottery after the jackpot game ends becomes high, and the probability fluctuation game state (hereinafter referred to as the probabilistic state) or the probability variation state in which the special figure lottery is easily received or The probability of winning a jackpot does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a special drawing lottery is given.

Although detailed description will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability change state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability change state and a probability change state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. 2 and are provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the lottery of Special Figure 2 is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is large, or 1 after the jackpot game is completed. It is set so that it is easy to shift to a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit with a large number of balls that can be obtained by the big hit game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probabilistic state 1 that is more advantageous than the normal game for the player and a probabilistic state 2 that is more advantageous than the probabilistic state 1. As a result, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probabilistic state is increased (it is easy to enter the probable change state 1), and it is easy for the player to experience the game state (probability change state) in which the player is more likely to hit the jackpot than the normal game. This makes it easier to experience the effect during the jackpot game and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the probabilistic state, makes it possible to entertain the game, and reduces the rate of transition to the probabilistic state 2. However, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority to the player who has transitioned to the probability change state 2, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set even in the time saving state as in the above-mentioned probability change state, and both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are higher than the normal game. A game state in which it is easy to receive a special figure lottery (a ball is easy to enter into the entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and a fluctuation time shorter than that in the normal game state is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured so that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is configured so that the lottery of the special drawing 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a game state that is more advantageous to the player.

When such a pachinko machine 10 is used, the configuration of the game board 13 may be as follows. That is, to explain with reference to FIG. 169, when the game state shifts to the probabilistic state or the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) is displayed. The target game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69 and is in the vicinity of the through gate (normal entry port) 67 or the through gate (normal entry port) 67. It passes between the planted nails and flows down toward the distribution winning device 700. An electric accessory 710 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and the ball is configured to be able to enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 is a hit. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and it is preferable to configure the electric accessory 710 so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning device 700 is different.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the configuration inside the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 falls on the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the winning (per drawing) as a result of the drawing lottery, and the first switching valve 702 is determined by the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after winning the prize. As described above, the switching valve 702 may be operated, and the first flow path 703 may be operated so as to communicate with each other during the other period.

As described above, the mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using the electric configuration is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technique already disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the distribution winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is driven by the operation of the second operating mechanism 708 in the same manner as the configuration of the non-electric accessory described above. 2 The operating accessory 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entry port 64b, which allows the ball to enter when the second operating accessory 645b is opened, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageous than the special figure 1 is performed. Will be executed. Regarding the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the second actuating port 707, the second actuating mechanism 708, and the second actuating accessory 645b, the first actuating port 704, the first actuating mechanism 705, and the first actuating accessory 645b described above are described. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electric accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period, that is, from the time when the above-mentioned switching valve 702 is elected per normal figure to the time when 1.5 seconds have passed and 3.5 seconds have passed (2 seconds). It is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706 that the first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other and the first flow path 703 is operated to communicate with each other during other periods (including the period during which the normal drawing is not won). Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second operating accessory 645b, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed due to an illegal game. Because.

Further, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13, when the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b can be entered by the ball entered in the distribution winning device 700, the distribution is performed. It is preferable that the ball that has flowed down the right side region of the game board 13 without entering the winning device 700 is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any of the entry openings in which the ball can be entered.

Further, a switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and the switching valve 702 is after winning a normal drawing. , It is configured to operate to a position where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is configured so that a constant operation is executed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided. The operation is configured to be executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. This makes it possible to guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball is released from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

According to the alternative example described above, the opening pattern of the electric service (electric accessory) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the opening pattern of the electric service (electric accessory) is set. It is possible to set a gaming state in which FIG. 1 substantially fluctuates and a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates. Furthermore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery than to win the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery (the number of balls that can be obtained by the big hit game is large, which is practically special. The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is set to be granted.

As a result, the time saving state and the probabilistic state are further favored by the player in the gaming state (time saving state 2, probabilistic change state 2), which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state but more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, by setting a high transition rate of transition from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability change state. By making it possible, or by setting a low transition rate to shift to the probabilistic state 2 which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, it is possible to give a superiority complex to the player who has transitioned to the probabilistic state 2. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game for the player.

It should be noted that two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the setting is not limited to this, and three or more types of opening patterns can be set. You may. This makes it possible to set a wider variety of gaming states.

Further, as an opening pattern of the electric service (motor accessory), an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding the ball to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) for guiding the ball to the second flow path 706. However, for example, an opening pattern may be provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, further improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is configured to enter any of the operating ports (first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). For example, the distribution winning device 700 A flow that allows the ball to be discharged from the game board 13 to the game board 13 again, or to enter the ball into the out port that communicates with the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering the ball at each operating port. A road may be provided. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the flow of the ball in the distribution winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured so that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed. For example, the switching valve 702 always performs a constant operation after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured so that the flow path to be communicated is switched when the number of balls entered in the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). It may be configured so that the flow path communicating with each other is switched when the condition is satisfied.

Further, the ball guided to any of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any of the operating ports. A distribution member for distributing the ball guided to the road to a plurality of flow paths may be provided, and the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member may be configured to enter the corresponding operation port.

In addition, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As a means for varying (extending) the time for the ball that has entered the ball to reach the switching valve 702, there are a plurality of routes having different periods until the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702. A distribution means for distributing the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 to any route may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who can play the game while predicting when the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702 from getting bored with the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of another example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 is based on the jackpot type in which the normal gaming state, the probabilistic state 1 (disadvantageous probabilistic change), the probabilistic change state 2 (advantageous probabilistic change), the time saving state 1 (disadvantageous time saving), and the time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving) are won. It is configured to migrate.

First, in the normal game state, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when the jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability change state 1, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, and 15% shifts to the time saving state 1. 5% shift to the time saving state 2.

Next, in the probability variation state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric service opening pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the probabilistic state 1, if a jackpot is won, 50% loops the probabilistic state 1, 30% shifts to the probabilistic state 2, 15% shifts to the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. In this way, since the probability variation state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal game state, the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state, but the game after the jackpot is won. The transition destination of the state and its distribution are the same.

In the probability variation state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 2). In the probabilistic state 2, if a big hit is won, the probabilistic state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. As described above, the probability variation state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the jackpot probability is set higher than that in the normal game state. Therefore, the game state is most advantageous to the player. Will be.

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 1). In the time-saving state 1, if a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability-changing state 1, 30% shifts to the probability-changing state 2, 15% loops through the time-saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time-saving state 2. In this way, since the time saving state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the normal figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 at the time of hitting the normal figure Although the opening pattern is different from that of the normal gaming state, the transition destination of the gaming state after winning the jackpot and its distribution are the same.

In the time saving state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 2). In the time saving state 2, if the jackpot is won, 80% shifts to the probabilistic state 2, 15% loops through the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. In this way, the time saving state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the probability of shifting to the probabilistic state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won is the normal gaming state. It is a gaming state set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a gaming state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will shift to the most advantageous gaming state (probability variation state 2) than the normal gaming state, and to enthusiastically play the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In addition, the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be only the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play, who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the shift distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probabilistic change state continues until the next big hit, and the time reduction state is given 10 times regardless of the game state. The specification is to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure fluctuates, and by winning the lottery, the probabilistic state changes to the normal game state. It may be configured to be migrated. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal game state is different. You may try to do it.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time reduction end conditions are set, and when the time reduction end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of fluctuations among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, that is, the variation. The time saving state is set to the normal state at different timings depending on whether the number of times end condition is satisfied and the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, that is, the time saving end condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be migrated to.

Using this configuration, for example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the winning count end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time saving ending condition that is satisfied, the total range of the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time when the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the shortened working hours condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the conditions for ending the reduced working hours, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball from entering the ball entrance even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods for which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is advisable to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the shortened working hours end condition that has been established, but also in the more detailed contents of the shortened working hours end condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball number command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured so that the game can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means have been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Short time ends with a small hit)
A discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and an operation that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. The target display executing means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the first display means. When the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the discrimination result is stopped and displayed, it is executed by the small privilege game executing means for executing the small privilege game different from the privilege game and the privilege game executing means. After the privilege game is completed, it is set by a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means. The end condition setting means for setting the end condition of the second gaming state is provided, and the end condition setting means is established based on the fact that the dynamic display is executed a predetermined number of times by the dynamic display execution means. The first termination condition to be performed, the second termination condition that can be established based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being the first discriminating result, and the discriminating result of the discriminating means being the second discriminating result. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is configured so that at least a third termination condition that can be satisfied based on the above can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) predetermined by the type of the privileged game to be executed. There was a problem that the game was easily grasped, it was difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game was continued, and the game tended to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of ending conditions for ending the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be set, so that the period during which the second gaming state is continuously set for the player can be set. It can be made difficult to predict, and has the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine A1, when the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set, the third end A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the conditions are satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated by the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second game state, the player is made to pay close attention to the determination result of the determination means in the second game state. Can be done.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the small privilege game from being excessively executed during the second game state.

In the gaming machine A2, the discriminating means also discriminates the first discriminating result and the third discriminating result different from the second discriminating result, and the small privilege game executing means has the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the small privilege game is executed even when the third determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to execute a small privilege game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, the second game state can be changed only by grasping the number of small privilege games executed during the second game state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period that is continuously set, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, as the second discrimination result, the discriminating means causes the small privilege game executing means to execute the first small privilege game, and the small privilege game executing means causes the small privilege game executing means to execute the first small privilege game. At least the special second determination result different from the specific second determination result for executing the second small privilege game different from the one small privilege game is determined, and the number of times determined from the specific second determination result is The third end condition is satisfied when the first predetermined number of times is reached, or when the number of times determined as the special second determination result is a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. A4 gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end condition of a different number of times can be set according to the type of the small privilege game, the second game state continues only by grasping the number of small privilege games executed during the second game state. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A4, when the small privilege game is executed, a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and the variable ball entry means thereof. The award game execution means executes the award game even when the amusement ball passes through the specific area, and has a specific area through which the pachinko ball entered in the above can pass. The ease of passing the game ball to the specific area is different between the case where the first small privilege game is executed by the game execution means and the case where the second small privilege game is executed. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the possibility of ending the second game state and the possibility of executing the privilege game can be different depending on the type of the small privilege game to be executed, so that the small privilege to be executed can be different. The player can be made to pay close attention to the content of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Different working hours conditions for special 1 game and special 2 game)
A first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball-entry means. , When the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the predetermined first determination is executed, the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. Discrimination means for executing a predetermined second discrimination in the case, display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display execution for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. The means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the privilege game execution means executed by the privilege game execution means. After the privilege game is completed, the game state setting means that can set the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means that is set by the game state setting means. The end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second gaming state is provided, and the end condition setting means performs the second determination as the plurality of end conditions rather than executing the first determination. At least sets a first termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed, and a second termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed than when the second determination is executed. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a lottery of special symbols as a lottery of games, and by providing two types of special symbols, it is possible to execute lottery of various games. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine terminates the time saving state when the number of lottery of the special symbol executed during the time saving game reaches a predetermined number of times, the lottery is executed during the time saving state. The time saving state ends under the same conditions regardless of the type. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time saving state tends to be monotonous. In addition, the content of the lottery executed during the reduced working hours is different depending on the type of the special symbol to be drawn, but the game result of whether or not the reduced working hours ends is the special symbol to be drawn. Because it is the same regardless of the type of, it is not possible to make a relationship between the period during which the time saving state continues and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the game tends to be monotonous. There was a problem. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to make the termination condition for terminating the second gaming state different between the case where the first determination is executed and the case where the second determination is executed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine B1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the end condition setting means is at least the said. The determination result end condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the dynamic display end that can be satisfied based on the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. The condition is set, and the discriminating means is characterized in that it is easier to discriminate from the second discriminating result when the second discriminating is executed than when the first discriminating is executed. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is easier to satisfy one of the end conditions for terminating the second game state when the second determination is executed than when the first determination is executed, any of them is performed during the second game state. The player is concerned about the determination being executed and what the determination result was. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine B2, the end condition setting means sets the determination result end condition as the first end condition, and sets the dynamic display end condition as the second end condition. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first determination is executed, the determination result end condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the second determination is executed. That is, although the second determination is more likely to result in the second determination result, it is difficult to satisfy the determination result end condition. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to whether the second determination result is the first determination or the second determination, there is an effect that a game that does not get tired can be provided.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, the second discrimination result type of 1 is determined from a plurality of second discrimination result types as the type of the second discrimination result. It has a second discrimination result type determining means, and the ending condition setting means sets different ending conditions for each of the second discrimination result types determined by the second discrimination result type determining means as the discrimination result ending condition. The gaming machine B4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of predicting the future game, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the second discrimination result type determining means has a case where the discrimination result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result and a case where the discrimination result of the second discrimination is the second discrimination result. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is possible to determine a different second discrimination result type depending on the case.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, it is possible to determine different second discrimination result types between the first discrimination and the second discrimination, so that the first discrimination and the second discrimination can be used for discrimination. There is an effect that the ease of satisfying the result end condition can be easily different.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means is a first dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed as the dynamic display end condition. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it sets a second dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make different termination conditions for ending the second gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display end condition satisfies the end condition when the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches a predetermined number, and the end condition setting means is described. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the dynamic display number of times when the first dynamic display end condition is satisfied and the dynamic display number of times when the second dynamic display end condition is satisfied are set differently. ..

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic display count for satisfying the first dynamic display end condition and the dynamic display count for satisfying the second dynamic display end condition can be made different, the second game state is set. In this case, the ease of ending the second game state can be made different between the game in which the first determination is executed and the game in which the second determination is executed, so that various games are provided. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine B7, the end condition setting means adds up the first dynamic display number executed based on the first determination and the second dynamic display number executed based on the second determination. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it sets an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is established when the total number of dynamic display times reached reaches the upper limit number of times.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the total dynamic display count, which is the sum of the first dynamic display count and the second dynamic display count, reaches the upper limit, the second game state is terminated, so that the second game state is in progress. It is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being excessively executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine B8 has an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determination means is likely to be the first determination result for a specific period when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the predetermined transition condition is The gaming machine B9, which can be established when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantageous state can be set according to the timing at which the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B9 has a special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player when the first gaming state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set. The gaming machine B10 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second gaming state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, the special state is set. This makes it possible to set different gaming states according to the timing at which the second gaming state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second game state within a predetermined period of a specific period, it is a novelty to positively end the second game state which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that various games can be played and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the specific period, a period from the timing when the second game state is set to the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied may be set, or the specific period may be set in the state where the second game state is set. It may be configured to set the period from the time when the condition for satisfying is satisfied to the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic C group> (Remaining short-term production)
A discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means that displays the identification information indicating the first discrimination result. The first game state and the first game state after the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means are completed. A game state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means, and an end condition setting means. A suggestion for suggesting an end condition determining means for determining an end condition that is likely to be satisfied and a period during which the second gaming state is continuously set, among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means. The suggestion effect mode setting means includes a suggestion effect execution means for executing the effect and a suggestion effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and the suggestion effect mode setting means is the end condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode of the suggestion effect is set based on the end condition determined by the determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) predetermined by the type of the privileged game to be executed. There was a problem that the game was easily grasped, it was difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game was continued, and the game tended to be monotonous. Therefore, the applicant has developed a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is continuously set by providing a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this gaming machine, since there are a plurality of termination conditions for ending the time-saving game, it is difficult to notify the player of the remaining period during which the time-saving game is performed, and there is a problem that the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the gaming machine C1, even when a plurality of ending conditions for ending the second gaming state are set, the suggestion effect can be set based on the ending conditions that are likely to be satisfied among them. , There is an effect that the player can easily grasp the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set.

In the gaming machine C1, the ending condition determining means determines the ending condition that is likely to be satisfied based on the execution content of the determining means in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is actually discriminated based on the execution content of the discriminating means, there is an effect that the discriminating accuracy can be improved.

The game machine C2 has an update means for updating predetermined game information based on the execution content of the determination means executed during a period in which the second game state is continuously set, and the end condition setting means. As the plurality of end conditions, the first end condition that can be satisfied when the first game information is updated by the update means and the second game information different from the first game information are updated by the update means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it sets at least a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end condition is set for a plurality of game information that can be established by executing the discriminating means, whether or not the second game state is terminated is grasped based on the execution content of the discriminating means. It can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the suggestion effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C3, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the first game information becomes the first number, and the second end condition is the number of updates of the second game information. Is the second number of times, and based on the game information updated by the update means, the first remaining update number until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end It has a remaining update number discriminating means for discriminating between the second remaining update number until the condition is satisfied, and the end condition discriminating means is an end condition that is easily satisfied according to the discriminating result of the remaining update number discriminating means. The gaming machine C4, which is characterized in that it discriminates between.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the accuracy of the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine C4 has a pre-end condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determining means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the suggestion effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the pre-end condition determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be set according to whether or not the pre-end condition is satisfied by the pre-end condition determination means, until the end condition is satisfied for the player depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. There is an effect that the remaining number of times can be predicted.

In the gaming machine C5, the suggestion effect mode setting means sets a specific suggestion effect mode when it is determined by the determination of the pre-end condition determination means that a plurality of the pre-end conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a specific suggestion effect mode can be set when the pre-end condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player predict the remaining period of the time saving state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming state setting means has a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second gaming state is set, and the suggestion effect mode setting means The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set by the first period setting means, a special suggestion effect mode is set.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the end condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after the second game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion effect mode is set. Can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced by making the player aware of the timing when the end condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period from the time when the second gaming state is set until the number of times of the determination executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine C8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until the elapsed time from the setting of the second gaming state reaches a predetermined time. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time from the setting of the second game state is within the predetermined time, the game is enthusiastically performed in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic D group> (1 type, 2 types, normal time reduction)
The first discrimination means that performs discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means that displays the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and the identification that shows the first discrimination result on the display means. When the information is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the first determination condition after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed are different. A specific game state setting means for setting a specific gaming state that facilitates the establishment of the second discrimination condition, a second discrimination means for discriminating when the second discrimination condition is satisfied, and a result of discrimination by the second discrimination means. When the identification information indicating the second discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the variable ball-entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the variable ball-entry means thereof. It has a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. The specific gaming state setting means includes a first specific gaming state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and a second specific gaming state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first specific gaming state. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is at least configurable.

Here, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or losing of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, or if the winning or losing lottery of the game is not a hit, A gaming machine has been proposed in which a privileged game that is advantageous to a player is executed when a gaming ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, as a gaming state of the gaming machine, there is one that makes it possible to set a gaming state in which the above-mentioned privileged game is easily executed. The above-mentioned gaming machine sets two gaming states, a gaming state advantageous to the player and a gaming state other than that, and it is not possible to set a plurality of gaming states advantageous to the player step by step. , There was a problem that the game tended to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the monotonousness of the game and improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied is different during the specific gaming state, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. There is.

In the gaming machine D1, a display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result by the first discriminating means and the second identification information for showing the discriminating result by the second discriminating means, and the display thereof. A first dynamic display means for causing the means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, and a second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period. And the first dynamic display period setting means for setting the first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means, and the second dynamic display means executed by the second dynamic display means. It has a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first identification information indicates the first discrimination result to the display means. The specific gaming state is set according to the stop display in, and the variable ball entry means is set according to the stop display of the second identification information in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result. Is variable to the second state, and the specific gaming state setting means is the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means, or the second dynamic display period. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are set by differentiating the second dynamic display period set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set by making the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period in the specific game state different from each other, the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set a game state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied is different.

In the gaming machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first specific gaming state is set than when the second specific gaming state is set. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a period.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to easily execute the determination by the second determination means, so that there is an effect that the game state can be easily set.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the first discriminating result, and the second dynamic display period setting means is the second discriminating means during the second specific gaming state. When the discrimination result of is the first discrimination result, the second dynamic display period is set shorter than when the discrimination result is other than the first discrimination result. ..

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is the first discrimination result, a dynamic display period shorter than that of the other discrimination results is set, so that there is an effect that the privilege game can be easily executed. ..

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first dynamic display period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is easier to set a shorter first dynamic display period when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set, it is easy to set the game state. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D5, when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the first discriminating result during the first specific state, the first dynamic display period setting means other than the first discriminating result. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that a first dynamic display period shorter than that of the determination result is set.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first determination result is in the first specific state, a shorter first dynamic display period is set than when the determination result is other than the first determination result. As a result, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving anxiety to the player.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D6, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first ball entry information when the predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied, and the first ball entry information acquired by the first acquisition means. The first storage means capable of storing a plurality of machines up to the first predetermined number until the first determination condition is satisfied, and the second ball entry information is acquired when the predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied. A second storage means capable of storing a plurality of the second acquisition means and the second ball entry information acquired by the second acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied. When the determination result of the first second determination means executed in the state where the first specific gaming state is set is the second determination result, the first specific gaming state is set. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first first determination means executed in the state of being executed is set. ..

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means executed first in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, it is the first in the state where the first specific game state is set. A dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first determination means executed in is set. As a result, even if the first specific gaming state is set in a state where both the first storage means and the second storage means store the entry information, the second of the second discriminating means which is advantageous to the player. The determination result can be immediately notified to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving anxiety to the player.

<Characteristic E group> (Electric support control at the time of winning a small hit during a short time)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. When the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means executed by the privilege game execution means. After the privilege game is completed, the game state setting means that can set the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means that is set by the game state setting means. It has an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state, and the game state setting means sets the first game state according to the end condition that is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the timing of playing is different.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, since the timing for ending the time-saving game is the same, the player can immediately grasp whether or not the time-saving game has ended, so that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game becomes more interesting. There was a problem that it would drop. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be changed based on the type of the satisfied ending condition, so that when the ending condition is satisfied, the player is also interested in the type. You can have it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine E1 has a small privilege game executing means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. The end condition setting means can be satisfied at least when the first end condition which can be satisfied when the dynamic display is executed and the second end condition which can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. The condition and the condition are set, and when it is determined that the first end condition is satisfied, the corresponding dynamic display ends and the identification information is stopped and displayed. The first game state is set based on the fact, and when it is determined that the second end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small privilege game. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the established end condition, there is an effect that a game without a sense of discomfort can be provided.

The gaming machine E2 has an end condition determining means for determining whether any of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, and the end condition determining means is the second end condition. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first end condition is prioritized over the end condition for determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a plurality of end conditions are satisfied by one determination executed by the determination means, the first end condition is preferentially determined. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation in which the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition to occur, and it is possible to provide a special feeling to the player.

When the configuration of the gaming machine E3 is used, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second ending condition, the first game is based on the satisfaction of the first ending condition. It is preferable to configure it so as to be more advantageous to the player than when setting the state. As a result, it is possible to pay attention not only to whether or not the end condition is satisfied to the player, but also to the end condition that is satisfied, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the end condition determining means determines whether the first end condition is satisfied when the determination of 1 is executed by the determination means, and determines that the first end condition is not satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the timing of determining whether or not each end condition is satisfied is different, it is possible to determine whether or not the first end condition is satisfied with certain priority over whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. effective.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E4, when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the second discriminating result, the gaming type determining means for determining the type of the small privilege game to be executed is provided, and the gaming type is determined. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the means is to determine one type among a plurality of types having different periods in which the small privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to execute a small privilege game for which the execution period is different. Therefore, the timing at which the second game state ends can be significantly different over the game period during the small privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E5, the variable ball-entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball is easy to enter and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the state of the variable ball-entry means are variable. The variable control means for controlling is provided, and the small privilege game executing means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entering means is in the first state as the small privilege game. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the degree of advantage to the player differs greatly depending on whether the first end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set and the second end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to both the type of the termination condition established for the player and the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E6, the type of the small privilege game is the gaming machine E7, wherein the variable ball-entry means during the small privilege game has a different length of the period in which the second state is reached.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the amount of benefits given to the player as a small privilege game is also variable according to the type of the small privilege game to be set, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the type of the small privilege game to be executed. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine E7, the type of the small privilege game is characterized by having a plurality of types having the same length of the period during which the variable ball-entry means is in the first state during the small privilege game. The gaming machine E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E7, if the execution period of the small privilege game is different for a plurality of small privilege games in which the amount of privilege that can be given to the player as the small privilege game is set to be the same. This has the effect that the length of the period in which the second gaming state is set can be made different.

<Characteristic F group> (player selects multiple time-saving games)
A first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, which is different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball entering the first ball-entry means. The first determination is executed based on the acquisition of the first acquisition information that can be acquired in the case of the above, and the second acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means is acquired. A discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the above, a display means for displaying the discrimination result for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means are executed. After the privileged game is completed, the first game state and the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be set, and the advantageous game state setting means is used. When the game state is set, the first advantageous game for executing the first determination and the second advantageous game for executing the second determination, which is different from the first game, are played. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a selection means that can be selected by a person.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Such a gaming machine is configured to allow a player to perform a game in which a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area different from the usual one when the above-mentioned time-saving game is executed. The above-mentioned gaming machine can provide a special feeling by executing a gaming method different from the usual one during a time-saving game, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, but a predetermined gaming method Since it is only for the player to perform the above, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be changed based on the type of the satisfied ending condition, so that when the ending condition is satisfied, the player is also interested in the type. You can have it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the player can select a gaming method in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the privileged game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the privileged game executed by the second advantageous game. ..

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second advantageous game is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to continue than the first advantageous game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of causing the gaming ball to reach the gaming area with variable firing intensity. It has a first game area where it can flow down and a second game area which is different from the first game area where a game ball launched with a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity can flow down. The first ball-entry means is provided in one game area, the second ball-entry means is provided in the second game area, and the selection means is characterized in that the firing intensity of the launching means is changed. Game machine F4.

The gaming machine F4 has a variable ball-entry means that allows a game ball launched by the launching means to enter when the privilege game is executed, and the variable ball-entry means covers the first gaming area. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that both the flowing game ball and the flowing game ball flowing down the second gaming area are configured to be able to enter the ball.

The gaming machine F4 or F5 has a third ball entry means that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first ball entry means when the advantageous state is set, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means. The first determination is executed even when the ball is balled and the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first advantageous game is a game in which a game ball is inserted into the third entry means. A gaming machine F6 characterized by this.

In the game machine F6, the first ball-entry means is provided in a third game area different from the first game area and the second game area in the game area. Machine F7.

In any of the gaming machines F5 to F7, a first detecting means for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area and a second detecting means for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area. The execution game determination means for determining the type of the currently selected advantageous game based on the detection result of the first detection means and the detection result of the second detection means, and the execution game determination means. The gaming machine F8 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying a player of information for indicating a determination result.

In the gaming machine F8, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the notification means notifies while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Time-saving fall conditions that differ depending on the Yoshikaze type)
Variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state, and the variable entry means for establishing the opening condition. Based on the above, the variable control means for changing the closed state to the open state, the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first flow path for the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the above. A distribution means capable of distributing a game ball entering the variable ball entry means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the first game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path, and a game ball entering the first flow path. Based on the above, a first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, and a second ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter based on the fact that the game ball enters the second flow path. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination means that executes the first determination, and the second determination means that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second discriminating means for executing the two discriminating means, the first gaming state in which the variable ball entering means is easily changed to the open state by the variable control means, and the first gaming state in which the variable ball entering means is less likely to be changed to the open state than the first gaming state. The game state setting means has two game states and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state, and the game state setting means executes the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means. The gaming state is set based on the execution of the above, and when the first gaming state is set, the execution of the first determination is more than the execution of the second determination. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a gaming state can be easily set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probabilistic gaming state in which the lottery result becomes advantageous after the execution of the privileged gaming is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probabilistic gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the gaming tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine G1, it is possible to make it more difficult to set the second gaming state when the first determination is executed than when the second determination is executed. Therefore, when the first gaming state is set, the first determination is performed. It is possible to play a game while expecting that one determination is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the first privilege game is executed when the first discriminating means has a specific first discriminating result, and when the second discriminating means has a specific second discriminating result, the first discriminating means is executed. It has a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game, and is described according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. The gaming machine G2 is characterized by having a ratio variable means for varying the set ratio set in the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state are determined according to the game state when a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set to any of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified not only by the discrimination result but also by the game state.

In the gaming machine G2, a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming states, and based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, 1 from the plurality of gaming states. The gaming machine G3 is characterized by having a selection setting means for selecting and setting the gaming state of the above.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, one gaming state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that not only the discrimination result but also the set game state can be interested and the interest can be improved.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a second variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a specific area where the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. A gaming machine G4 characterized by having and.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, it is possible to perform a game in which it is expected whether or not the ball enters a specific area, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

In the gaming machine G4, the privilege granted by the privilege granting means sets a high probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, the probability of being determined to be a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result can be changed, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

In either of the gaming machines G1 or G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first determination result is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine G6 is characterized by having a special state setting means for setting a probability of being determined as a determination result or the specific second determination result higher than usual.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the player can be worried about whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. be.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there is a case in which a time-saving game that facilitates a lottery is executed for a predetermined period after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 displays a first discriminating means for discriminating when the first discriminating condition is satisfied and identification information indicating the discriminating result by the first discriminating means. When the display means and the identification information indicating the first determination result are displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means are executed. After the privilege game is completed, the specific game state setting means for setting the specific game state in which the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and the determination when the second determination condition is satisfied. When the second discriminating means to be performed and the identification information indicating the second discriminating result as a result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means are displayed on the display means, the game ball enters from the first state where it is difficult to enter. It has a variable ball-entry means that can be changed to an easy second state and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means plays a game in the specific area. Even when the ball passes, the privilege game is executed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a first discriminating means for discriminating when the first discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discriminating result by the first discriminating means, and a display means for displaying the discriminating result by the first discriminating means. When the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means are A specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is likely to be satisfied after the end, and a second determination for performing determination when the second determination condition is satisfied. When the means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means are displayed on the display means, the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter from the first state in which it is difficult to enter. It has a variable ball-entry means that can be changed to and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means has a game ball that has passed through the specific area. In this case as well, the above-mentioned privilege game is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game ball toward the game area,
An adjusting means that can adjust the firing intensity of the game ball launched by the launching means according to the operation of the player, and
The game area provided with the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the first area on which the game ball launched by the launching means at the first firing intensity can flow down.
In the game area provided with a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, a game ball launched by the launching means at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can flow down. Second area and
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination when a game ball enters the first entry means and a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied.
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied, a second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and a second discrimination means.
A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means.
A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the result of the second determination by the second determination means on the display means.
When the first identification information indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed as a result of the first determination, or when the second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is displayed as a result of the second determination. A privilege game execution means that can execute a privilege game that gives a privilege to the player when the stop display is displayed, and
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first game state.
In a gaming machine having an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means.
The game state setting means can set the second game state after the privilege game is completed.
The end condition setting means has a first end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is executed more than the first determination as a plurality of end conditions, and the first determination rather than the second determination. It is possible to set at least a second termination condition that is likely to be satisfied when many are executed.
The first end condition can be satisfied when the second determination is executed the first time.
The second end condition can be satisfied at least when the first determination is executed a second time different from the first time.
The gaming machine
Oite in the second game condition, it has a notifiable notification means the firing information for launching the game ball toward the playfield be advantageous to the player,
When one game number is from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the end of the dynamic display, the first end in the second game state. as a game period of the game times the second identification information conditions are not satisfied is dynamically displayed, said second game state the first number-th said first termination condition is that obtained satisfied in the first 2 A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming period shorter than the gaming period of the game times in which identification information is dynamically displayed can be set.

Images